HIS MAJESTY’S GOVERNMENT OF NEPAL

Ministry of Local Development

TECHNICAL DIVISION

Technical
Specifications
for Agricultural and Rural
Roads

February 1998

Prepared with the assistance from

NEP/96/01/ADB (TA No.2556) : “Institutional Strengthening for Rural Infrastructure Development”
Project
funded by Asian Development Bank and executed by International Labour Organisation
For the use of proposed
DEPARTMENT OF LOCAL INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT (DoLID)

Technical Specifications : General 1

 Technical Specifications
for labour-based construction work of
agricultural and rural roads

DoLIDAR/DOC/03

Technical Specifications : General 2

These technical specifications are for the work carried out in agricultural and rural roads in Nepal and
shall apply as required under the contracts with Contractors or as per the agreements with Users’
Groups or Local Labour Groups. In all cases, the work shall be executed as per the Specifications or
otherwise as directed by the Engineer and shall confirm to the location, lines, dimensions, grades and
cross-sections shown on the drawings or as indicated by the Engineer.

This document covers EIGHTEEN different areas for which separate Sections are prepared as
follows. The general aspects such as definitions, scope of work, construction equipment, engineering
drawings, site information, setting out, public utilities, precautions for safeguarding the environment,
general rules for the measurement of work, etc. are covered in the ‘General’ Section, given at the
beginning.

Section 1 : Site Clearance

Section 2 : Earthwork and Drain Construction
Section 3 : Sub-base, Base and Shoulders
Section 4 : Bituminous Courses
Section 5 : Quality Control for Road Works
Section 6 : Materials for Structures
Section 7 : Brick Work for Structures
Section 8 : Stone Masonry for Structures
Section 9 : Formwork and Surface Finish for Structures
Section 10 : Steel Reinforcement for Structures
Section 11 : Plain and Reinforced Cement Concrete for Structures
Section 12 : Structural Steel Work for Structures
Section 13 : Bearings
Section 14 : Expansion Joints
Section 15 : Pipe Culverts
Section 16 : Boring at Site
Section 17 : Protection Work
Section 18 : Bio-engineering Work

The quality of work and material shall comply with the minimum requirement or higher than what is
requisite in the respective Sections of these Specifications. Where the Specifications and the
drawings described a portion of the work only in general terms or in other words do not cover the
details, it shall be understood that only the best general practice is to be followed and the materials
and workmanship of the best quality are to be employed within the limitations prevailed at site. In
such cases, the work shall fully comply with the instructions received from the Engineer at site.

Technical Specifications : General 3

 Table of Content

Table of Content i
List of Figures xii
List of Tables xii

G General

G -1 Introduction 1
G -2 Definitions 1
G -3 General Material Testing Requirements 2
G -4 Sieve Sizes Generally in Use 2
G -5 Scope of Work 3
G -6 Construction Equipment 4
G -7 Engineering Drawings 4
G -8 Site Information 4
G -9 Setting Out 5
G -10 Public Utilities 6
G -11 Precautions for Safeguarding the Environment 7
G -11.1 General 7
G -11.2 Borrow Pits for Embankment Construction 7
G -11.3 Quarry Operations 7
G -11.4 Control of Soil Erosion, Sedimentation and Water Pollution 7
G -11.5 Pollution from Hot-Mix Plants and Batching Plants 7
G -11.6 Substances Hazardous to Health 7
G -11.7 Other Precautions 8
G -12 Arrangement for Traffic during Construction 8
G -12.1 General Arrangement 8
G -12.2 Traffic Passage along a path of the Existing Carriageway under Improvement 8
G -12.3 Traffic Passage along a Temporary Diversion 8
G -12.4 Traffic Safety and Control 9
G -12.5 Maintenance of Diversion and Traffic Control Devices 9
G -12.6 Measurements for Payment 9
G -13 General Rules for the Measurement of Works for Payment 9
G -13.1 General 9
G -13.2 Measurement of Lead for Materials 10
G -13.3 Measurement of Pavement Thickness when making the payment on Volume Basis 10
G -13.4 Measurement of Pavement Thickness when making the payment on Area Basis 11
G -14 Scope of Rates for Different Form of Contracts 11

1 Site Clearance

1 -1 Clearing and Grubbing 13

1 -1.1 Description 13
1 -1.2 Preservation of Property/Amenity 13
1 -1.3 Methods, Tools and Plants 14
1 -1.4 Disposal of Cleared Materials 14
1 -1.5 Measurements for Payment 14

Technical Specifications : General 4

1 -1.6 Rates 15
1 -2 Dismantling Culverts, Bridges, Pavements and Other Structures 15
1 -2.1 Description 15
1 -2.2 Dismantling Culverts and Bridges 16
1 -2.3 Dismantling Pavements and Other Structures 16
1 -2.4 Backfilling 16
1 -2.5 Disposal of Dismantled Materials 17
1 -2.6 Measurement of Payment 17
1 -2.6 Rates 17

2 Earthwork and Drain Construction

2 -1 Roadway and Drain Excavation 19

2 -1.1 Description 19
2 -1.2 Classification of Excavation Material 19
2 -1.3 Construction Operations 20
2 -1.4 Plying of Construction Traffic 23
2 -1.5 Preservation of Property 23
2 -1.6 Preparation of Cut Formation 23
2 -1.7 Finishing Operations 24
2 -1.8 Measurements for Payment 24
2 -1.9 Rates 24
2 -2 Blasting Operations 25
2 -2.1 General 25
2 -2.2 Materials, Tools and Equipment 26
2 -2.3 Personnel 27
2 -2.4 Blasting Operations 27
2 -2.5 Misfire 28
2 -2.6 Account of Explosives 29
2 -3 Pre-splitting Rock Excavation 29
2 -3.1 General 29
2 -3.2 Construction Operations 29
2 -3.3 Tolerances 31
2 -3.4 Measurements for Payment 31
2 -3.5 Rates 31
2 -4 Excavation for Structures 32
2 -4.1 Description 32
2 -4.2 Classification of Excavation 32
2 -4.3 Construction Operations 32
2 -4.4 Measurements for Payment 34
2 -4.5 Rates 34
2 -5 Embankment Construction 35
2 -5.1 Description 35
2 -5.2 Materials 35
2 -5.3 Construction Operations 36
2 -5.4 Embankment Construction under Special Conditions 39
2 -5.5 Plying of Construction Traffic 40
2 -5.6 Measurements for Payment 40
2 -5.7 Rates 41
2 -6 Soil Erosion 42

Technical Specifications : General 5

2 -6.1 Description 42
2 -6.2 Materials 42
2 -6.3 Construction Operations 42
2 -6.4 Measurements for Payment 43
2 -6.5 Rates 44
2 -7 Turfing with Sods 44
2 -7.1 Description 44
2 -7.2 Materials 44
2 -7.3 Construction Operations 44
2 -7.4 Measurements for Payment 45
2 -7.5 Rates 45
2 -8 Seeding and Mulching 46
2 -8.1 Description 46
2 -8.2 Materials 46
2 -8.3 Seeding Operations 46
2 -8.4 Mulching and Application of Fertiliser/Organic Manure 46
2 -8.5 Maintenance 47
2 -8.6 Measurements for Payment 47
2 -8.7 Rates 47
2 -9 Surface/Sub-surface Drains 47
2 -9.1 Introduction 47
2 -9.2 Surface Drains 47
2 -9.3 Sub-surface Drains 47
2 -9.4 Measurements for Payment 50
2 -9.5 Rates 51

3 Sub-base, Base and Shoulders

3 -1 Granular Sub-base 53
3 -1.1 Description 53
3 -1.2 Materials 53
3 -1.3 Construction Operations 53
3 -1.4 Finishing of Surface and Quality Control Works 54
3 -1.5 Arrangement for Traffic 54
3 -1.6 Measurements for Payment 54
3 -1.7 Rates 54
3 -2 Water Bound Macadam Sub-base/Base Course/Wearing Course 55
3 -2.1 Description 55
3 -2.2 Materials 55
3 -2.3 Construction Operations 57
3 -2.4 Finishing of Surface and Quality Control Works 59
3 -2.5 Arrangement for Traffic 59
3 -2.6 Measurements for Payment 59
3 -2.7 Rates 59
3 -3 Shoulder Construction 59
3 -3.1 Description 59
3 -3.2 Materials 60
3 -3.3 Construction Operations 60
3 -3.4 Measurements for Payment 60
3 -3.5 Rates 60

Technical Specifications : General 6

4 Bituminous Courses

4 -1 Preparation of Base for Bituminous Courses 61

4 -1.1 Description 61
4 -1.2 Materials 61
4 -1.3 Construction Operations 61
4 -1.4 Arrangement for Traffic 62
4 -1.5 Measurements for Payment 62
4 -1.6 Rates 62
4 -2 Tact Coat 63
4 -2.1 Description 63
4 -2.2 Materials 63
4 -2.3 Construction Operations 63
4 -2.4 Quality Control Works 63
4 -2.5 Arrangement for Traffic 64
4 -2.6 Measurements for Payment 64
4 -2.7 Rates 64
4 -3 Bituminous Macadam Base/Binder Course 64
4 -3.1 Description 64
4 -3.2 Materials 64
4 -3.3 Construction Operations 66
4 -3.4 Finishing of Surface and Quality Control Works 67
4 -3.5 Arrangement for Traffic 68
4 -3.6 Measurements for Payment 68
4 -3.7 Rates 68
4 -4 Surface Dressing 68
4 -4.1 Description 68
4 -4.2 Materials 68
4 -4.3 Construction Operations 69
4 -4.4 Opening to Traffic 70
4 -4.5 Finishing of Surface and Quality Control Works 70
4 -4.6 Measurements for Payment 71
4 -4.7 Rates 71
4 -5 Seal Coat 71
4 -5.1 Description 71
4 -5.2 Materials 71
4 -5.3 Construction Operations 72
4 -5.4 Opening to Traffic 72
4 -5.5 Finishing of Surface and Quality Control Works 73
4 -5.6 Arrangement for Traffic 73
4 -5.7 Measurements for Payment 73
4 -5.8 Rates 73
4 -6 Supply of Material Aggregates for Pavement Courses 73
4 -6.1 General 73
4 -6.2 Sizes of Mineral Aggregates 73
4 -6.3 Stacking 74
4 -6.4 Quality Control of Materials 74
4 -6.5 Measurements for Payment 75
4 -6.6 Rates 75

Technical Specifications : General 7

5 Quality Control for Road Works

5 -1 Control of Alignment and Surface Regularity 77

5 -1.1 Description 77
5 -1.2 Horizontal Alignments 77
5 -1.3 Longitudinal Profile 77
5 -1.4 Surface Regularity of Sub-grade and Pavement Courses 77
5 -1.5 Rectification 78
5 -2 Quality Control Tests during Construction 79
5 -2.1 General 79
5 -2.2 Tests on Earthwork for Embankment Construction 79
5 -2.3 Tests on Sub-bases and Bases 80
5 -2.4 Tests on Bituminous Constructions 81

6 Materials for Structures

6 -1 General 83
6 -2 Bricks 83
6 -3 Cast Iron 83
6 -4 Cement 83
6 -5 Coarse Aggregate 83
6 -6 Reinforced Concrete Pipe 83
6 -7 Sand 83
6 -8 Steel 84
6 -8.1 High Tensile Steel for Pre-stressing 84
6 -8.2 Mild Steel Reinforcement 84
6 -8.3 Rivet Steel 84
6 -8.4 Structural Steel 84
6 -9 Water 84
6 -10 Timber 84
6 -11 Gabion Wire 85
6 -12 Storage of Materials 85
6 -12.1 General 85
6 -12.2 Bricks 85
6 -12.3 Cement 85
6 -12.4 Aggregates 85
6 -12.5 Mild Steel 85
6 -12.6 High Tensile Steel for Pre-stressing 85

7 Brick Work for Structures

7 -1 Mortars 87
7 -2 Soaking of Bricks 87
7 -3 Laying of Bricks 87
7 -4 Joints 88
7 -5 Jointing with Existing Structures 88
7 -6 Curing 88

Technical Specifications : General 8

7 -7 Scaffolding 88
7 -8 Condition of Equipment 88
7 -9 Finishing of Surfaces 88
7 -9.1 General 88
7 -9.2 Jointing 89
7 -9.3 Pointing 89
7 -9.4 Plastering 89
7 -9.5 Curing of Finishes 89
7 -9.6 Scaffolding for Finishes 90
7 -10 Weep Holes 90
7 -11 Architectural Coping for Wing/Return/Parapet Walls 90
7 -12 Measurements for Payment 90
7 -13 Rates 91
7 -13.1 Brick Work 91
7 -13.2 Plastering 91
7 -13.3 Pointing 91
7 -13.4 Architectural Coping 91

8 Stone Masonry for Structures

8 -1 Materials 93
8 -2 Type of Masonry 93
8 -3 Construction Operations 93
8 -3.1 General Requirements 93
8 -3.2 Random Masonry (Coursed and Un-coursed) 94
8 -3.3 Dry Rubble Masonry for Retaining Walls 95
8 -3.4 Square Rubble-Coursed Rubble Masonry (First sort) 95
8 -3.5 Square Rubble-Coursed Rubble Masonry (Second sort) 96
8 -3.6 Ashlar Masonry (Plain Ashlar) 96
8 -3.7 Pointing 97
8 -3.8 Curing 97
8 -3.9 Scaffolding 97
8 -3.10 Weep Holes 97
8 -3.11 Jointing with Existing Structures 98
8 -3.12 Architectural Coping for Wing/Return/Parapet Walls 98
8 -4 Measurements for Payment 98
8 -5 Rates 98

9 Formwork and Surface Finish for Structures

9 -1 General 99
9 -2 Construction Operation 99
9 -3 Formed Surfaces and Finish 99
9 -4 Preparation of Formwork before Concreting 99
9 -5 Removal of Formwork 100
9 -6 Measurements for Payment 101
9 -7 Rate 101

Technical Specifications : General 9

10 Steel Reinforcement for Structures

10 -1 Description 103
10 -2 General 103
10 -3 Bending of Reinforcement 103
10 -4 Placing of Reinforcement 103
10 -5 Coupling of Bars 104
10 -6 Welding of Bars 104
10 -7 Measurements for Payment 105
10 -8 Rate 105

11 Plain and Reinforced Cement Concrete for Structures

11 -1 General 107
11 -2 Grades of Concrete 107
11 -2.1 Controlled Concrete 107
11 -2.2 Ordinary Concrete 107
11 -3 Strength Requirement of Concrete 107
11 -4 Admixtures 108
11 -5 Size of Coarse Aggregates 108
11 -6 Proportioning Concrete 109
11 -6.1 Controlled Concrete 109
11 -6.2 Ordinary Concrete 109
11 -6.3 Quantity of Water 110
11 -7 Mixing Concrete 111
11 -8 Transporting, Placing and Compacting of Concrete 111
11 -9 Concreting under Water 112
11 -10 Curing of Concrete 113
11 -10.1 Protection and Water Curing 113
11 -10.2 Steam Curing 113
11 -11 Working in Extreme Weather Conditions 113
11 -12 Finishing 114
11 -13 Construction Joints 114
11 -14 Tests and Standards of Acceptance 115
11 -14.1 Preliminary Tests for Controlled Concrete 115
11 -14.2 Work Strength Tests for Controlled and Ordinary Concrete 115
11 -14.3 Standards of Acceptance 116
11 -15 Use of Plums in Ordinary Concrete 116
11 -16 Measurements for Payment 116
11 -17 Rate 116

12 Structural Steel Work for Structures

12 -1 Description 117
12 -2 General 117
12 -3 Materials 117
12 -4 Fabrication 118
12 -4.1 General 118
12 -4.2 Preparation of Edges and Ends 118

Technical Specifications : General 10

12 -4.3 Preparation of Holes 119
12 -4.4 Rivet and Riveting 120
12 -4.5 Bolts, Nuts and Washers 121
12 -4.6 Pins and Pin Holes 122
12 -4.7 Shop Erection and Match Marking 123
12 -4.8 Welding 123
12 -4.9 Tolerances 123
12 -5 Erection 124
12 -5.1 General 124
12 -5.2 Organisation and Equipment 124
12 -5.3 Handling and Storing Materials 124
12 -5.4 False Work 125
12 -5.5 Straightening Bent Material 125
12 -5.6 Assembling Steel 125
12 -5.7 Field Inspection 126
12 -6 Painting 126
12 -6.1 General 126
11 -6.2 Surface Preparation 126
12 -6.3 Coatings 126
12 -6.4 Painting in the Shop 127
12 -6.5 Painting at Site 127
12 -7 Measurements for Payment 127
12 -8 Rate 128

13 Bearings

13 -1 Description 129
13 -2 General 129
13 -3 RCC Bearings 129
13 -4 Steel Bearings 129
13 -4.1 Materials 129
13 -4.2 Construction Operations 130
13 -4.3 Tolerances 130
13 -5 Elastomeric Bearings 130
13 -5.1 General 130
13 -5.2 Materials 131
13 -5.3 General Requirements 132
13 -5.4 Tolerances 133
13 -5.5 Protection against Corrosion 133
13 -6 Paper Bearings for Slabs 133
13 -7 Inspection and Testing 134
13 -8 Measurements for Payment 134
13 -9 Rate 134

14 Expansion Joints

14 -1 General 135

Technical Specifications : General 11

14 -2 Fabrication 135
14 -2.1 Open Joints 135
14 -2.2 Filled Joints 135
14 -2.3 Steel Work 135
14 -2.4 Filler Material at Expansion Joints 135
14 -3 Measurements for Payment 136
14 -4 Rate 136

15 Pipe Culverts

15 -1 General 137
15 -2 Materials 137
15 -3 Excavation for Pipe 137
15 -4 Bedding for Pipe 137
15 -4.1 First Class Bedding 138
15 -4.2 Concrete Cradle Bedding 138
15 -5 Laying of Pipe 138
15 -6 Jointing 138
15 -6.1 Collar Joint 138
15 -6.2 Flush Joint 138
15 -6.3 Jointing Pipes under Light Hydraulic Pressures 139
15 -6.4 Joints (General) 139
15 -7 Backfilling 139
15 -8 Head Walls and Other Ancillary Works 139
15 -9 Opening to Traffic 140
15 -10 Measurements for Payment 140
15 -11 Rate 140

16 Boring at Site

16 -1 Description 141
16 -2 General 141
16 -3 Borings 141
16 -4 Methods of Sampling 141
16 -5 Procedure for Taking Samples 142
16 -5.1 Disturbed Soil Samples 142
16 -5.2 Undisturbed Soil Samples 142
16 -5.3 Disturbed Rock Samples 142
16 -5.4 Undisturbed Rock Samples 142
16 -6 Records of Borings and Trial Pits 143
16 -7 Protection, Handling and Labelling of Samples 143
16 -8 Measurements for Payment 143
16 -9 Rate 143

17 Protection Work

17 -1 Apron 145
17 -1.1 Description 145

Technical Specifications : General 12

17 -1.2 General 145
17 -1.3 Laying Boulder Apron 145
17 -1.4 Laying GI Wire Crates (Gabion) and Mattresses in the Apron 145
17 -2 Pitching on Slopes 146
17 -2.1 Description 146
17 -2.2 General 146
17 -2.3 Construction Operations 147
17 -3 Rubble Stone/Brick Flooring over Cement Concrete Bedding 147
17 -3.1 Description 147
17 -3.2 Construction Operations 147
17 -4 Dry Rubble/Brick Flooring 148
17 -5 Measurements for Payment 148
17 -6 Rate 149

18 Bio-engineering Work

18 -1 Provision of Seed 151

18 -1.1 General 151
18 -1.2 Grass Seed Collection 151
18 -1.3 Tree and Shrub Seed Collection 152
18 -2 Provision of Plant Cuttings 153
18 -2.1 General 153
18 -2.2 Provision of Grass Cuttings 153
18 -2.3 Provision of Hardwood Cuttings 154
18 -3 Nursery Construction 155
18 -3.1 General 155
18 -3.2 Nursery Establishment 155
18 -3.3 Construction of Nursery Beds 156
18 -4 Nursery Operation and Management 158
18 -4.1 General 158
18 -4.2 Nursery Production of Grass 158
18 -4.3 Nursery Production of Trees and Shrubs in Polypots 159
18 -4.4 Nursery Production of Hardwood Plants by Vegetative Methods 159
18 -4.5 Extraction of Plants from the Nursery 160
18 -4.6 Compost and Mulch Production 160
18 -5 Final Slope Preparation for Bio-engineering 161
18 -5.1 General 161
18 -5.2 Cut Slope Preparation for Grass Planting 161
18 -5.3 Final Preparation of Fill Slopes for Bio-engineering 162
18 -6 Site Planting and Sowing 162
18 -6.1 General 162
18 -6.2 Sowing of Grasses on Site 163
18 -6.3 Direct Seed Sowing of Shrubs and Trees on Site 163
18 -6.4 Site Planting of Grass Slips and Cuttings 164
18 -6.5 Site Planting of Shrubs and Trees Raised in Polythene Pots 166
18 -6.6 Site Planting of Hardwood Cuttings 167
18 -6.7 Brush Layering, Palisades and Fascines 168
18 -6.8 Use of Fertiliser 170
18 -7 Jute Netting Works 171
18 -7.1 General 171

Technical Specifications : General 13

18 -7.2 Supply of Jute Netting 171
18 -7.3 Placement of Netting 172
18 -8 Gabion Wire Bolsters 173
18 -8.1 General 173
18 -8.2 Fabrication of Bolster Panels 173
18 -8.3 Placement of Contour Bolsters 173
18 -8.4 Placement of Herringbone Bolsters 174
18 -9 Site Protection 175
18 -9.1 General 175
18 -9.2 Provision and Role of Site Watchmen 175
18 -9.3 Fabrication of Bamboo Tree Guards 176
18 -9.4 Placement of Bamboo Tree Guards 177
18 -10 Site Aftercare and Maintenance 177

List of Figures

Figure G -2 : Terms used in the Specifications to describe Cross-sectional Elements of a Road 1

Figure 13 -5 : General Requirements of Elastomer 132

List of Tables

Table G -4 : Sieve Sizes Generally in Use 2

Table 2 -9 : Grading Requirements of Filter Material 48

Table 3 -1 : Grading for Granular Sub-base Materials 53

Table 3 -2(a) :
Physical Requirements of Coarse Aggregates for Water Bound Macadam 55
Table 3 -2(b) :
Grading Requirements of Coarse Aggregates 56
Table 3 -2(c) :
Grading for Screenings 56

Table 4 -3(a) :
Physical Requirements of Aggregates for Bituminous Macadam 65
Table 4 -3(b) :
Aggregates Grading for 75 mm Compacted Thickness of Bituminous Macadam 65
Table 4 -3(c) :
Aggregates Grading for 50 mm Compacted Thickness of Bituminous Macadam 65
Table 4 -4(a) : Size
Requirements of Stone Chippings for Surface Dressing 69
Table 4 -4(b) :
Quantities of Materials required for 10 m2 of Road Surface for Surface Dressing 69
Table 4 -6(a) : Size
Requirements for Mineral Aggregates 73

Technical Specifications : General 14

Table 4 -6(b) :
Percentage Reduction in Volume obtained from Stack Measurements 75

Table 5 -1 : Permitted Tolerances of Surface Regularity for Pavement Courses 78

Table 5 -2(a) :
Control Tests and their Frequency for Sub-bases and Bases 80
Table 5 -2(b) :
Control Tests and their Frequency for Bituminous Constructions 81

Table 11 -3 : Compressive Strength of Concrete in Work Tests 108

Table 11 -5 : Maximum Nominal Size of Coarse Aggregates 108
Table 11 -6(a) :
Ingredients Required for Different Grades of Ordinary Concrete 110
Table 11 -6(b) :
Slump Values for Different Types of Work 110

Table 12 -4 : Diameter of Holes for Rivets 120

Table 12 -7 : Weight of Rivet Heads 128

Table 13 -5 : Physical Properties of Elastomeric Bearings 131

Table 16 -4 : Methods of Sampling 141

Table 16 -5 : Size of Soil Sample Required 142

Table 18 -2 : Details of Plant Cuttings 153

Table 18 -3 : Construction Details of Nursery Beds 157
Table 18 -6(a) :
Spacing of Plant Lines 165
Table 18 -6(b) :
Chemical Composition of Chemical Fertilisers Commonly Available in Nepal 170

G
General

Technical Specifications : General 15

G -1 INTRODUCTION

These Specifications are for the works carried out in rural and agricultural roads in Nepal and
shall apply as required under the contracts with Contractors or as per the agreements with
Users’ Groups or local labour groups. In all cases, the work shall be executed as per the
Specifications or otherwise as directed by the Engineer and shall conform to the location,
lines, dimensions, grades and cross-sections shown on the drawings or as indicated by the
Engineer.

The quality of work and material shall comply with the minimum requirement or higher than
what is requisite in the respective Sections of these Specifications. Where the Specifications
and the drawings describe a portion of the work only in general terms or in other words do
not cover the details, it shall be understood that only the best general practice is to be
followed and the materials and workmanship of the best quality are to be employed within
the limitations prevailed at site. In such cases, the work shall fully comply with the
instructions received from the Engineer at site.

G -2 DEFINITIONS

The term “Contractor” is often being used while describing the Specifications. It should be
understood as “contractor” or as “users’ group” depending upon the party who undertakes or
is about to undertake the said work from the office. So, the terms “Contract”, “Contractor”,
“Engineer”, “Drawings”, “Government”, “Works”, “Site”, “Item Rate Contract”,
“Provisional Sums” used in the Specifications shall be referred in line with the definition
given in the General Condition of Contract/Users’ Group Agreement.

The following abbreviations shall have the meaning as described below:

ASTM : American Society for Testing and Materials

BS : British Standards published by the British Standards Institution
CBR : California Bearing Ratio
IS : Indian Standards published by the Bureau of Indian Standards

The various elements in the cross-section of a road referred to in these Specifications are
shown in Figure G -2.

ROADWAY WIDTH
EARTHEN SHOULDER CARRIAGEWAY WIDTH
WEARING COURSE/SURFACING
FORMATION
LEVEL BASE

SUB-BASE
SUBGRADE

EMBANKMENT

Technical Specifications : Site Clearance 1

Figure G -2 : Terms used in the Specifications to describe Cross-sectional Elements
of a Road
G -3 GENERAL MATERIAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS

Materials shall be obtained from the best available sources with due consideration to their
cost. Wherever possible, necessary tests shall be carried out in order to determine their
suitability. These tests could be conducted at the field or at a laboratory.

Conducting field tests may not be feasible in some of the labour-based rural roads projects.
In such cases, quality of materials shall be determined based on the judgement made at site
by an experienced technical personnel. However, it may be necessary to carry out the
conventional tests for material testing in order to ascertain the quality of work. In general,
the sieve sizes given in Table G -4 are being used in the country for material testing
purposes. Details are covered in the respective Sections of these Specifications.

G -4 SIEVE SIZES GENERALLY IN USE

The sieve designations which are mentioned in these Specifications are given in the table
below. The equivalent figures of International Standards (BS and ASTM) are also mentioned
to the nearest value against each designation.

Table G -4

Sieve Designation Equivalent Designation which conforms to

BS ASTM
100 mm 4 in. 4 in.
80 mm 3 in. 3 in.
63 mm 2½ in. 2½ in.
50 mm 2 in. 2 in.
40 mm 1½ in. 1½ in.
25 mm 1 in. 1 in.
20 mm ¾ in. ¾ in.
12.5 mm ½ in. ½ in.
3 3
10 mm /8 in. /8 in.
6.3 mm ¼ in. ¼ in.
3
4.75 mm /16 in. No. 4
2.36 mm No. 7 No. 8
2.00 mm No. 8 No. 10
1.70 mm No. 10 No. 12
1.18 mm No. 14 No. 16
850 micron No. 18 No. 20
600 micron No. 25 No. 30
500 micron No. 30 No. 35
425 micron No. 36 No. 40
300 micron No. 52 No. 50
180 micron No. 85 No. 80
150 micron No. 100 No. 100
75 micron No. 200 No. 200

Technical Specifications : Site Clearance 2

G -5 SCOPE OF WORK

The work to be carried out under the contract or users’ group agreement shall consist of
various items as generally described in the Bill of Quantities.

The works to be performed shall also include all general works which are preparatory to the
construction of rural roads, its structures and all other related works. The works shall include
work of any kind necessary for the due and satisfactory construction, completion and
maintenance of the works to the intent and meaning of the engineering drawings and these
Specifications and further orders and sketched drawings that may be issued by the Engineer
from time to time. The scope of work shall include compliance by the Contractor/Users’
Group with all General Conditions of Contract, whether specifically mentioned or not in
various clauses of these Specifications, all materials, apparatus, plant, equipment, tools, fuel,
water, strutting, timbering, transport, offices, stores, workshops, staff, labour and the
provision of proper and sufficient protective measures, diversions, temporary fencing and
lighting. It shall also include:
 safety of workers,
 first-aid facilities,
 suitable accommodation for the staff and workmen with adequate sanitary arrangements,
 the effecting and maintenance of all insurance coverages,
 the payment of all wages, salaries, fees, royalties, duties or other charges arising out of
the erection of works and the regular clearance of rubbish,
 reinstatement and clearing-up of the site as may be required on completion of works,
 safety of the public, and
 protection of the works and adjoining lands.

The Contractor shall ensure that all actions are taken to assure the quality in the planning and
execution of works. The quality assurance shall cover all stages of work such as setting out,
selection of materials, selection of construction methods, selection of equipment and plant,
deployment of personnel and supervisory staff, quality control testing, etc. The work of
building in quality assurance shall be deemed to be covered in the scope of work. In the case
of users’ groups, the particular Site-in-Charge shall take necessary actions to assure the
quality of works which will be executed by users.

The Contractor shall furnish, at least 15 days in advance, his/her programme of

commencement of item of work, the method of working he/she intends to adopt for various
items of work such as site clearance, construction for embankments, sub-base, base,
surfacing, culverts, bridges, causeways, retaining walls, simply supported girders, cantilever
construction and such other items for which the Engineer demands the submission of the
method of working. He shall provide information regarding the details of the method of
working and tools/equipment which are to be employed and shall satisfy the Engineer about
the safety and adequacy of the same. The sole responsibility for the safety and adequacy of
the methods adopted by the Contractor will, however, rest on the Contractor irrespective of
any approval given by the Engineer.

In case of users’ groups, the particular Site-in-Charge should assist the users’ committee to
prepare such work programmes before the commencement of activities. Site-in-Charge’s
assistance in selecting the most appropriate method of working is necessary since most of the
users’ groups lack the experience in this regard.

Technical Specifications : Site Clearance 3

G -6 CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT

In addition to the general conditions indicated in the contract or users’ group agreement, the
following conditions regarding the use of equipment in works should also be satisfied:

(a) The Contractor/Users’ Group shall be required to give a trial run of the equipment for
establishing their capacity to achieve the laid down Specifications and tolerances to the
satisfaction of the Engineer before the commencement of work;

(b) All equipment provided shall be of proven efficiency and shall be operated and
maintained at all times in a manner acceptable to the Engineer;

(c) All the plant/equipment to be deployed on the works shall be approved by the Engineer
after ensuring their fitness and efficiency.

(d) No plant or equipment shall be used without the prior approval of the Engineer.

(e) No plant/equipment shall be removed from site without prior permission of the Engineer.

G -7 ENGINEERING DRAWINGS

The Engineering Drawings provided shall be contained in the contract documents and shall
be used as a reference. The Contractor/Users’ Group shall visualise the nature and type of
work contemplated and ensure that the rates and prices quoted/agreed by them in the Bill of
Quantities have due consideration to the qualitative and quantitative variations, as may be
found at the site or/and as per the complexities of work involved during actual
execution/construction.

When responsibility of the preparation of drawings lies with the Contractor, the contract unit
rates/prices for the work shall be deemed to include the cost of preparation, supply and
delivery of all necessary drawings, prints, and tracing which the Contractor is required to
provide in accordance with the contract.

Two copies of drawings, on the basis of which actual execution of the work is to proceed,
shall be furnished free of cost to the Contractor/Users’ Group by the Engineer progressively
according to the work programme which is accepted in advance by the Engineer upon its
submission by the Contractor/Users’ Group. Drawings for any particular activity shall be
issued to the Contractor/Users’ Group in advance of the scheduled date of the start of the
activity.

Examination and/or approval by the Engineer of any drawings or other documents submitted
by the Contractor/Users’ Group shall not relieve the Contractor/Users’ Group of their
responsibilities or liabilities under the contract.

G -8 SITE INFORMATION

Technical Specifications : Site Clearance 4

 The information about the site of work and site conditions in the contract documents is given
in good faith for guidance only, but the Contractor/Users’ Group shall satisfy themselves
regarding all aspects of site conditions.

The location of the works and the general particulars of site are as shown on the Site Plan or
Index Plan enclosed with the contract documents.

The right-of-way to the bridge sites/road works shall be provided to the Contractor/Users’
Group by the Engineer whereas the Contractor/Users’ Group shall have to make their own
arrangements for the land required for their site offices, labour camps, stores, etc.

The quarry charts shall be enclosed with the contract documents as a guide to the
Contractor/Users’ Group. They indicate the location of quarries and other sources from
where naturally occurring materials are available. The leads indicated in the said charts may
be approximate. It is assumed that the Contractor/Users’ Group will inspect the quarries,
borrow areas, etc., well in advance to assess the availability of construction materials in
required quantity and quality before quoting/agreeing their rates for the work.

G -9 SETTING OUT

The Contractor shall establish working Bench Marks tied with the Reference Bench Mark in
the area prior to the commencement of work and obtain the approval from the Engineer or a
designated consultant who represents the Engineer at site. The reference Bench Mark for the
area shall be as indicated in the contract documents and the values of the same shall be made
available by the Engineer to the Contractor/Users’ Group. The working Bench Marks shall
be at the rate of four per km and also at or near all drainage structures, over-bridges and
underpasses. In case of Users’ Groups, the Engineer shall establish the working Bench
Marks tied with reference Bench Marks in the area. Checks must be made on the Bench
Marks monthly and adjustments, if any, shall be made by the Engineer. An up-to-date record
of all Bench Marks including the adjustments made, if any, shall be maintained by the
Engineer. A copy of this record shall be provided to the Contractor/Users’ Group on regular
basis.

The lines and levels of formation, side slopes, drainage works, carriageways and shoulders
shall be carefully set out and frequently checked. Care shall be taken to ensure that correct
gradients and cross-sections are obtained everywhere.

In order to facilitate the setting out of the works, the centre line of the carriageway or
roadway must be accurately established by the Contractor and, subsequently, approved by the
Engineer or his/her representative. It must then be accurately referenced at every 50 m
intervals in the plain and rolling terrain; 20 m intervals in hilly terrain; and as necessary in all
curve points. The Engineer shall make the necessary arrangements to highlight the reference
points with marker pegs and chainage boards set in or near the fence line. These markers
shall be maintained until the works reach to the finished formation level and, finally, are
accepted by the Engineer. In case of Users’ Groups, the centre line of the carriageway or
roadway shall be established by the Engineer or his/her representative. In both cases, a
schedule of reference dimensions shall be supplied to the Contractor/Users’ Group by the
Engineer.

Technical Specifications : Site Clearance 5

 When construction reaches the next formation level stage, the centre line shall again be set
out in the similar manner and shall be accurately referenced by marker pegs set at the outer
limits of the formation.

No reference peg or marker shall be moved or withdrawn without the approval of the
Engineer and no earthwork or structural work shall be commenced until the centre line has
been referenced.
The Contractor/Users’ Group will be the sole responsible party for safe guarding all survey
monuments, bench marks, beacons, etc. The Engineer will provide the Contractor/Users’
Group with all data necessary for setting out of the centre line, if disturbed. All dimensions
and levels shown on the drawings or mentioned in documents forming part of or issued under
the contract shall be verified by the Contractor/Users’ Group on the site. They shall
immediately inform the Engineer of any apparent errors or discrepancies in such dimensions
or levels. The Engineer shall, in connection with the staking out of the centre line, survey the
terrain along the road and shall supply a profile along the road centre line and cross-sections
at intervals to the Contractor/Users’ Group as required.

After setting out, work on earthwork can commence and the profile and cross-sections shall
form the basis for measurements and payment. The Contractor/Users’ Group shall be
responsible for ensuring that all the basic traverse points are not disturbed until the
commencement of the work and if any are missing or appear to have been disturbed, the
Contractor/Users’ Group shall make arrangements to re-establish these points. A “Survey
File” containing the necessary data will be made available by the Engineer for this purpose.
There will be no separate payment for any survey work performed by the Contractor/Users’
Group in such instances.

If in the opinion of the Engineer, design modifications of the centre line or grade are
advisable, the Engineer shall perform the modifications in the field, as required, and modify
the ground levels on the cross-sections accordingly as many times as required.

The labour involved in setting out works from the part of Contractor shall be deemed to be a
part of general works preparatory to the execution of work and no separate payment shall be
made for the same.

Automatic levels, having a standard deviation of ±5 mm per km, shall be used for all double
run levelling work. Setting out of the road alignment and measurement of angles shall be
done by using theodolite with traversing target having an accuracy of 20 seconds.
Measurement of distances shall be done generally by using tape measurements.

G -10 PUBLIC UTILITIES

No clearance or alterations to the utility shall be carried out unless specially ordered by the
Engineer.

Any services affected by the works must be temporarily supported by the Contractor/Users’
Group. The Contractor/Users’ Group must take all measures reasonably required by various
bodies to protect their services and property during the progress of the works.

The Contractor/Users’ Group may be required to carry out certain works for and on behalf of
various bodies and shall also provide, with the prior approval of the Engineer, such assistance
to various bodies as may be authorised by the Engineer.

Technical Specifications : Site Clearance 6

 The work of temporarily supporting and protecting the public utility services during
execution of the works shall be deemed to be part of the contract and no extra payment shall
be made for the same.

The Contractor/Users’ Group may be required to carry out the removal or shifting of certain
services/utilities on specific orders from the Engineer for which payment shall be made to
him. Such works shall be taken up by the Contractor/Users’ Group only after obtaining
clearance from the Engineer and ensuring adequate safety measures.

G -11 PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFEGUARDING THE ENVIRONMENT

G-11.1 General

The Contractor/Users’ Group shall take all precautions for safeguarding the environment
during the course of the construction of the works. He shall abide by all laws, rules and
regulations in force governing pollution and environmental protection that are applicable in
the area where the works are situated.

G-11.2 Borrow Pits for Embankment Construction

Borrow pits shall not be dug in the right-of-way of the road. The requirements stated in
clause 2-5.2.2 shall apply in this regard.

G-11.3 Quarry Operations

The Contractor/Users’ Group shall obtain materials from quarries only after the consent is
obtained from the Department of Forest or other concerned authorities. The quarry
operations shall be undertaken within the purview of the rules and regulations in force.

G-11.4 Control of Soil Erosion, Sedimentation and Water Pollution

The Contractor/Users’ Group shall carry out the works in such a manner that soil erosion is
fully controlled, and sedimentation and pollution of natural water courses, ponds, tanks and
reservoirs is avoided. The requirements stated in clause 2 -6 shall apply.

G-11.5 Pollution from Hot-Mix Plants and Batching Plants

Bituminous hot-mix plants and concrete batching plants shall be located sufficiently away
from habitation, agricultural operations or industrial establishments. The Contractor/Users’
Group shall take every precaution to reduce the levels of noise, vibration, dust and emissions
from the plant and shall be fully responsible for any claims for damages caused to the owners
of property, fields and residents in the vicinity.

G-11.6 Substances Hazardous to Health

The Contractor/Users’ Group shall not use or generate any materials in the works which are
hazardous to the health of persons, animals or vegetation. Where it is necessary to use some
substances which can cause injury to the health of workers, the Contractor/Users’ Group
shall provide protective clothing or appliances to their workers.

Technical Specifications : Site Clearance 7

G-11.7 Other Precautions

The Contractor/Users’ Group must take all reasonable steps to minimise dust nuisance during
the construction of the works.

All existing roads used by vehicle of the Contractor/Users’ Group or any of their sub-
contractors/sub-groups or suppliers of materials or plant, and similarly any new roads which
are part of the works and which are being used by traffic, shall be kept clean and clear of all
dust/mud or other extraneous materials dropped by the said vehicles or their tyres. Similarly,
all dust/mud or other extraneous materials from the works spreading on these roads shall be
immediately cleared by the Contractor/Users’ Group.

Clearance shall be affected immediately by manual sweeping and removal of debris and all
dust, mud and other debris shall be removed entirely from the road surface. Additionally, if
so directed by the Engineer, the road surface shall be hosed or watered using suitable
equipment.

Any structural damage caused to the existing roads by the Contractor’s/Users’ Group’s
construction equipment shall be made good without any extra cost.

G -12 ARRANGEMENT FOR TRAFFIC DURING CONSTRUCTION (only when

necessary)

G-12.1 General Arrangement

The Contractor or the Users’ Group shall be responsible for carrying out work on the road
with minimum interference to the traffic as well as without affecting the satisfactory
execution of the construction works. While the improvement works of the rural road are in
progress, the construction party shall follow the respective directions issued by the Engineer.
A passage of traffic either along a part of the existing carriageway or along a temporary
diversion shall be opened prior to the closure of road section for improvements.

G-12.2 Traffic Passage along a part of the Existing Carriageway under Improvement

This situation will occur when an existing road is subjected to the following improvements:
 widening of the carriageway;
 strengthening of the existing pavement;
 reconstruction or repair of cross-drainage works, etc.
and where a part of the road width provides enough space for such work, leaving the
remaining part for traffic. To make room for this passage of traffic, the shoulder is often
required to be widened; levelled; dressed and maintained throughout the duration of work.
This work needs to be done to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

For works in long continuous stretches, passing passage of 20 m X 6 m inclusive of the width
of the existing carriageway shall be provided at 500 m intervals or as directed by the
Engineer.

Technical Specifications : Site Clearance 8

G-12.3 Traffic Passage along a Temporary Diversion (only when necessary)

Where a passage for traffic on a part of the carriageway is not possible, a temporary diversion
closer to the road alignment needs to be opened. The necessary temporary crossings shall be
provided on the approval of Engineer.

G-12.4 Traffic Safety and Control (only when necessary)

During the construction of road, the party responsible for the construction shall ensure the
safety of traffic. In this regard, the construction party shall provide, erect and maintain the
necessary
 barricades
 signs
 markings
 flags
 lights and flag men, etc.
to provide the correct information to the vehicles in order to ensure the safety of approaching
and passing traffic.

A phased programme for the diversion of traffic shall be drawn up with the Engineer prior to
the commencement of work. Where a part of the carriageway becomes inadequate for two
lane traffic, one-way traffic operation shall be established. Suitable regulatory or warning
signs shall be placed on both approaches to provide necessary guidance to the road users.

Upon the approval of Engineer, the signs on each approach shall be placed as follows:
 one, close to the point where transition of carriageway begins, and
 the other, 120 m away.

G-12.5 Maintenance of Diversion and Traffic Control Devices

All the diversion and traffic control devices which are mentioned in paragraph G-12.4 shall
be well maintained to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

G-12.6 Measurements for Payment

Measurement of the above works shall be done in the following ways:

(a) Incidental to the Contracted Work : The works performed in respect of maintaining an
uninterrupted traffic flow through the section of road
under improvements shall be considered as
incidental to the contracted works with the exclusion
of provisional works.

(b) Provisional Works : Temporary diversions, initial dressing of the

shoulders and additional passing passages.

The former shall be paid from the contracted sum and the latter from the provisional sum.

G -13 GENERAL RULES FOR THE MEASUREMENT OF WORKS FOR PAYMENT

G-13.1 General

Technical Specifications : Site Clearance 9

 1. Measurements of works shall be done in metric system.
2. Procedure for the measurements of works under item rate contract is usually defined in
the general conditions of contract. For lump-sum contracts and turn key contracts, the
procedure shall be defined under the special provisions of the contract.
3. The measurements and computations of works shall be carried out to the nearest of the
following limits:

 length and breadth (for each 30 m length or less) 10 mm

 height/depth/thickness of earthwork, sub-bases, bases, 5 mm

surfacing and structures (for each 15 m or less)

 areas (for each 1 m2 or less) 0.005 m2

 volumetric quantity (for each 1 m3 or less) 0.005 m3

4. Dimensions of completed works are recorded in the following sequential orders - (i)
length; width/breadth; or (ii) height/depth/thickness.

G-13.2 Measurement of Lead for Materials

Where there is a provision for separate payment with regard to additional lead, the
measurement of which shall be taken over the shortest practicable route irrespective of which
route has been taken in actual practice. Decision on this regard shall be made by the
Engineer of the project. Lead measurements shall be taken along the slope of the route.

 For additional lead payment purposes, the unit lengths of lead distances shall be as
follows:

 for distances up to and including 200 m 50 m

 for distances exceeding 200 m, but not exceeding 1 km 200 m

Note : When the distance exceeds 1 km, the norms applicable for transportation shall be used. Refer
to Volume IV of WORK NORMS for Labour-based Construction Works of
Agricultural and Rural Roads

 Unit length shall be reckoned as one, if it is half or above.

 Unit length shall be ignored, if it is less than half of the unit length.

 The distances mentioned above are to be understood as those in addition to the initial
lead covered by the item rate.

 Source of materials shall be divided into number of blocks. For each block, the lead
length for payment shall be measured from the centre of the block at source to the
centre of the block at placing.

G-13.3 Measurement of Pavement Thickness when making the payment on Volume Basis

If the payment for sub-base/base/pavement is to be made on volume basis, then the

measurement procedure shall be as follows:

Technical Specifications : Site Clearance 10

  Level measurements shall be taken before and after the construction.

 Level measurements shall be taken at the points (either side) which are 0.75 m away
from the centre line of the carriageway. These points should be at 10m intervals
longitudinally. The longitudinal distance may vary as per the decision of Engineer as
and when required.
 Suitable reference lines shall be established along the edges of carriageway in the form
of wooden spikes or embedded bricks/stones. This will clearly define the measured
sub-base/base/pavement width.

 In the case of widening, at least one level line shall be taken along each strip of
widening.

 The average thickness of the pavement course (there may be several layers in one
course) in any area shall be the arithmetical mean of the level differences (before and
after construction) at all grid points falling in that area. Each thickness shall be
confirmed with the design or the field-level instructions given by the Engineer.

 As a cross check to the level measurements, the Engineer is authorised to measure the
thickness of any grid point by making cores or holes, if required.

G-13.4 Measurement of Pavement Thickness when making the payment on Area Basis

Engineer could use suitable penetration gauge at regular intervals to measure the thickness of
the sub-base/base/pavement on ad-hoc basis. He/she may employ any other methods which
are in use for the determination of thickness. When the thickness is confirmed with the
design, the payment could be made by taking the area measurements.

G -14 SCOPE OF RATES FOR DIFFERENT FORM OF CONTRACTS

For Labour Contract The unit item rate (quoted/agreed) shall be taken as the rate for
finished work covering labour component only. Required tools,
plant and equipment shall be either provided or compensated by the
client as per the Engineer’s Cost-estimate. This basically applies for
Users’ Groups and Local Labour Groups.

For Item Rate Contract The unit item rate (quoted or contracted) shall be taken as the rate
for completing the work to the requirements of the Specifications. It
includes full compensation for all the operations detailed in the
relevant sections of these Specifications under the clause-“Rates”. It
covers components such as labour, material, wastage, precautionary
measures, preparatory work, temporary arrangements, etc.
However, the components such as tools, plant, equipment, profits,
taxes as well as liabilities, obligations and risks shall be covered
separately by respective quotations made in the Contractor’s bid.
This applies for Contractors.

Technical Specifications : Site Clearance 11

1
Site Clearance

Technical Specifications : Site Clearance 12

1 -1 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

1-1.1 Description

Clearing and grubbing shall be carried out prior to earthwork.

The work includes the removal and disposal of objects such as,
 trees
 bushes
 shrubs
 stumps
 rubbish
 and other obstacles to work.

1-1.2 Preservation of Property/Amenity

The cost required for protecting the property and amenity shall be considered as included in
the item rate of the contracted work.

(a) The objects which shall not be disturbed or otherwise be protected are as follows:

chautaras and road side trees shrubs and plants

signs electric/telephone pole

lines

Property and
fences Amenity sewers
 not to be disturbed
or
 to be protected
springs and natural water canals and other waterways
bodies
pipelines buildings

monuments

(b) The Users’ Group/Contractor who will be entrusted the work shall take adequate
measures against the environmental degradation such as:

 soil erosion and

 water pollution of the concerned area.

(c) The Users’ Group/Contractor shall submit the following documents to the Engineer
for approval prior to the commencement of such work.

work plan and proposed procedure for the disposal of waste materials
schedules for carrying out temporary and permanent erosion control work as
stated in clause 2-6.3.
1-1.3 Methods, Tools and Plants

Earthwork and Drain Construction 13

 Clearing and grubbing work shall be carried out as per the following guidelines:

(a) The adopted methods, tools and plants

 should not affect the property to be preserved while carrying out the activities.
 are to be approved by the Engineer prior to the commencement of work.

(b) The roots of trees, stumps, etc. which fall within the cut and fill lines shall be
removed up to a minimum depth of 0.5 m below the ground level.

(c) The roots of trees and stumps which fall immediately beyond the fill lines shall be
removed up to 0.15 m below ground level so that they are not noticeable after
clearing.

(d) Such deeply excavated pockets which are created as a result of the removal of trees,
stumps, etc. shall be filled with suitable fill material and compacted properly in order
to make such surfaces affirmed with the surrounding ground surface.

(e) Vegetation such as roots, secondary growth, grass and other organic substances
which are unsuitable as fill material shall be removed from fill areas to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.

(f) The branches of trees extending above the roadway shall be trimmed as directed by
the Engineer.

1-1.4 Disposal of Cleared Materials

The work under this item shall be carried out as per the following order:

(a) All materials which originated as a result of clearing and grubbing operations shall
be considered as the property of the owner of the concerned land. In this case, the
owner may be a private (an individual citizen) or a public (Government, VDC, etc.)
party.

(b) Cleared materials shall be disposed by the Contractor/Users’ group as directed by the
Engineer and in accordance with the consensus of owner.

(c) Trunks and branches of trees shall be cleared up by cleaning the limbs and tops and
stacked neatly within the right-of-way of each place.

(d) Products of clearing and grubbing which cannot be used or auctioned as determined
by the Engineer shall be dumped to a dumping site/pit and burnt or buried. The
dumping sites shall be determined as per the direction of Engineer.

(e) Precautionary measures shall be taken in advance to prevent any mixing up of cleared
materials with the materials meant for embankment/road construction.

1-1.5 Measurements for Payment

The measurement of the work “clearing and grubbing” shall be taken by the Engineer for the
purpose of payment to the Contractor/Users’ Group. The following guidelines shall be
followed in this regard:

Earthwork and Drain Construction 14

 (a) Unit of payment for clearing and grubbing shall be in m2.

(b) The item “clearing and grubbing” includes the cutting of trees less than 30 cm in
girth measured at 1 m above the ground.

(c) The payment for cutting of trees having the following measurements shall be made
separately by counting the number of trees belonging to the concerned range and by
measuring the girth of individual tree at a spot 1 m above the ground.
 girth of above 30 cm up to 60 cm
 girth of above 60 cm up to 90 cm
 girth of above 90 cm up to 180 cm
 girth of above 180 cm up to 270 cm
 girth of above 270 cm up to 450 cm.
If girth is above 450 cm, then the payment shall be made by extrapolating the rate of
above range.

1-1.6 Rates

The rates for the item “clearing and grubbing” shall be determined as follows:

(a) The quoted unit rate in the contract shall be paid in full for all operations under the
item “clearing and grubbing” which includes full compensation for labour, materials
and any other incidentals.

(b) Where a contract does not include a separate item for clearing or grubbing then such
work shall be covered as incidental to the earthwork items. In such cases, the quoted
unit rate in the contract for earthwork item shall cover the expenses for clearing and
grubbing as well.

1 -2 DISMANTLING CULVERTS, BRIDGES, PAVEMENTS AND OTHER STRUCTURES

1-2.1 Description

This item shall consist of operations such as

 dismantling and removal of the existing structures and utilities which are not suitable to
be remained in place,
 salvaging or/and disposing of the resulting materials from the concerned site, and
 backfilling the trenches and pits which are created as a result of the removal of such
structures.

The following types of structures and utilities shall be considered under this item:
 culverts
 bridges
 pavements
 kerbs
 guard rails
 fences
 utility poles
 manholes

Earthwork and Drain Construction 15

  catch basins
 inlets, etc.
Dismantling and removal operations shall be completed prior to the start of new construction.

1-2.2 Dismantling Culverts and Bridges

The dismantling operation shall be carried out as per the following guidelines:

 It should be done carefully without causing damages to the materials which can be
reused.
 Resulting materials which cannot be reused shall be removed from the site.
 All reusable materials shall be retained and salvaged for future use.
 Removal of overlying or adjacent materials, if required, shall be incidental to this item.
 Where the existing bridges/culverts are to be extended or otherwise incorporated in the
new construction, only such part or parts of the existing structure shall be removed as it
is necessary to provide a proper connection to the new component. In such cases,
connecting edges shall be cut, chipped and trimmed to the required lines and grades
while reinforcement bars shall be left to act as dowels.

Particularly in the case of pipe culverts, the hume pipes shall not be damaged during the
dismantling operation.

While dismantling the steel framed structure, care must be taken in order to avoid any
damages to its members.

If the structure which needs to be removed is in a condition suitable for re-creation or re-
erection then,
 all members shall be match-marked with white lead paint before dismantling.
 end pins, nuts and bolts, gusset plates, etc. shall be match-marked to indicate their
location.
 all pins, pinholes and machined surfaces shall be painted with a mixture of white lead
and tallow.
 all loose parts shall be securely wired to adjacent members or packed in boxes.

While dismantling timber framed structures, care must be taken in order to prevent any
damages to its members. Removed parts shall be salvaged as per the instruction of the
Engineer.

1-2.3 Dismantling Pavements and Other Structures

The removal of unnecessary parts or the sections shall be carried out in such a way that the
cut face at the joint should be perpendicular to the surface of the existing structure.

If the dismantled concrete structures or base course elements are to be reused then those shall
be broken into pieces whose volume shall not exceed 0.02 m3 . Such pieces shall later be
stock piled at the locations designated by the Engineer.

1-2.4 Backfilling

Ditches and cavities caused due to dismantling operations shall be backfilled with suitable
fill material as directed by the Engineer. Such fill shall be compacted to the satisfaction of
Engineer.

Earthwork and Drain Construction 16

1-2.5 Disposal of Dismantled Materials

All materials which originated as a result of dismantling operations shall be considered as the
property of the owner of the concerned structure. In this case, the owner may be a private (an
individual citizen) or a public (Government, VDC, etc.) party.

All reusable materials shall be stock piled within the right-of-way at places designated by the
Engineer. This includes hume pipes, steel parts, timber members and similar reusable
materials.

Unless otherwise specified or directed, all structural steel shall be stored in blocks at
locations convenient for loading.

Structures or elements of structures which are specified in the contract for re-erection shall be
stored in separate piles.

Timber planks, beams or logs of old structures which are designated by the Engineer as
materials to be salvaged shall be stacked in piles at locations convenient for loading. All
nails, bolts and nuts should be removed prior to stacking.

All the products of dismantling operations which, in the opinion of the Engineer, cannot be
reused or auctioned shall be disposed as waste materials. Such waste shall be kept away
from the right-of-way of the road.

1-2.6 Measurements for Payment

The dismantling operations shall be measured in the respective units as follows:

 Dismantling brick/stone/concrete (plain and reinforced) masonry : in cubic metre.

 Dismantling flexible and cement concrete pavement : in cubic metre.

 Dismantling steel structures : in tonne.

 Dismantling timber structures : in cubic metre.

 Dismantling pipes, guard rails, kerbs, gutters, fencing : in linear metre.

 Utility poles : in numbers.

1-2.7 Rates

The quoted/agreed unit rates in the contract for the items of dismantling works shall be paid
in full for carrying out the required operations including full compensation for labour,
materials, protective measures and other incidentals.

Earthwork and Drain Construction 17

 Various operations included in each rate shall be dismantling, excavation, backfilling, piling,
disposing, handling, hauling up to 100 m and related protective measures.

2
Earthwork
and Drain Construction

Earthwork and Drain Construction 18

2 -1 ROADWAY AND DRAIN EXCAVATION

2-1.1 Description

This work which consists of excavation, removal and satisfactory disposal of all materials
shall be necessary for the construction of
 roadway (carriageway and shoulders)
 side drains and
 other cross drainage structures

and shall be performed in accordance with the

 requirements of the Specifications
 lines, grades and cross-sections given in the construction drawings
or
 directions given by the Engineer.

Roadway and drain excavation work shall also include

 hauling and stacking of cut and fill materials wherever necessary, and
 trimming and finishing of the roadway surface and slopes.

2-1.2 Classification of Excavation Material

2-1.2.1 Authority for Classification

The classification of excavated material shall be decided by the Engineer or his

representative. The decision of the Engineer shall be regarded as final within the scope of
the contract (in case of Contractor) or the agreement (in case of Users’ Group). Mere use of
explosives shall not be entertained as the basis for higher classification.

2-1.2.2 Classification

All materials involved in excavation are classified below. At the field, these materials shall
be identified and determined by the Engineer or his representative before or during the
earthwork operation.

(a) Ordinary soil shall comprise of organic soil, sand, silt, loam, clay, mud, peat, black
cotton soil, soft shale, loose moorum, mixture of the above and similar material
which could be excavated by ordinary application of picks and shovel, kodalo or any
other ordinary digging tool.

Gravel or any other nodular material having maximum diameter not exceeding 75
mm in any direction shall also be covered in this category.

(b) Hard soil shall include:

 material like stiff heavy clay, hard shale, compact moorum which could be
excavated by extensive application of grafting tool or pickaxe or both and shovel,

 gravel and cobble stones having maximum diameter between 75 mm and 300 mm
in any direction,

Technical Specifications : Sub-base, Base and Shoulders 19

  existing soling surfaces of roads, paths, etc. when these surfaces are to be
dismantled.

(c) Ordinary rock shall include:

 lime stone,
 sand stone,
 laterite,
 soft conglomerate when the blocks could be detached from the matrix by simply
using the pickaxes,
 soft or fissured rock which can be split/quarried with crowbars,
 boulders having maximum diameter between 300 mm and 500 mm in any
direction which are lying loosely on the ground or embedded in the river bed,
 any rock which in dry state may be hard but in wet state becomes soft and
manageable without much effort.

(d) Medium rock shall include:

 rocks which do not necessarily require blasting but do require some efforts in
breaking by chisels and hammers,
 hard conglomerate,
 boulders having maximum diameter above 500 mm in any direction which are
lying loosely on the ground or embedded in the river bed,
 any rock which in dry state may be hard but in wet state becomes comparatively
manageable with a focused effort.

(e) Hard rock shall include:

 rocks which require either blasting or intensive chiselling or use of mechanical

plant.

When uncontrolled blasting is prohibited due to environmental reasons then the

excavation of hard rock shall be carried out by

 chiselling,
 wedging,
 tempering and any other standard method.

(f) Marshy soil shall include materials below ground level of marshes, swamps and other
areas where continuous dealing with water is required.

2-1.3 Construction Operations

2-1.3.1 Setting Out

Limits of excavation shall be as per the construction drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
The boundaries for excavation shall be set out as per the lines, curves, slopes, grades and
sections given in the construction drawings.

Responsibility of carrying out this task shall be in accordance with the Clause G-9.

Technical Specifications : Sub-base, Base and Shoulders 20

2-1.3.2 Stripping and Storing Top Soil

The layer of top soil (generally 150 mm) shall be stripped and stored at designated locations
for reuse in roadside/embankment slopes, cut slopes, berms and disturbed areas where
vegetation is desired. It should be confirmed that the entire organic substances are stripped
out from the area under excavation or filling.

2-1.3.3 Excavation (General)

Excavation shall be carried out in conformity with the contract (Contractors) or the
agreement (Users’ Groups) and as per the directions of the Engineer. Wherever possible, the
excavated material shall be stock piled if they are found suitable for future use. Adequate
precautions against soil erosion and water pollution shall be taken while planning or
executing excavation.

The excavation shall be conformed with the lines, grades, side slopes and levels as given in
the construction drawings or as directed by the Engineer. No excavation shall be carried out
 outside the slopes and
 below the established grades by loosening any materials outside the limits of excavation.

Such excess excavation beyond the permissible limits shall be recovered from the
Contractor/Users’ Group or from their payment. Debris and loose materials on the slopes of
cutting surfaces shall be removed.

No back filling shall be allowed to obtain the required slopes except when boulders or soft
materials are encountered in cut slopes. The resulting cavities left over by the excavation of
unsuitable materials shall be filled with suitable fill material and compacted as directed by
the Engineer.

2-1.3.4 Rock Excavation

Rock in roadway excavation shall be removed up to the sub-grade level or as indicated in the
construction drawings. Where unstable shales or other similar materials appear at the sub-
grade level, they shall be excavated to the extent of 500 mm below the sub-grade level or
even more to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

The rock excavation shall be carried out in such a manner that the rock protrudes shall not
exist above the specified levels at any point. However, a negative tolerance of 150 mm could
be allowed for the over-excavated portions.

Such over-excavated portions shall be recovered by hand packing of rubble and chips and by
compacting them to the designed level. Slopes in rock cutting shall be finished to an uniform
surface corresponding to the designed slope.

Where blasting is required, it shall be carried out in confirmation with clause 2 -2 and all
necessary precautions shall be observed as indicated therein.

Where pre-splitting blasting is prescribed, it shall be carried out in confirmation with clause 2
-3.

Technical Specifications : Sub-base, Base and Shoulders 21

2-1.3.5 Excavation of Marshy Land

Excavation of marshes/swamps shall be carried out as per the programme laid down by the
Engineer.

Excavation of marshes shall begin at one end and shall proceed towards a single direction
across the entire marsh. Back filling shall be carried out immediately after this operation.

All muck shall be completely removed and displaced,

 from the area shown on the drawings or staked by the Engineer and
 up to the firm base of the marshy land or to the level indicated by the Engineer.

2-1.3.6 Excavation of Road Shoulders for the purpose of pavement widening

During the widening of existing pavements,

 The shoulders shall be excavated to the required width and level as shown on the
drawings or as indicated by the Engineer.

 The existing pavement which is supposed to be retained shall not be loosened or

disturbed under any circumstances.

2-1.3.7 Excavation of Surface/Sub-surface Drains

Where the contract provides provisions for constructing surface/sub-surface drains (refer to
clause 2 -9) the excavation shall be carried out according to the sequence which complies
with the other works or is approved by the Engineer.

2-1.3.8 Removal of Slides

Slides, if occurred in cut slopes during construction, shall be removed at the cost of
Contractor/Users’ Group as per the instruction of Engineer.

If finished slopes slide into the roadway then such slides shall be removed by the
Contractor/Users’ Group at the contract rate/agreed rate for the class of excavation involved.
This could be done only if the slides occurred due to a factor other than the low quality
workmanship of the Contractor/Users’ Group.

The classification of the slipped material shall be determined as per its condition at the time
of removal. The payment shall be made accordingly regardless of its condition earlier.

2-1.3.9 Dewatering

If water is found during the excavation due to springs, sub-surface runoffs, rainfall or other
causes then it shall be removed by suitable diversions, pumping or bailing out. However, the
excavation shall be kept dry whenever required by the work or as directed by the Engineer.

Care shall be taken to discharge the drained water without causing damages to the completed
works, crops and any other private or public property.

Technical Specifications : Sub-base, Base and Shoulders 22

2-1.3.10 Disposal of Excavated Material

All the excavated materials shall be the property of either the government or DDC or VDC or
the community.

Where the excavated material is identified for re-use for the construction of embankment
then it shall be safely stored/piled up at a location as per the requirements given in clause 2 -
5.

Excavation and disposal operations shall be arranged in such a way that the moisture content
of soil should not be lost adversely during the process of cutting, hauling and compaction.

All hard materials such as hard moorum, rubble, etc. which are not intended for use in earth
filling shall be stacked neatly for other uses such as pitching.

All excavated materials shall be disposed/piled up/stacked

 on the land owned by the government/DDC/VDC/community or
 in a location shown by the Engineer.

Unsuitable and surplus materials which are not intended for re-use shall be disposed as
directed by the Engineer.

2-1.4 Plying of Construction Traffic

Construction traffic shall not use the cut formations without prior permission of the Engineer.

Any damage arising as a result of unauthorised traffic shall be re-built by the

Contractor/Users’ Group at their own expenses.

2-1.5 Preservation of Property

The Contractor shall undertake all reasonable precautions for the protection and preservation
of any or all existing roadside trees, drains, sub-surface drains, pipes, conduits and any other
structures under or above the ground which may be affected by construction operations and
which, in the opinion of the Engineer, shall be continuously used without any change.

Contractor/Users’ Group shall take adequate measures to safeguard the property and shall
obtain prior approval of Engineer in such events.

Any damage caused by the negligence of Contractor/Users’ Group shall be recovered or

restored at their cost.

2-1.6 Preparation of Cut Formation

The cut formation shall be prepared as a foundation to sub-base/base course. It shall be

carried out as per the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

At sub-grade level, if the material is found with poor compaction then it shall be loosened to
a depth of 500 mm and compacted in two layers (each of 250 mm) in accordance with clause
2 -5.

Technical Specifications : Sub-base, Base and Shoulders 23

 In rocky formation, the irregularities in the surface shall be corrected up to the specified
elevation as shown in the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
2-1.7 Finishing Operations

This work shall include proper shaping and dressing of all excavated surfaces. At no point,
the finished surface shall vary from the designed slope by more than:
 150 mm (measured at right angles to the slope) in the case of earth excavation and
 600 mm (measured at right angles to the slope) in the case of rock excavation.

In no case, any portion of the side slopes shall encroach the roadway. The finished cut
formation shall satisfy the surface regularity tolerances described in clause 5 -1.

The top soil removed earlier and conserved for re-use (as per clauses 2-1.3.2 and 2-5.3.2)
shall be spread over cut slopes, filled slopes and other disturbed areas as directed by the
Engineer.

If required, such slopes shall be roughened and moistened prior to the application of top soil.
The top soil shall be spread as a layer of 75 mm to 150 mm thick.

2-1.8 Measurements for Payment

The quantities of roadway and drain excavation shall be measured by comparing the cross
sections taken before the commencement and after the completion of works. These cross-
sections should represent the same locations established in suitable intervals as per the
ground profile.

Volumes are computed by the method of average end areas and are in cubic metres. At
inaccessible and erratic locations, the volumes shall be computed by using other accepted
methods. The Contractor/Users’ Group could leave depth indicators during the excavation in
order to indicate the original ground level as per the direction of the Engineer. The indicators
shall not be disturbed until the final measurements are taken.

To determine the quantities of rock excavation, the cross-sections shall be taken after
removing the overburden. Where the surface is irregular and when the material is admixed
with other classes, the volumes shall be computed on the basis of stacked volume of material.
In case of rock, 40% deduction of volume shall be made for the voids. In case of materials
other than rock, this deduction shall be only 16% .

Quantities of work in the preparation of cut formation shall be measured in units indicated
below:
 loosening and re-compaction at sub-grade level : m3
 removal of unsuitable materials : m3
 replacement with suitable materials in place of removed unsuitable materials : m3
 preparing rocky sub-grade : m2
 stripping and storing of top soil : m3
 reapplication of top soil : m2.

2-1.9 Rates

2-1.9.1 Contract Unit Rate for Roadway and Drain Excavation

Technical Specifications : Sub-base, Base and Shoulders 24

 The contract unit rate for roadway and drain excavation shall be paid in full for carrying out
the operations required for the individual items including full compensation for:

 setting out
 transporting and depositing/stacking the excavated materials on sites of embankments or
spoil banks (up to a lead of 50 m along the slope of lead route)
 trimming of excavated surfaces
 dewatering
 all labour, precautionary measures, incidentals which are necessary for the completion of
work as per the Specifications.

wherever necessary a separate provisional rate shall be defined for pre-splitting work in rock
excavation. It shall be worked out and paid as per clause 2-3.5.

2-1.9.2 Contract Unit Rate for Loosening and Re-Compacting at Sub-Grade Level

The unit rate for this work shall include full compensation for:
 loosening of sub-grade soil to specified depth
 breaking clods
 spreading in layers
 watering and
 compaction.

2-1.9.3 Contract Unit Rates for Removal of Unsuitable Materials and Replacement with Suitable
Materials

Unit rates for these items shall be the same as indicated in clauses 2-1.9.1 (for excavation)
and 2-5.7.1 (for filling).

2-1.9.4 Contract Unit Rate for Preparing Rocky Sub-Grade

The unit rate for this item includes full compensation for:
 providing, laying and compacting sub-base/base material as directed and
 labour, incidentals and lead up to 50 m along the slope of lead route.

2-1.9.5 Contract Unit Rate for Stripping, Storing and Re-Application of Top Soil

It shall include full compensation for all necessary operations including lead up to 100 m
along the slope of lead route.

2-1.9.6 Contract Unit Rate for Transporting Material from Excavation Sites

It shall include full compensation for all labour and incidentals on account of additional haul
beyond the initial lead of 50 m along the slope of lead route.

2 -2 BLASTING OPERATIONS

2-2.1 General

2-2.1.1 Carrying and Storing of Explosives

Technical Specifications : Sub-base, Base and Shoulders 25

 In this respect, all HMGN statutory laws, regulations, rules which are pertaining to
acquisition, transport, storage, haulage and use of explosive materials shall be followed.
Blasting shall be carried out:
 with the written approval of the Engineer.
 in the presence of police personnel.
 as per the prior arrangement made with the security authorities of the area.

The Contractor/Users’ Group shall be responsible for:

 any damage to property
 any accident to workers
 any accident to public
on account of transportation, storage, handling and use of explosives.

2-2.1.2 Magazine

Magazine for the storage of explosives shall be built to the design Specifications and to the
satisfaction of the concerned authority. It shall be located at a nearer site or in the premises
of:
 Royal Nepal Army or
 Nepal Police Department
or
 any other place which satisfies the requirements of the Government.

No unauthorised person shall be allowed to enter the magazine. No matches or inflammable

materials shall be allowed in the magazine. The magazine shall be provided with an effective
lightning conductor.

The following items shall be displayed in the lobby of the magazine.

 a copy of relevant rules on safe storage,
 a statement of up-to-date stock in the magazine,
 a certificate showing the last date of testing of the lightning conductor, and
 No Smoking sign.

2-2.1.3 Methods of Blasting

Methods of blasting need to be approved by the Engineer. These shall be in consistent with
the safety and job requirements.

2-2.2 Materials, Tools and Equipment

All the materials, tools and equipment for blasting operations shall be approved in advance
by the concerned authority. Engineer shall specify the type of explosives to be used for
special blasting operations.

Fuse to be used in wet locations shall be fully water resistant for at least 30 minutes after
immersing into water. The burning rate of fuse wire shall be:
 uniform and
 definitely known
in order to decide the safe length of cut pieces.

Technical Specifications : Sub-base, Base and Shoulders 26

 Fuse wire, gelatine or detonators shall:
 be capable of producing an effective blast.
 be fresh.
 not easily be damaged due to dampness or any other reason.
Damaged blasting materials shall not be used and, later, be destroyed by the designated
authority.

2-2.3 Personnel

The blasting work shall be conducted by a licensed blaster under the supervision of a trained
or experienced blasting foreman/engineer. The storekeeper, overseer, sub-overseer or any
other personnel who is involved in blasting shall be well acquainted with the details of
handling and use of explosives.

2-2.4 Blasting Operations

2-2.4.1 Precautionary Measures to be taken during the Blasting Operations

 Blasting shall be carried out during fixed hours of the day:

 at lunch hour,
 at the close of day’s work,
 at a time ordered in writing by the Engineer.

 All blasting charges shall be prepared by the designated In-charge only.

 People other than the one who lights the fuse shall be prohibited to enter the area.

 During blasting operations, red danger flags shall be displayed 200 m away from the
blasting site, in all directions.

 All persons including the workers shall be excluded from the flagged area at least 10
minutes before the firing. A warning siren shall be blown for this purpose.

2-2.4.2 Preparation for Blasting

 The charge holes shall be located in suitable places and drilled to the depth as per the
requirement.

 The use of blasting should be as minimum as possible. However, it should break the
material up to an extent where loading and hauling of the broken pieces are made easier.

 Any method that leads to overshooting shall be discontinued immediately.

2-2.4.3 When Blasting is conducted with Explosive Powder

 The fuse shall be cut to the required length.

 The cut piece of the fuse shall be inserted into the hole.
 Powder shall be dropped in the hole and gently tamped with copper rods with rounded
ends.
 The explosive powder shall be covered with sticky material (clay). This material shall
also be tamped lightly but firmly.

Technical Specifications : Sub-base, Base and Shoulders 27

2-2.4.4 When Blasting is conducted with Dynamite or Other Higher-quality Explosives

 Dynamite cartridge shall be prepared by

 inserting the square cut end of a fuse into the detonator;
 finishing it with nippers at the open end;
 pushing the detonator gently into the primer leaving 1/3 of the copper tube exposed
outside; and
 closing the paper of cartridge securely by binding with wire or twine.

 The prepared primer cartridge shall be inserted into the explosives.

 Bore holes shall be of adequate size to accommodate the cartridge. The holes shall be
cleared of all debris before inserting the explosives. A minimum space of 20 cm shall be
kept above the charge in order to be filled with dry clay. Clay shall be pressed gently but
firmly.

 Rest of the space above the clay layer could be filled with any available material. This
material shall also be tamped gently with a wooden hammer.

2-2.4.5 Firing of Explosives

 At a time, not more than 10 charges shall be prepared and fired.

 Blasting-in-Charge shall blow a siren in a recognised manner in order to alert the people.
 All the people shall move to a safe haven.
 Blasting-in-Charge shall light the charges.
 Before allowing the workers to be back in blasting site, he shall
 count the number of charges exploded and
 disconnect all the charges which have not been exploded.

2-2.5 Misfire

 Sufficient time shall be allowed for delayed blasting.

 Blasting-in-Charge shall inspect all the charges individually and determine the missed
charges.

2-2.5.1 If the Charge is Blasting Powder

In the case of misfire, the sequence and procedure adopted shall be as follows:
 Misfired charges shall be completely flooded in water.
 A new hole shall be drilled at about 45 cm away from the old hole and fired.
 If the old charge is still not fired then the prescribed procedure shall be repeated until the
old charge gets blasted.

2-2.5.2 If the Charge is Gelignite/Dynamite/etc.

Two methods adopted in this regard shall be as follows:

 Blasting-in-charge shall gently remove the tamping material and the primer with the
detonator; Use a fresh detonator/primer and blast the charge.

Technical Specifications : Sub-base, Base and Shoulders 28

  Alternately, the tamping material shall be cleared up to a depth of 30 cm (ascertain by
placing a stick in the hole); Another hole shall be drilled 15 cm away from the old one;
The new hole shall then be charged and fired.

It is assured that the misfired charge explodes with the new one at the same time.

Blasting-in-charge shall, at once, report all cases of misfires and the remedial measures taken
 to the Contractor’s office and
 to the Engineer.
If a misfire has been found as a result of defective detonator or dynamite, then the whole
quantity in the box must be returned to the authority for further inspection with the approval
of the Engineer.

2-2.6 Account of Explosives

 A careful day to day account of the explosives shall be maintained by the Contractor or
the In-charge of store at site. The records shall be kept in approved format.

 Account of explosives shall be inspected by the Engineer periodically.

2 -3 PRE-SPLITTING ROCK EXCAVATION

2-3.1 General

Pre-splitting is defined as the creation of a specific excavation/cracked line in rock by

controlled use of explosives. It shall be done by arranging drill holes in properly aligned and
spaced pattern.

The pre-split blasting technique shall be used to form exact slopes or shapes in rock as per
the engineering drawings. Generally, Users’ Groups may not be capable enough to perform
pre-split blasting since it requires special skills.

2-3.2 Construction Operations

The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with an operational plan outlining the
 position of all drill holes,
 depth of drilling,
 type of explosives to be used,
 loading pattern, and
 sequence of firing.

The drilling and blasting plan is basically necessary for record purposes. However,
submission of such plan shall not relieve the Contractor from his responsibilities on proper
drilling and safe blasting practices.

2-3.2.1 Controlled Blasting

Controlled blasting begins with a short test section of a length approved by the Engineer.
The proposed plan of Contractor is tested here. First, the test section shall be separated by
pre-split blasting. Then, the separated portion shall be removed by mass (production)
blasting. If the proposed plan (method) works to create an acceptable slope/shape according

Technical Specifications : Sub-base, Base and Shoulders 29

 to the drawings, then the Engineer shall determine whether the same plan could be
implemented or other alternative will be tested.

2-3.2.2 Preparation for Drilling of Pre-splitting Holes

All the over burden soil and weathered rock along the top of the excavation for a distance of
5 to 15 m beyond the blasting limits shall be removed before the commencement of drilling
operation. In cases where such removal is not required, the Engineer shall provide the
necessary instructions.
Care and attention shall be given, particularly to the beginning and end of excavation
 to ensure the complete removal of all overburden soil and weathered rock,
 to ensure the exposure of fresh rock, and
 to drill the holes at an elevation equal to the bottom of the adjacent lift where the pre-
splitting holes have already been drilled.

Slope holes for pre-splitting shall be drilled along the line of the planned slope within the
specified tolerances.

Diameter of the drill holes shall be within the range of 60-75 mm. Drilling operations shall
be carried out by using proper equipment and techniques.

2-3.2.3 Drilling Operations

 No hole shall deviate more than 300 mm from its position in the plan.

 No hole shall deviate from being parallel to an adjacent hole by more than 2/3 rd of the
horizontal spacing between them.

 The length of pre-split section for any individual lift shall not exceed 9 m.

 The spacing of pre-split holes shall not exceed 900 mm c/c.

 Auxiliary drill holes along the pre-split line, not loaded or stemmed, may be ordered by
the Engineer.

 Except spacing, the auxiliary drill holes shall satisfy all other requirements for pre-split
holes.

 The line of production holes shall be placed inside the pre-split lines in such a manner
that it avoids any damage to the pre-split face.

 The first line of production holes shall be drilled parallel to the slope line at the top of the
cut at each bench level.

 If the pre-split surface is damaged by the adopted production blasting technique, then
other alternative technique should be tested.

 Production holes shall be drilled within 2.5 m of a pre-split plane or as directed by the
Engineer.

Technical Specifications : Sub-base, Base and Shoulders 30

  The bottom of the production holes shall not be lower than the bottom of the pre-split
holes.

 The maximum permissible width (offset) of a construction working bench for use in
drilling shall be 600 mm.

 Drilling operations shall be organised in such a way that any drift in previous level
should be compensated or corrected at the start of next level. Similarly, the working
space (offset) used for drilling of lower lift shall also be compensated or corrected.
However, the specified slope line shall be maintained while adjusting the drilling
operations.

 The maximum diameter of explosive capsules used in pre-split blasting shall not be
greater than 1 ½ times the diameter of the pre-split holes.
 Only standard cartridge explosives which are prepared and packaged by explosive
manufacturing firms/agencies/or the Royal Nepal Army shall be used for pre-split
blasting.

 Ammonium Nitrate will not be permitted in pre-splitting blasting.

 For a satisfactory pre-split face, stemming is required.

 Stemming material should be dry and free running. It should pass through 10 mm sieve
and 90% of it should retain on 2.36 mm sieve.

 Stemmed pre-split holes shall be completely filled with collar.

 All charges in each pre-splitting pattern shall be detonated simultaneously.

2-3.3 Tolerances

 Deviation of the pre-split face from the finished adjacent plane shall not be more than
300 mm. However, excess deviation could be approved by the Engineer for the
occasions where such irregularities are unavoidable.

 After completion, the average plane of the slope should conform with the slope indicated
on the engineering drawings.

 No point on the completed slope shall vary from the designed slope by more than 300
mm.

 All tolerances shall be measured perpendicular to the plane of the slope line.

 No portion of the slope shall occupy the space needed for side drains.

 If satisfactory pre-split slopes could be ensured by the adopted technique then

 either the slope face may be pre-split before the production blasting
or
 both the pre-splitting of slope face and the production blasting could be done at the
same time. For this, the production blasting should be delayed at least 50

Technical Specifications : Sub-base, Base and Shoulders 31

 milliseconds in sequential order starting from the furthermost row of holes of the
slope and progressing in steps to the row of holes nearest to the pre-split line.

 The pre-splitting line shall be extended either to the end of the excavation or to a distance
not less than 15 m beyond the limits of the production holes.

2-3.4 Measurements for Payments

Measurements for pre-split blasting shall be in square metres whereas for production blasting
in cubic metres.

2-3.5 Rates

The contract unit rate for pre-split blasting shall be paid in full for carrying out the required
operations for obtaining acceptable pre-split slope surface. It shall be paid on the basis of
pre-split area.

The quantity of rock excavated through the production blasting shall be paid on the basis of
volume.

2 -4 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

2-4.1 Description

Excavation for structures shall include the removal of materials from the foundation of
bridges, culverts, retaining walls, head walls, cut off walls, pipe culverts and other similar
structures.

Excavation for structures shall be carried out in accordance with

 the requirements of these Specifications and
 the lines and dimensions as shown on the drawings or as indicated by the Engineer.

Such excavation work shall include,

 the construction of cofferdams and cribs,
 sheeting and shoring for earth retaining purposes,
 the subsequent removal of the water/debris/spoil by bailing, draining and pumping,
 the removal of logs, stumps, grubs and other deleterious matter,
 trimming the base of excavation,
 backfilling,
 clearing up the site, and
 disposal of all surplus materials.

2-4.2 Classification of Excavation

All materials involved in such excavation shall be classified as per clause 2-1.2.

2-4.3 Construction Operation

The site shall be cleared as per clause 1 -1.

Technical Specifications : Sub-base, Base and Shoulders 32

2-4.3.1 Setting Out

The limits of excavation shall be set out as per the lines, curves, slopes, grades and sections
given in the construction drawings. This work shall be carried out as per clause 2-1.3.1.

2-4.3.2 Excavation

Excavation shall be carried out to the width of the lowest step of the footing by keeping the
sides vertical as far as possible. If the nature of soil does not permit it, then the
Contractor/Users’ Group at their own expenses shall put up necessary shoring, strutting,
planking; or shall make the cut slopes to a safer angle; or both in order to assure the safety of
workers and works. However, it should be done to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

Depth of excavation shall be according to the construction drawings or otherwise as directed

by the Engineer. If blasting is required, it shall be carried out as per clause 2 -2.

2-4.3.3 Dewatering and Protection from Water

 When water is found in excavation due to stream flow, seepage, springs, rainfall or other
reasons, then the Contractor/Users’ Group shall take adequate measures first, to protect
the excavation from in coming water (constructing diversion channels, bunds,
cofferdams) and secondly, to remove the collected water from the excavation (bailing and
pumping).

 The Contractor/Users’ Group shall keep the foundation trenches as dry as possible.
When required, laid screed concrete and masonry should be protected against the
damages caused by erosion or sudden rise of water level.

 Measures to be adopted to address the problems mentioned above shall be left to the
choice of the Contractor/Users’ Group but subjected to the approval of the Engineer.
However, such approval shall not relieve the Contractor/Users’ Group from the
responsibilities for
 the extent of dewatering,
 the protective arrangements,
 the quality and
 the safety of the works.

 When required, cofferdams having adequate width and height/depth shall be constructed
as per a safe design. Such cofferdams should be watertight enough to carry out
construction work without any obstructions.

 The area enclosed by the cofferdam shall be spacious enough for the construction and
supervision as well as for the installation of pumps and other machinery.

 The rate of pumping shall be controlled to avoid any possibilities of water seeping
through the fresh concrete.

 No pumping shall be permitted during the placing of concrete and for at least 24 hours
there after, unless it is done from a suitable sump which is away from the concrete work.

Technical Specifications : Sub-base, Base and Shoulders 33

  The Contractor/Users’ Group shall take all precautions in relation to diversion of water.
Diverted water should not damage the works, crops and any other property.

2-4.3.4 Preparation of Foundation

Foundation base shall be levelled both longitudinally and transversely or as directed by the
Engineer. The surface shall be slightly watered and rammed before the screed concrete or
footing is laid.

When the excavation is made deeper than the level shown on the drawings, the extra
excavated depth shall be filled with concrete or masonry having the same grade as of
foundation at the cost of the construction party (Contractor/Users’ Group). No ordinary
filling by soil shall be allowed in such cases.

When rock or hard strata is encountered in foundation excavation, then the base shall be cut
to a firm and level/stepped surface or as directed by the Engineer. The base shall be cleaned
and kept free from all soft and loose materials. Rock seams shall be cleaned and filled with
cement mortar or grout to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

2-4.3.5 Slips and Blows

All slips or blows in the excavated trench, if do exist, shall be removed by the
Contractor/Users’ Group at their own cost.

2-4.3.6 Public Safety

Particularly at public and unsafe, sporadic places, the trenches and foundation pits shall be
securely fenced with proper caution signs, fixed with red light at night to avoid accidents.
Similarly, adequate protective measures shall be taken to protect the adjoining structures and
public property.

2-4.3.7 Back filling

Back filling shall be carried out with approved material after the concrete is fully set or the
masonry is hardened. It should be carried out in such a manner which does not cause any
thrust or pressure to any part of the structure.

Space between the sides of excavated trench and the erected structure shall be backfilled with
approved material in 250 mm layers; watered and compacted until the original ground level is
reached.

2-4.3.8 Disposal of Surplus Excavated Materials

This work shall be carried out as per clause 2-1.3.10.

2-4.4 Measurements for Payment

Excavation for structures shall be measured in cubic metres for each class of encountered
materials. However, the measurements are limited to the dimensions shown on the drawings
or directed by the Engineer.

Technical Specifications : Sub-base, Base and Shoulders 34

 Any over-excavation, trimming of slopes to avoid collapses and work such as shoring,
shuttering and planking which are considered as measures taken by the Contractor/Users’
Group for executing the work with ease shall not be measured and paid separately.

Preparation of rock foundation shall be measured in square metres.

Works related to foundation sealing and dewatering (including pumping) shall be considered
as incidental to the item of work unless a separate provision is made in the contract. In such
case, the payment shall be made on lump sum basis. However, it shall be mentioned in the
Bill of Quantities.

2-4.5 Rates

2-4.5.1 Rates for Earth Foundation

The contract unit rate for the items of excavation for structures shall be paid in full for
carrying out the required operations including compensation for
 setting out,
 construction of necessary coffer dams, cribs and sheeting, shoring & bracing,
 subsequent removal of logs, stumps, grubs and other deleterious matter,
 trimming of bases of foundation trenches,
 unless separate provision is made in the contract, the works such as foundation sealing
and dewatering (including pumping),
 back filling,
 clearing up the site,
 disposal of all surplus material up to a lead of 50 m along the slope of lead route, and
 all labour, materials, precautionary measures and incidentals required to complete the
work to the Specifications or to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

2-4.5.2 Rate for Rock Foundation

The contract unit rate for preparation of rock foundation shall be paid in full for carrying out
the required operations such as cutting, trimming, clearing the foundation base and
filling/sealing of all seams with cement mortar or grout. This includes the full compensation
for labour, materials, protective measures and other incidentals.

2 -5 EMBANKMENT CONSTRUCTION

2-5.1 Description

These Specifications shall apply to the construction of embankments, shoulders and other
miscellaneous filling and backfillng with approved materials obtained either from excavation
of road construction or borrow pits or other sources.

All embankments shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements of these

Specifications and in conformity with the lines, grades, cross sections shown on the
construction drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

2-5.2 Materials

2-5.2.1 Physical Requirements

Technical Specifications : Sub-base, Base and Shoulders 35

 The materials used in embankments shall be earth, moorum, gravel, a mixture of these
materials or any other material approved by the Engineer. The filling materials shall be free
from logs, stumps, roots, debris and any other organic materials which affect the stability of
the embankment.
Maximum particle size of the coarse material in the mixture of earth shall not exceed 75 mm.
The Engineer may permit coarse material of larger sizes if he/she finds no difficulty as
regards to the compaction of such material according to the Specifications.

In ordinary case, the filling materials shall satisfy the following requirements:

 For the construction of embankment having a height of up to 3 m, the dry density shall
not be less than 1.44 g/cm3.
 For the construction of embankment having a height of over 3 m and if a part of its height
is subjected to inundation for longer periods, the dry density shall not be less than 1.52
g/cm3.
 For the construction of top 0.5 m of the embankment (or the road formation), the dry
density shall not be less than 1.65 g/cm3.

However, the Engineer may waive these requirements depending upon the availability and
the involved cost of such materials.

Clay materials which exhibit the properties like swell and shrinkage shall be filled at the
bottom of the embankment so that it prevents any seepage through the embankment. No such
material shall be placed or permitted at the top 0.5 m range which forms the sub-grade of
road.

2-5.2.2 Source of Supply

The materials for embankment filling shall be obtained from the approved sources. Such
sources could be nearby road excavation sites or any other excavation sites under the
contract.

All borrow pits shall be approved by the Engineer. When obtaining the approval, the
Contractor/Users’ Group shall submit all required information such as location, expected
quantity, quality of material, hauling distance and means of transportation to the Engineer.
No borrow pit shall be opened without the permission of the Engineer.

Borrow pits shall not be opened continuously. At least every 300 m interval, there shall be a
ridge of not less than 8 m width unopened. Small drains shall be excavated to facilitate
drainage through the ridges.

The depth of the pits shall be regulated so that the maximum depth shall be limited to 1.5 m.
No excavation shall be made below the imaginary slope line of 1:4 which connects the
bottom of the borrow pit to toe of the embankment under construction.

The minimum distance between the borrow pit and the toe of the final section of the road
embankment shall be 5 m.

2-5.3 Construction Operations

2-5.3.1 Setting Out

Technical Specifications : Sub-base, Base and Shoulders 36

 The site shall be cleared as per clause 1 -1. The work shall be set out as per clause 2-1.3.1.

Borders of the embankment shall be set out and pegged before the commencement of the
earth filling. Batter pegs shall be fixed on both sides at regular intervals. The border pegs,
desirably, shall be fixed about 0.5 m outside the actual limits of the fill and painted in a
distinctive colour.

2-5.3.2 Stripping and Storing Top Soil

All top soil materials existing over the embankment foundation which are suitable for plant
growth shall be stripped to specified depths not exceeding 150 mm and shall be stored for
later use such as covering of embankment slopes, cut slopes and other disturbed areas where
re-vegetation is desired.

2-5.3.3 Compacting Original Ground

The original ground shall be consolidated by rolling or effective ramming to the satisfaction
of Engineer.

Where the height of the proposed embankment is less than 0.5 m and the original ground
does not have a relative compaction of at least 95%, the original ground shall be
 loosened to a depth of 0.35 m (in addition to 0.15 m top soil layer),
 watered and
 compacted to achieve 95% relative compaction. In normal circumstances, the required
compaction could be achieved by a 8-10 t roller with a maximum of 6 passes or by a 1.5 t
concrete roller with 12 passes. However, the Engineer shall confirm the final level of
compaction.

Any unsuitable materials existing in the embankment foundation shall be removed and
replaced by an approved material prior to compaction. Further filling work shall not be
commenced until the foundation for embankment has been inspected by the Engineer.

2-5.3.4 Spreading the Materials in Layers and Maintaining the Optimum Moisture Content

The filling material shall be spread uniformly over the entire width of the embankment or the
stretch under construction in layers not exceeding the loose thickness of 250 mm. Successive
layers shall not be placed until the layer under construction has been well compacted to the
requirements spelled out in these Specifications or contract document.

Moisture content of the filling material shall be checked at the source of supply. If it is found
less than the Optimum Moisture Content (OMC), then the material shall be watered up to the
required level at the source or after spreading as a loose layer at the construction site. The
latter shall be recommended to follow since it spreads the water better than the former.

When sprinkling water over the loose soil layers, care should be taken to avoid any isolated
flooding which makes the compaction operation difficult.

If the filling material is over-saturated than the OMC then it shall be dried by aeration or by
exposing it to the heat of sun. However, the optimum moisture content shall be reached in
order to achieve the desired compaction with lesser effort.

Technical Specifications : Sub-base, Base and Shoulders 37

 Owing to wet weather if the moisture content cannot be reduced to the required amount by
the above procedures then all compaction operations shall be suspended.

Moisture content of each layer shall be checked and adjusted by compensating for
evaporation losses. Generally, at the time of compaction the moisture content shall be kept
within the range of 98% - 101% of the optimum moisture content.

In case of highly expansive soil, the moisture content shall be maintained at a value 2%-4%
higher than the optimum moisture content.

After sprinkling the required amount of water, the soil shall be mixed by using harrows,
rotary mixers or any other appropriate tools until the layer becomes equally wet.

Clods or hard lumps of earth shall be broken into pieces having maximum size of
 150 mm, when being placed in the lower layers of the embankment.
 60 mm, when being placed in the top 0.5 m range of the embankment.

Hauling vehicles and construction equipment shall be moved uniformly over the entire
surface of the previously compacted layer in order to minimise rutting or uneven compaction.
When the embankment is required to be constructed across a low swampy area, the base of
the fill shall be constructed by dumping successive loads of fill material consisting of larger
soil particles. The thickness of the layer shall be uniform and just enough to hold the weight
of hauling vehicles.

2-5.3.5 Compaction

The compaction equipment shall be approved by the Engineer after a demonstration exercise
or trial compaction test which has been carried out by the Contractor in order to indicate the
efficiency of the plants.

Each layer of the fill material shall be thoroughly compacted to the following degree of
compaction (field dry density as a percentage of laboratory dry density at OMC) values:
 not less than 98% for the top 0.5 m range of embankment.
 not less than 95% for other portion of embankment.
 85%-90% for highly expansive clay materials.

Subsequent filling shall be carried out only after the finished layer has been tested and
accepted by the Engineer. When dry density measurements reveal any less compacted areas,
further compaction shall be carried out as directed by the Engineer.

If the specified degree of compaction could not be achieved, then

 the material in the soft areas shall be removed;
 replaced by other suitable material and
 compacted again to achieve the required degree of compaction.

Consolidation : As an alternative to compaction operation, the filled embankment may be

left for consolidation by nature. For this, the embankment shall be kept for at least one
monsoon.

When no roller is available for compaction, manual ramming could also be used as another
alternative.

Technical Specifications : Sub-base, Base and Shoulders 38

2-5.3.6 Drainage

During construction time, the surface of the embankment shall be kept free from stagnated
water by providing adequate cross-falls and other drainage facilities.

2-5.3.7 Finishing Operations

The finishing operations shall include the work of shaping and dressing of shoulders, road
base, side slopes in accordance with the levels, cross-sections and dimensions given in the
drawings or as directed by the Engineer. However, the surface tolerances shall be observed
as per clause 5 -1.

To improve the appearance and to merge the embankment with the adjacent terrain both the
upper and lower ends of the side slopes shall be rounded off.

The top soil, removed and conserved earlier (refer to clause 2-1.3.2 and 2-5.3.2) shall be
spread over the fill slopes in order to facilitate the growth of vegetation. Prior to the
application of top soil, the side slopes shall be roughened and slightly moistened in order to
have a satisfactory bond between the layers. The depth of the top soil shall be sufficient
enough to sustain the plant growth. The usual thickness of top soil spread is 75 - 150 mm.

Wherever possible, the slopes shall be turfed with sods in accordance with clause 2 -7. If
prescribed in the contract, the seeding and mulching of slopes shall be done as per the
requirements of clause 2 -8.

When earthwork operations have been substantially completed, the roadway area shall be
cleared of all debris and ugly scars.

2-5.4 Embankment Construction under Special Conditions

2-5.4.1 Earthwork for Widening of Existing Road Embankments

If the slopes of the existing embankment are steeper than 4:1 then, horizontal benches of 0.3
m width shall be cut across slope line starting from toe of the embankment. Filling shall be
carried out in 250 mm thick layers progressing from the toe level up to the top level of the
embankment. All layers shall be watered and compacted to achieve the required degree of
compaction. The material obtained from cutting of benches could also be utilised for this
operation.

When the existing slopes of the embankment are flatter than 4:1 then the slope surface may
only require ploughing or scarifying and no bench cutting is necessary. However, filling
shall be carried out in 250 mm thick horizontal layers as described above.

Where the width of the widened portion is insufficient for the use of roller, mechanical or
manual tampers shall be used for compaction. Wherever possible, end dumping of material
from hauling vehicles shall be avoided.

2-5.4.2 Construction of Earth Embankments on Sloping Ground

Where an embankment needs to be constructed on sloping ground, the ground surface shall
be appropriately benched or ploughed and scarified as indicated in clause 2-5.4.1 before the

Technical Specifications : Sub-base, Base and Shoulders 39

 commencement of filling. If required, the construction of lateral sub-surface drains shall be
carried out at the cut-fill interface as per clause 2 -9.

2-5.4.3 Earthwork over Existing Road Surfaces

If the existing road surface is granular or bituminous and a new road surface is supposed to
be constructed within 1 m range of height above the old one, then the existing road surface
shall be scarified to a minimum depth of 50 mm for proper bondage between fill and the old
formation.

If the existing road surface is of cement concrete and a new road surface is supposed to be
constructed within 1 m range of height above the old one, then the existing pavement shall be
removed completely prior to filling operation.

If the level difference between the existing and the new road surface is more than 1 m, then
the existing surface may not be required to be scarified or removed.

2-5.4.4 Embankment filling around Structures

Earth work on embankment shall be suspended at points forming approaches to structures

such as abutments, wing wall, return walls until the structure is fully set.

The filling around culverts, bridges and other structures up to a distance of twice the height
of the embankment at abutment shall be carried out independently from the filling on main
embankment. Such back filling shall not be carried out near to any structural component
until such component is being cured for 14 days.

The embankment shall be raised simultaneously in equal layers placed on either side of the
structural component. The sequence of such work shall be approved by the Engineer in
advance.

The material used for back filling shall not be organic or high plastic clay having plasticity
index of more than 20 and liquid limit of more than 40. The fill material shall be deposited
in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose thickness of 150 mm. These layers shall be
compacted as per clause 2-5.3.5.

If specified in the contract, a filter medium material could be used behind the structural
component in order to reduce the pore water pressures on it. Such filter material shall be laid
in layers simultaneously, in line with the other layers of fill material.

The compaction can be carried out by mechanical or manual tampers or by other methods
approved by the Engineer. Care shall be taken to avoid any damages to the built structural
components.

2-5.5 Plying of Construction Traffic

Construction traffic shall not use the prepared surface of the embankment without prior
permission of the Engineer. Any damage caused as a result of such use shall be rectified by
the Contractor/Users’ Group at their own cost.

2-5.6 Measurements for Payment

Technical Specifications : Sub-base, Base and Shoulders 40

 Earth embankment construction shall be measured by taking cross sections in the original
position before the work starts and in the final position after its completion.

Volumes of earthwork shall be computed by the method of average end areas and be given in
cubic metres.

The measurement of fill material from borrow areas shall be the difference between the net
quantities of compacted fill and the net quantities of suitable material brought from road way
and drainage excavation. It shall be assumed that one cubic metre of suitable material
brought to site from roadway and drainage excavation forms one cubic metre of compacted
fill if the measurement has already been done under the item of excavation. Since the
measurement was taken for undisturbed earth prior to excavation, no allowance for any
shrinkage/bulging shall be made.

Stripping of top soil including its storing and reapplication shall be measured in cubic metres.

Work which involves loosening and re-compacting of original ground surface shall be
measured in square metres.

In preparing foundations for embankments, works such as removal of unsuitable material

from the base, its replacement with suitable material shall be measured as individual items in
cubic metres.

Scarifying existing granular/bituminous road surfaces shall be measured in square metres.

Dismantling and removal of existing cement concrete pavement shall be measured in cubic
metres as per clause 1-2.6.

Preparation of filter media adjacent to the structural components shall be measured as

finished work in cubic metres.

2-5.7 Rates

2-5.7.1 Contract Unit Rate for Construction of Embankment or Filling of Sub-Grade

The contract unit rate for the items of construction of embankment and filling of sub-grade
shall be paid in full for carrying out the required operations including full compensation for:
 setting out,
 compacting original ground,
 scarifying or cutting continuous horizontal benches of 0.3 m width on side slopes of
existing embankments where required,
 compaction to specific requirements,
 shaping and dressing the top and slopes of embankment including rounding off the
corners,
 back filling at structures,
 widening works of embankments,
 excavation of all materials from designated borrow areas and transporting them to site up
to a lead of 50 m along the slope of lead route, and
 all labour, materials and incidentals necessary to complete the work as per the
Specifications.

2-5.7.2 Contract Unit Rate for Transporting Materials Required for Embankment Construction

Technical Specifications : Sub-base, Base and Shoulders 41

 This unit rate shall be paid in full to compensate for labour and incidentals necessary on
account of the additional haul or transportation involved beyond the initial lead of 50 m.

2-5.7.3 Contract Unit Rate for Stripping and Storing or Reapplication of Top Soil

This contract unit rate covers either storing or reapplication. Refer to clause 2-1.9.5 in this
regard.

2-5.7.4 Contract Unit Rate for Loosening and Re-Compacting the Embankment Foundations

Clause 2-1.9.2 shall apply.

2-5.7.5 Contract Unit Rates for Removal of Unsuitable Materials and Replacement with Suitable
Materials

Clauses 2-1.9.1 and 2-5.7.1 shall apply for removal and replacement, respectively.

2-5.7.6 Contract Unit Rate for Scarifying Existing Granular/Bituminous Road Surfaces

This rate shall cover the carrying out of required operations including full compensation for
all labour, materials, safety precautions and incidentals necessary to complete the work as per
the Specifications. It shall also cover handling, salvaging, stacking and disposing of the
dismantled materials up to a lead of 100 m along the slope of lead route.

2-5.7.7 Contract Unit Rate for Dismantling and Removal of Cement Concrete Pavements

Clause 1-2.7 shall apply.

2-5.7.8 Contract Unit Rate for Preparing Filter Media adjacent to Structural Components

This rate shall cover the carrying out of required operations including full compensation for
materials, labour and incidentals required to complete the work as per the Specifications.

2 -6 SOIL EROSION

2-6.1 Description

This work shall include temporary or permanent control measures shown in the engineering
drawings or/and directed by the Engineer during the construction period in relation to soil
erosion and water pollution. Such works shall be carried out in the form of berms, dykes,
sediment basins, fibre mats, mulches, grasses, slope drains and other erosion control devices.

The temporary erosion control measures shall be made in conjunction with the permanent
erosion control features which are specified on the drawings or directed by the Engineer.
Such works shall ensure economical, effective and continuous control of erosion throughout
the construction and post construction periods.

2-6.2 Materials

All materials shall comply with the quality standards spelled out in the contract or otherwise
shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the commencement of work.

Technical Specifications : Sub-base, Base and Shoulders 42

2-6.3 Construction Operations

Prior to the start of relevant construction, the schedule of work shall be approved by the
Engineer. This schedule shall detail,
 all temporary and permanent erosion control works which are applicable to construction
items such as
 clearing and grubbing,
 roadway and drainage excavation,
 embankment construction,
 bridges and other structures,
 structure related water courses,
 road pavement and
 shoulders;
 proposed methods of erosion control on service roads and borrow pits; and
 plan for disposal of waste materials.

The surface area of earth material which is liable to erosion shall be minimised. The
Contractor/Users’ Group shall be directed to provide immediate temporary or permanent
control measures to prevent soil erosion and its effects on construction operations and
adjacent properties as well as subsequent contamination and damage to nearby streams, lakes,
reservoirs, etc.

The erosion control measures may involve the construction of berms, dykes, sediment basins,
slope drains and use of temporary control devices and methods such as mulches, mats,
seeding, etc. Cut and fill slopes shall be seeded and turfed as per the engineering drawings.

The Contractor/Users’ Group shall be required to incorporate all permanent erosion control
features into the project at their earliest as outlined in the approved schedule in order to
minimise the need for temporary control measures.

Temporary erosion and pollution control measures shall be used to deal with the conditions
developed during construction but which were not foreseen during the design stage.
However, some of these measures may not necessarily be associated with permanent control
features of the project.

Where erosion is likely to be a problem, the permanent erosion control measures shall be
carried out soon after the completion of clearing, grubbing and stripping of top soil
operations. Otherwise, temporary erosion control measures shall be carried out after each
relevant construction activity. In such cases, entire construction area shall not be exposed at
once by any earthwork operation without the prior approval of Engineer.

The Engineer may, further, limit the operations in progress for the areas of excavation,
borrow and embankment filling. Such limits shall be fixed by the Engineer by considering
the Contractor’s/Users’ Group’s capability in adhering to the approved schedule and their
progress made in finishing, mulching, seeding and constructing the permanent measures of
erosion and pollution control.

If the above mentioned schedule becomes unrealistic due to climatic reasons, then temporary
control measures shall be taken immediately to the extent of their feasibility.

Technical Specifications : Sub-base, Base and Shoulders 43

 When the temporary erosion and pollution control measures become necessary due to the
Contractor’s/Users’ Group’s negligence at work or as a result of failure in timely installation
of permanent controls according to the contract, such activities shall be carried out at their
own cost.

Temporary erosion and pollution control works which are required due to reasons other than
the above shall be carried out as directed by the Engineer. The cost of such works shall be
covered by the provisions made in the contract.

Temporary erosion and pollution control measures may be required even outside the right-of-
way where supplementary operations such as borrow pit excavation, service road
construction, tipping of excavation spoils, parking of equipment, storing of tools/materials
and camping are continuing as a result of roadway construction.

The temporary erosion control measures made by the Contractor/Users’ Group shall be
adequately maintained by them until such measures are found no longer required.

2-6.4 Measurements for Payments

The soil erosion and pollution control works shall be measured by the units specified for
respective items in the contract. When the items are difficult to quantify, payments shall be
made on lump sum basis as per the provisions made in the contract.

2-6.5 Rates

The contract unit rates for different items of soil erosion and pollution control works shall be
paid in full for carrying out all required operations including full compensation for all labour,
materials and incidentals necessary to complete the works as per the Specifications.

2 -7 TURFING WITH SODS

2-7.1 Description

This work shall include furnishing and laying of live sod of perennial turf which forms grass
on the slopes of embankment, shoulders and other locations shown on the drawings or
directed by the Engineer.

Unless otherwise specified, such works shall be carried out immediately after the completion
of relevant construction items provided that the season is favourable or facilities are available
for turfing.

2-7.2 Materials

The sod shall be dense and have well-rooted growth of permanent and desirable grasses
which are indigenous to the locality where it is supposed to be used. It shall be practically
free from weeds or other undesirable matters.

When the sod is cut for re-use, the thickness of the grass layer on sod should be
approximately 50 mm and free from debris. The overall thickness of the sod should be as

Technical Specifications : Sub-base, Base and Shoulders 44

 uniform as possible with 5-8 cm thick cover of soil containing grass roots. Practically, the
entire root system of the grasses shall remain intact in the sod strip.

The sods shall be cut in rectangular strips having dimensions of not less than 25 cm x 30 cm.
However, the sods shall not be in excessively large size which may cause inconvenience in
handling and transportation.

During wet weather, the sod shall be allowed to dry sufficiently in order to avoid any tearing
during handling. During dry weather, the sod shall be watered in order to prevent the
separation of soil during handling. Furthermore, watering keeps the grass alive.

2-7.3 Construction Operations

2-7.3.1 Preparation of Earthen bed for Turfing

The area to be turfed shall be constructed in advance to the required slope and cross-section.
Soil on the area shall be loosened and made free from all stones larger than 50 mm diameter,
sticks, stumps and undesirable hostile matters. Soil on the area shall be prepared to a
reasonably fine granular texture up to a depth of not less than 25 mm.

Where required, top soil shall be spread over the locations to be turfed. Prior to spreading of
top soil, the slopes shall be scarified to the depths shown in the drawings. While spreading
top soil, required allowances shall be provided for the settlement. The depth after settlement
shall comply with the required nominal depth shown in the drawings.
Where top soil is not available for spreading, fertiliser and ground limestone shall be spread
uniformly at the rate indicated in the drawings.

If the sod bed is not sufficiently wet, then the prepared sod bed shall be moistened to the
loosened depth prior to turfing. The sod shall, however, be placed within 24 hours of its
detachment from the original ground.
Each sod strip shall be laid edge to edge. Each strip, when placed tightly against the other,
shall be tamped with wooden or metal tampers in order to eliminate air pockets and to press it
into the underlying soil layer.

On side slopes steeper than 2:1, the laying of sods shall be carried out from the bottom to the
top. At places where water may flow over the turfed area, the top edge of the lower strip
shall always be inserted into the down edge of the higher strip and a layer of soil shall be
placed over the joint followed by its compaction.

2-7.3.2 Staking the Sods

Where the slope is 2:1 or steeper and the distance along the slope is more than 2 m, the sods
shall be staked with pegs or nails spaced approximately 50 to 100 cm along the longitudinal
axis of the sod strips. The stakes shall be driven approximately perpendicular to the sod
surface.

2-7.3.3 Top Dressing

After the sods have been laid in position, the surface shall be cleared of loose sods, excess
soil and other hostile materials. A thin layer of top soil shall be spread over the turf and the
turfed area shall be moistened by sprinkling water.

Technical Specifications : Sub-base, Base and Shoulders 45

2-7.3.4 Watering and Maintenance

The turf shall be watered regularly by the Contractor/Users’ Group for a period of at least
four weeks after its laying. Watering shall be carried out without damaging the turf by
erosion or flooding. The turfed areas shall be, further, protected from any damage caused by
wheels of water bowsers or by people walking over it. To this effect, the Contractor/Users’
Group shall erect necessary warning signs and barriers.

The Contractor/Users’ Group shall repair or replace turfed areas by new sods if any area fails
to show uniform growth of grass. If such situation occurs as a result of the
Contractor’s/Users’ Group’s negligence then it shall be rectified at their cost.

2-7.4 Measurement for Payment

Turfing with sods shall be measured as finished work in square metres.

2-7.5 Rate

The contract unit rate for turfing with sods shall be paid in full for carrying out all relevant
operations detailed in clause 2 -7 including full compensation for all labour, materials,
precautionary measures and incidentals required to complete the work as per the
Specifications.

2 -8 SEEDING AND MULCHING

2-8.1 Description

This work shall include

 furnishing of seeds, chemical fertiliser, other organic manure and mulching materials;
and
 placing and incorporating the above on embankment slopes and other locations shown on
the drawings or as designated by the Engineer.

2-8.2 Materials

The seeds shall be of approved quality and type and be suitable for the soil on which they are
to be applied. The seeds shall be pure enough to ascertain the germination process. If
provided, seeds shall comply with the requirements indicated in the contract.

The chemical fertiliser shall be of standard quality having acceptable commercial identity.
The organic manure shall be fully putrefied organic matter such as cow dung. The mulching
material shall be preferably straw, hay, wood shaving or saw dust. It shall be reasonably free
from weed seeds and other hostile matters which may lower the effectiveness of mulch or be
harmful to the plant growth. To this effect, mulching material shall be delivered in dry state.

2-8.3 Seeding Operations

2-8.3.1 Preparation of Seed Bed

Technical Specifications : Sub-base, Base and Shoulders 46

 The area to be seeded shall be brought to the required shape by refilling of eroded areas and
refinishing of slopes, berms, etc. The preparation of seed bed shall include
 removal of all live plants by using appropriate agricultural tools;
 loosening of soil up to a depth of 10 cm;
 breaking and spreading of clods which are larger than 25 mm in diameter; and
 application of water as per the requirement.

2-8.3.2 Sowing of Seeds

All seeds shall be sowed uniformly according to the approved rate. Immediately after
sowing, the area shall be raked and dragged or otherwise covered by a layer of top soil of 6
mm thickness.

The sowing of seed shall not be carried out when the ground is muddy or the weather
condition is not favourable for such operation.

2-8.3.3 Soil Moisture

Soil moisture shall exist throughout the zone at a depth from 2.5 cm to 12.5 cm below the
surface at the time of planting. Watering of the seeded area shall be carried out as directed
by the Engineer.

2 -8.4 Mulching and Application of Fertiliser/Organic Manure

Within 24 hours of seeding, mulching material mixed with organic manure shall be placed as
a continuous, uniform cover having an approximate thickness of 25 mm. Mulching material
shall be protected from being blown away by wind as directed by the Engineer.
If required, chemical fertiliser could be applied later as described in the contract or as
directed by the Engineer.

2-8.5 Maintenance

Each seeded and mulched area shall be maintained by the Contractor/Users’ Group until its
final acceptance. Maintenance shall include
 protection of seeded areas from traffic by installing approved warning signs and
barricades; and
 repeating the seeding and mulching operations in failed areas.

2-8.6 Measurements for Payment

Seeding and mulching operations shall be measured as finished work in square metres.

2-8.7 Rate

Contract unit rate for seeding and mulching shall be paid in full for carrying out all relevant
operations including full compensation for all labour, materials, precautionary measures and
incidentals required to complete the works as per the Specifications.

2 -9 SURFACE/SUB-SURFACE DRAINS

2-9.1 Introduction

Technical Specifications : Sub-base, Base and Shoulders 47

 This work shall include construction of surface drains and sub-surface drains in accordance
with the requirements of these Specifications and as per the lines, grades, dimensions and
other particulars shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

Schedule of works shall be approved by the Engineer in order to ensure the completion of
such drains as per the operational sequence of other activities such as roadway and pavement
works. While preparing the schedule, it should be ensured that no excavation of other
completed works becomes necessary and no damage to other completed works is caused as a
result of scheduled time lag of this work.

2-9.2 Surface Drains

Surface drains shall be excavated as per the requirements of clause 2 -1. If found suitable,
the excavated materials shall be utilised in the adjoining embankment construction.

2-9.3 Sub-surface Drain

2-9.3.1 General

Sub-surface drains shall be either close-jointed perforated pipes or open-jointed non-

perforated pipes which are laid in trenches and packed with granular materials according to a
specified grading. When such drains are constructed to drain out the water in pavement
courses, it shall be in the form of aggregate drain which is placed in transverse direction to
the road pavement at specific intervals.

2-9.3.2 Materials

Pipe : Perforated pipes for the drains are usually made out of metal, asbestos cement, cement
concrete or PVC. Non-perforated pipes are generally made out of vitrified clay, cement
concrete or asbestos cement. The type, size and grade of the pipe shall be specified in the
contract. However, minimum internal diameter of the pipe shall be 150 mm. Holes of
perforated pipes shall be made on one half of the circumference as per the spacing indicated
on the drawings. Size of the hole shall either be within the range of 3 mm - 6 mm or be
closer to D 85 size of the aggregate which will be packed around the pipe. D 85 stands for
the size of the sieve that allows 85% of the particles by weight to pass through.

Filter Material : Filter material shall consist of particles which are sound, tough, hard and
durable. It shall be either sound-gravel or broken stone which is free from organic matters
and other undesirable materials. When the contract does not specify any particular grading
for filter material, the filter material shall be provided according to the following guidelines.

I. when the soil in the trench is fine grained (e.g. fine silt, clay or a mixture of both), the
filter material shall be of Class I grading as given in Table 2 -9.

II. when the soil in the trench is a type ranging from coarse silt to medium sand, the filter
material shall correspond to Class II grading of Table 2 -9.

III. when the soil in the trench is gravel mixed sand, the filter material shall correspond to
Class III grading of Table 2 -9.

Technical Specifications : Sub-base, Base and Shoulders 48

 The thickness of filter layer around the pipe shall be maintained as shown on the drawings
but it shall always be at least 150 mm.

Table 2 -9 : GRADING REQUIREMENTS OF FILTER MATERIAL

Sieve Designation Percentage by Weight Passing the Sieve

Class I Class II Class III
50 mm - - 100
40 mm - - 95-100
25 mm - 100 -
20 mm - 90-100 50-100
10 mm 100 40-100 15-55
4.75 mm 90-100 25-40 0-25
2.36 mm 80-100 18-33 0-5
1.18 mm 50-95 - -
600 micron 30-75 5-15 -
300 micron 10-30 0-7 -
150 micron 0-10 - -
75 micron 0-3 0-3 0-3

2-9.3.3 Trench Excavation

Trench for sub-surface drain shall be excavated as per the specified lines, grades, dimensions
on the construction drawings and in accordance with the requirements of clause 15 -3,
provided that the width of trench at pipe level shall not be less than 450 mm.

The excavation shall begin at the outlet end of the drain and proceed towards the upper end.
When unsuitable material is found at the trench bed, such material shall be removed to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. Such excavation shall be backfilled with an approved material
and the back fill shall be thoroughly compacted prior to the laying of pipes.

2-9.3.4 Laying of Pipes and Backfilling

Laying of pipes in the trench shall be carried out according to the specified lines, grades
shown in the drawings. The laying works shall start from the outlet end and proceed towards
the upper end. Longitudinal gradient of the pipe shall not be less than 0.01 (1:100).

Before laying the pipe, filter material of the required grading shall be placed on full width of
the trench bed in a layer not more than 150 mm thickness (or as shown on the drawings) and
compacted to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The pipe shall then be firmly embedded on the
bed.

Perforated pipes, unless otherwise specified, shall be placed with perforated holes facing
downwards in order to minimise clogging at the mouth. Pipes shall be joined securely with
appropriate couplings, fittings or collars.

Technical Specifications : Sub-base, Base and Shoulders 49

 Non-perforated pipes shall be laid with not less than 150 mm spacing between the adjoining
ends. Such open joints shall be wrapped with suitable pervious material like double layer of
hessian or similar material in order to permit entry of water but not the finer particles. In this
case, the number of pipe segments shall be increased so that there are more open joints
available to receive seepage water.

In case of non-perforated pipes with bell end, the pipes shall be laid with the bell facing
upgrade direction. Upper end of the pipe shall be closed either by concrete plugs or plugs
fabricated from the same material as of the pipe in order to prevent entry of any soil particles.

When the pipe laying is completed, an approved filter material of the required grading (refer
to clause 2-9.3.2) shall be placed over the pipe to the required level in layers having
maximum thickness of 150 mm. Each layer shall be compacted to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.

Unless otherwise specified, the segments of sub-surface drains which are not directly below
the road pavement shall be sealed at the top by a sealing material (clay) having a minimum
thickness of 150 mm in order to prevent percolation of surface water. However, the
minimum thickness of overburden layer (filter material + sealing material) above the pipe
shall be 300 mm.

2-9.3.5 Drain Outlets

Outlets of pipes shall be carefully positioned to avoid any possible blockage. The projected
portion of the outlet pipes shall be protected with a cover of approved gratings or screens
which are securely fastened to the place.

For a length of 0.5 m from the outlet end, the trench shall not be filled with filter material.
Instead, such section shall be backfilled with excavated soil. Further, the pipe in this section
shall not have any perforations.

2-9.3.6 Aggregate Drains

Aggregate drains shall be placed within the shoulders. It shall be carried out after the
completion of road pavement. Depth, thickness and spacing of the aggregate drains shall be
generally shown on the construction drawings. Trenches for aggregate drains shall be
excavated to a minimum width of 300 mm and to a depth specified in the drawings or as
directed by the Engineer.

The base of the trench shall be kept free from loose particles and sloped enough to drain the
seepage water. Face of the trench at the edge of road pavement shall be made in such a
manner that all granular pavement courses to be drained shall be exposed clearly.

Aggregate used in such drains shall be durable and free from organic matter and other
undesirable substances. In general, gravel stones or any other hard stones shall be filled in
aggregate drains. The filter materials recommended for aggregate drains shall have the
following grading:

Sieve Designation Percentage by Weight Passing the Sieve

12.5 mm 100
10 mm 85-100
4.75 mm 10-30

Technical Specifications : Sub-base, Base and Shoulders 50

 2.36 mm 0-10
1.18 mm 0-5

Thickness of aggregate layer shall be according to the construction drawings. However, in

no case, it shall be less than 200 mm.

The remaining depth of the trench shall be filled with suitable fill material in accordance with
clause 2 -5.

2-9.4 Measurements for Payment

Excavation of surface drain shall be measured and paid as per clause 2 -1.
 Dressing the sides and bed of the surface drain shall be measured in square metres.
 Lining of surface drain shall be measured in square metres.

Excavation of trench for sub-surface drain shall be measured and paid as per clause 2 -4.
 Removal of unsuitable material and its replacement with suitable material in the trench
bed shall be measured as a single item in terms of filled volume in cubic metres.
 Laying of pipes for sub-surface drains shall be measured as completed length in linear
metres.
 Joining of pipes shall be considered incidental to the work and covers
 the provision of hessian wrappings at open joints;
 plugging the upgrade end of pipe;
 providing grating/screen at the outlet end; and
 providing impervious clay cover wherever required.
 Backfill material and aggregates for aggregate drains shall be measured as laid in
position in cubic metres.

2-9.5 Rates

2-9.5.1 Surface Drains

The contract unit rates for the dressing of bed and sides and the lining of surface drains shall
be paid in full for carrying out the required operations including full compensation for all
labour, materials, precautionary measures and incidentals required to complete the work as
per the Specifications.

2-9.5.2 Sub-surface Drains

The contract unit rate for the removal of unsuitable materials and its replacement with
suitable material shall be paid in full for carrying out the required operations including full
compensation for all labour, materials, precautionary measures and incidentals required to
complete the work as per the Specifications. It includes a lead up to 50 m along the slope of
the lead route.

The contract unit rate for the laying of pipes for sub-surface drains shall be paid in full for
providing, laying and joining the pipes to the requirements of these Specifications including
full compensation for all labour, materials, loading, unloading, handling and other incidentals
required to complete the work.

Technical Specifications : Sub-base, Base and Shoulders 51

 The contract unit rate for the placing of backfill material and aggregates in aggregate drains
shall be paid in full for providing, laying and compacting the material to the requirements of
these Specifications including full compensation for all labour, materials and other
incidentals required to complete the work.

Sub-base, Base and

Shoulders

Technical Specifications : Sub-base, Base and Shoulders 52

3 -1 GRANULAR SUB-BASE

3-1.1 Description

This work shall include laying and compacting of well-graded material on prepared sub-grade
in accordance with the requirements of the Specifications. The sub-base material shall be
laid in one or more layers as necessary according to the lines, grading and cross-sections as
shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

3-1.2 Materials

The material to be used for such works shall be any individual or combination of natural
sand, moorum, gravel, crushed or broken stone, crushed or broken slag, crushed or broken
concrete, over burnt brick aggregates, laterite, etc. depending upon the approved quality and
the grading. The material shall be free from organic or undesirable substances and shall
conform with one of the three grading given in Table 3 -1.

Table 3 -1 : Grading for Granular Sub-base Materials

Sieve Designation Percentage by Weight Passing the Sieve

Grading I Grading II Grading III
80 mm 100 100 100
63 mm 90-100 90-100 90-100
4.75 mm 35-70 40-90 50-100
75 micron 0-20 0-25 0-30
CBR Value 30 25 20
(minimum)

Note : For all three gradings, the material passing 425 micron sieve shall have a liquid limit of not
more than 25% and a plasticity index of not more than 6%.

3-1.2.1 Physical Requirements

The fraction of material passing 20 mm sieve shall give a CBR value as indicated in Table 3
-1 or more (if specified in the contract), when tested in accordance with IS : 2720 (Part XVI)
after preparing the samples at maximum dry density and at optimum moisture content
corresponding to IS : 2720 (Part VII) and soaking the same in water for 4 days.

3-1.3 Construction Operations

3-1.3.1 Preparation of Sub-grade

Immediately prior to the laying of sub-base, the sub-grade previously completed as per clause
2 -1 or 2 -5 shall be prepared by removing all vegetation and other extraneous matter; by
sprinkling lightly with water, if necessary; and by compacting it with one pass of 8-10 ton
smooth wheeled roller or with relatively increased number of passes of 1.5 ton concrete
roller.

3-1.3.2 Spreading and Compacting

The sub-base material of specified grading shall be spread on the prepared sub-grade.

Technical Specifications : Bituminous Courses 53

 The thickness of loose layers shall be regulated in such a manner that the attained thickness
of each layer does not exceed 150 mm after consolidation.

Moisture content of the loose material shall be checked and suitably adjusted by sprinkling
additional water. At the time of compaction, the moisture content of the loose material shall
be within the range of 98%-101% of the optimum moisture content. While adding water, due
allowances shall be made for evaporation losses. After moistening, each layer shall be
scarified or mixed by suitable means in order to make the materials uniformly wet.

Immediately after making the material uniformly wet to the satisfaction of Engineer, rolling
shall be started with 8 to 10 ton smooth wheeled rollers or with any other labour-based means
or plants such as 1.5 ton concrete roller. Rolling shall be done longitudinally commencing at
the edges and progressing towards the centre except on super-elevated positions.

Rolling on super-elevated positions shall commence from the lower edge and progress
towards the upper edge by moving the equipment parallel to the centre line of the pavement.
Each pass of the roller shall uniformly overlap with not less than one third of the adjoining
track made during the preceding pass. During rolling, the grade and camber shall be checked
and any high spots or depressions which become apparent shall be corrected by removing or
adding fresh material. Rolling shall be continued till the density attained is at least 100% of
the maximum dry density for the material.

The surface of any layer of material on completion of compaction shall be well closed; free
from any surface movement due to the load of compaction plants; and free from ridges,
cracks and loose materials. All loose, segregated, defective areas shall be completely re-laid
and re-compacted.

3-1.4 Finishing of Surface and Quality Control Works

The finishing work of surfaces shall conform with the requirements of clause 5 -1. Effective
quality control of materials and works shall be exercised by the Engineer as per the clause 5 -
2.

3-1.5 Arrangement for Traffic

During the period of construction, the flow of traffic shall be maintained in accordance with
clause G -12.

3-1.6 Measurements for Payment

Granular sub-base shall be measured as finished work in position in cubic metres.

3-1.7 Rate

The contract unit rate for granular sub-base shall be paid in full for carrying out the required
operations including full compensation for
 making arrangements for traffic as per clause G -12 except the works such as initial
treatment to shoulders and construction of diversions;
 furnishing all materials to be incorporated in the work including all royalties, fees, rents
(where necessary), all leads and lifts;
 carrying out the work in a part of the roadway width, leaving the rest of the width for the
passage of traffic whenever directed; and

Technical Specifications : Bituminous Courses 54

  all labour and incidentals required to complete the work as per the Specifications.

3 -2 WATER BOUND MACADAM SUB-BASE/BASE COURSE/WEARING COURSE

3-2.1 Description

Water bound macadam shall consist of clean, crushed aggregates mechanically interlocked by
rolling and at the same time, bonded together with screenings, binding materials (where
necessary) and water. It shall be laid on any or combination of the prepared sub-grade, sub-
base, base or existing pavement and finished in accordance with the requirements of the
Specifications and in conformity with the lines, grades, and cross-sections shown on the
drawings or otherwise directed by the Engineer.

3-2.2 Materials

3-2.2.1 Coarse Aggregates (General Requirements)

Coarse aggregates shall be crushed stone or broken stone or natural gravel or over burnt brick
aggregate. The aggregates shall conform to the physical requirements specified in Table 3 -
2(a). Type and the range of size of aggregate shall be specified in the contract.

Table 3 -2(a) : Physical Requirements of Coarse Aggregates for Water Bound

Macadam

S. No. Type of Test Requirements

Construction
1 Sub-base Los Angeles Abrasion 50% maximum
Value
or 40% maximum
Aggregate Impact Value

2 Base 50% maximum

a) Los Angeles Abrasion
Value 40% maximum
or
Aggregate Impact Value 15% maximum

b) Flakiness Index

3-2.2.2 Details of Aggregate Materials

Crushed or broken stone : When crushed or broken stone is specified as the coarse
aggregate, it shall be hard, durable and free from excess of flat, elongated, soft and
disintegrated particles, dirt and other objectionable matter.

Over burnt brick aggregate : Brick aggregate shall be made out of over burnt bricks or brick
bats and be free from dust and other undesirable matter.

3-2.2.3 Grading Requirements of Coarse Aggregates

Technical Specifications : Bituminous Courses 55

 The coarse aggregates shall conform to one of the grading specified in Table 3 -2(b),
provided that the use of Grading I shall be restricted to sub-base course only.
Table 3 -2(b) : Grading Requirements of Coarse Aggregates

Grading Size Range Sieve Percentage by Weight

No. Designation Passing the Sieve
I 90 mm to 40 mm 100 mm 100
80 mm 65-85
63 mm 25-60
40 mm 0-15
20 mm 0-5
II 63 mm to 40 mm 80 mm 100
63 mm 90-100
50 mm 35-70
40 mm 0-15
20 mm 0-5
III 50 mm to 20 mm 63 mm 100
50 mm 95-100
40 mm 35-70
20 mm 0-10
10 mm 0-5

3-2.2.4 Screenings

Screenings to fill voids in the course aggregate shall generally consist of the same material as
the coarse aggregate. However, where permitted, predominantly non-plastic materials such
as moorum or gravel (other than rounded river borne material) may be used for this purpose
provided liquid limit and plasticity index of such material is below 20 and 6, respectively,
and fraction passing 75 micron sieve does not exceed 10%.

As far as possible, screenings shall conform to the grading specified in Table 3 -2(c).
Screenings of Type A in Table 3 -2(c) shall be used with coarse aggregates of Grading I in
Table 3 -2(b). Screenings of Type A or B in Table 3 -2(c) shall be used with coarse
aggregates of Grading II in Table 3 -2(b). Similarly, Type B shall be used with coarse
aggregates of Grading III. The use of screenings may be omitted in the case of soft
aggregates such as over burnt brick bats, quartzite and laterite.

Table 3 -2(c) : Grading for Screenings

Grading Size of Screenings Sieve Designation Percentage by

Classification Weight Passing
the Sieve
A 12.5 mm 12.5 mm 100
10 mm 90-100
4.75 mm 10-30
150 micron 0-8
B 10 mm 10 mm 100
4.75 mm 85-100
150 micron 10-30

Technical Specifications : Bituminous Courses 56

3-2.2.5 Binding Materials

Binding material to be used for the construction of water bound macadam shall comprise of a
suitable material approved by the Engineer having plasticity index of less than 6.
Application of binding material may not be necessary when the screenings are of crushable
type such as moorum, quartzite, laterite or gravel.

3-2.3 Construction Operations

3-2.3.1 Preparation of Base

The sub-grade or sub-base which receives the water bound macadam course shall be prepared
to the specified grade, camber and made free of dust and other undesirable materials. Any
ruts and soft yielding places shall be corrected in an approved manner and rolled to make the
surface firm. When water bound macadam is to be laid over an existing black topped
surface, 50 mm x 50 mm furrows shall be cut at an angle of 45 to the centre line of the road
at 1 m intervals in the existing surface before laying the coarse aggregates.

3-2.3.2 Inverted Choke

If the water bound macadam is to be laid directly over the sub-grade, without any intervening
pavement course, a 25 mm course of screenings (Grading B) shall be spread on the prepared
sub-grade before the application of coarse aggregates.

3-2.3.3 Spreading Coarse Aggregates

The coarse aggregates shall be spread uniformly upon the prepared base in such quantities
that the thickness of the compacted layer is
 100 mm for Grading I and
 75-100 mm for Grading II and III, unless otherwise specified.

In no case shall the aggregates be dumped in heaps directly on the surface prepared to receive
the aggregate nor shall hauling over un-compacted or partially compacted base be permitted.

The surface of the aggregates spread shall be carefully checked with templates. All high or
low spots shall be rectified by removing or adding aggregates as necessary. No segregation
of large or fine particles shall be allowed. The coarse aggregates spread shall be of uniform
gradation with no pockets of fine materials. Normally, the coarse aggregates shall not be
spread more than 3 days before the subsequent construction operations.

3-2.3.4 Rolling

Immediately following the spreading of the coarse aggregates, rolling shall be started with
three wheeled power rollers of 6 to 10 ton or tandem or vibratory rollers of approved type.
The concrete roller of 1.5 ton shall be used if the above ones are not available. The weight of
the roller shall depend upon the type of aggregates.

On super-elevated portions, the rolling shall be carried out from the inner edge to the outer.
On places other than the super-elevated portions, the rolling shall start from the edges and
progress gradually towards the centre.

Technical Specifications : Bituminous Courses 57

 First the edge/edges shall be compacted with roller running forward and backward. The
roller shall then move inwards parallel to the centre line of the road, in successive passes by
uniformly lapping the preceding tracks by at least half the width.

Rolling shall be discontinued when the aggregates are partially compacted with sufficient
void spaces left. This makes the application of screenings possible. However, where
screenings are not required as in the case of crushed aggregates, compaction shall be
continued until the aggregates are thoroughly interlocked. During rolling, slight sprinkling of
water may be done, if necessary. Rolling shall not be done when the sub-grade is soft or
yielding or when it causes a wave-like motion in the sub-grade or sub-base course.

The rolled surface shall be checked transversely and longitudinally with templates. If any
irregularities are found, these shall be corrected by loosening the surface; adding or removing
necessary quantity of aggregates; and re-rolling until the entire surface conforms to the
desired camber and grade. In no case shall the use of screenings be permitted to make up
depressions.

3-2.3.5 Application of Screenings

After the coarse aggregate has been rolled as per clause 3-2.3.4, screenings shall gradually be
applied in sufficient quantities in order to fill the interstices of the surface. The screenings
shall not be damp or wet at the time of application. Dry rolling shall be done while the
screenings are being spread so that the vibration of the roller helps the screenings to be
settled in voids. The screenings shall not be dumped in piles but be spread uniformly in
successive thin layers either by spreading motion of hand shovels or by mechanical spreaders
or directly from trucks. However, the trucks operating for spreading of screenings shall not
disturb the coarse aggregates.

The screenings shall be applied at a slow and uniform rate (in three or more applications) in
order to ensure the effective filling of all voids. Dry rolling and sweeping (by hand brooms)
shall also be applied in order to facilitate the proper application of screenings.

If the application of screenings is fast and thick, then it forms into cakes or ridges on the
surface and, thus, prevents filling of voids or the direct bearing of the roller on the coarse
aggregates. Therefore, such operations shall be discouraged by the Engineer.

These operations shall be continued until no more screenings can be forced into the voids of
the coarse aggregates. The spreading, rolling and sweeping of screenings shall be carried out
only in such lengths of the road which could be completed within one day’s operation.

3-2.3.6 Sprinkling and Grouting

After the screenings have been applied, the surface shall be copiously sprinkled with water,
swept and rolled. Hand-brooms shall be used to sweep wet screenings into voids and to
spread them evenly. The sprinkling, sweeping and rolling operations shall be continued with
additional screenings applied as necessary until the coarse aggregate has been thoroughly
keyed, well bonded and firmly set in its full depth and a grout has been formed of screenings.
Care shall be taken to ensure that the base or sub-grade does not get damaged due to the
addition of excessive quantities of water during such operations.

Technical Specifications : Bituminous Courses 58

3-2.3.7 Application of Binding Material

After the application of screenings in accordance with clauses 3-2.3.5 and 3-2.3.6, the
binding material where it is required to be used shall be applied successively in two or more
thin layers at a slow and uniform rate. After each application of binding materials,
 the surface shall be copiously sprinkled with water;
 the resulting slurry shall be swept with hand-brooms to fill the voids properly; and
 the surface shall be rolled while applying the water to the wheels of the rollers (This
operation removes the binding material which is stuck to the roller drums).

These operations shall continue until the resulting slurry, after filling of voids, forms a wave
ahead of the wheels of the moving roller.

3-2.3.8 Setting and Drying

After the final compaction of water bound macadam course, the road shall be allowed to dry
overnight. Next morning, hungry spots shall be filled with screenings of binding material;
lightly sprinkled with water, if necessary; and rolled as directed by the Engineer. No traffic
shall be allowed on the road until the macadam is completely set.

3-2.4 Finishing of Surface and Quality Control Works

The finishing work of surfaces shall conform with the requirements of clause 5 -1. Effective
quality control of materials and works shall be exercised by the Engineer as per clause 5 -2.

3-2.5 Arrangements for Traffic

During the period of construction, the flow of traffic shall be maintained in accordance with
clause G -12.

3-2.6 Measurements for Payment

Water bound macadam shall be measured as finished work in cubic metres.

3-2.7 Rate

The contract unit rate for water bound macadam which is laid as sub-base/base/wearing
course shall be paid in full for carrying out the required operations including full
compensation for all components listed in clause 3-1.7.

3 -3 SHOULDER CONSTRUCTION

3-3.1 Description

This work shall include the construction of shoulders on either side of the pavement
 in accordance with the requirements of the Specifications;
 in conformity with the lines, grades and cross-sections shown on the drawings; or
 as directed by the Engineer.

Technical Specifications : Bituminous Courses 59

3-3.2 Materials

Shoulders may be of selected earth or granular material conforming to the requirements of

clauses 2 -5 or 3 -1, respectively. The actual material to be used shall be specified.

3-3.3 Construction Operations

Except in the case of bituminous constructions, shoulders shall be constructed in advance of

the laying of pavement courses. The compacted thickness of each layer of shoulder shall
correspond to the compacted layer of the pavement course to be laid adjacent to it. After
compaction, the inside edges of shoulders shall be trimmed vertical and all spilled material
shall be removed before proceeding with the construction of the pavement layer.

In the case of bituminous courses, shouldering operations shall start only after the pavement
course has been laid and compacted.

Regardless of the method of laying, all shoulder construction material shall be placed directly
on the shoulder. Any spilled material dragged on to the pavement surface shall be
immediately removed without damage to the pavement.

During all the stages of shoulder construction, the required cross-fall shall be maintained to
drained off the surface water.

3-3.4 Measurements for Payment

Shoulder construction shall be measured as finished work in position in cubic metres.

3-3.5 Rate

The contract unit rate for shoulder construction shall be paid in full for carrying out the
required operations including full compensation for all components listed in clause 3-1.7.

Bituminous Courses

Technical Specifications : Bituminous Courses 60

4 -1 PREPARATION OF BASE FOR BITUMINOUS COURSES

4-1.1 Description

Preparation of base for bituminous courses shall include the preparation of existing water
bound macadam (WBM) or black-topped surface to specified lines, grades and cross-sections
in advance of laying a bituminous course. The work shall be performed on such widths and
lengths as may be directed by the Engineer. Such work may consist of scarifying and
relaying the water bound macadam course, filling of pot-holes and/or application of a
levelling course as necessary.

4-1.2 Materials

4-1.2.1 For Scarifying and Relaying the Water Bound Macadam Base Course

The materials used shall be coarse aggregates which are salvaged from scarification of the
existing base course to be renewed and be supplemented by fresh aggregates and screenings
corresponding to clause 3 -2.

4-1.2.2 For Patching Pot-holes

The materials used for patching pot-holes shall be coarse aggregates, screenings, stone chips,
bitumen or combination thereof as specified, conforming to the quality requirements of these
materials given elsewhere in these Specifications.

4-1.2.3 For Levelling Course

The levelling course shall consist of pre-mixed bituminous material which conforms to clause
4 -3 except binder content which in this case shall be 2.5% by weight of the total mix. The
aggregates may conform to either Grading I or II given in Table 4 -3(b).

If the average thickness of surface irregularity is less than 30 mm, no such levelling course
shall be required.

4-1.3 Construction Operations

4-1.3.1 Scarifying and Renewing Base Course

The surface shall be scarified by means of pick-axes or other means approved by the
Engineer. The aggregate base shall be loosened to a depth of 50-75 mm after removing any
existing black-topped surface. The resulting materials shall be removed from the road bed
and screened for use in the renewal course. High spots on the exposed surface shall be
corrected so that the surface broadly conforms to the specified grade and camber. The
salvaged coarse aggregates mixed with requisite quantities of fresh aggregates shall be spread
on the prepared bed and compacted as water bound macadam to a thickness of 75 mm or
more as directed, in accordance with clause 3 -2.

4-1.3.2 Patching of Pot-holes

Pot-holes shall be cut to a regular shape with vertical sides after removing the water, if any.
All loose and fragmented materials shall be removed from the prepared bed.

Technical Specifications : Quality Control for Road Works 61

 The pot-holes shall then be filled with coarse aggregates and screenings which conform to
clause 3 -2. After filling, the layer shall be compacted with heavy hand rammers or
approved mechanical tampers.

4-1.3.3 Laying of Levelling Course

After filling the pot-holes as per clause 4-1.3.2, the base on which the levelling course is to
be laid shall be thoroughly swept and brushed to remove the dust and extraneous material.
After the application of tack coat as per clause 4 -2, the levelling course shall then be laid
and compacted to the desired levels, grade and camber given in the drawings and as per the
requirements of the respective Specifications. The top levels of the course shall be
determined from the final road level after accounting for the thickness of the bituminous
wearing course which will be laid over it subsequently.

4-1.4 Arrangement for Traffic

During the above operations, flow of traffic shall be maintained as per clause G -12.

4-1.5 Measurements for Payment

4-1.5.1 Filling of Pot-holes

The work of filling pot-holes shall be considered incidental to the construction of bituminous
courses for which the base is prepared.

4-1.5.2 Scarifying and Relaying

Scarifying and relaying the aggregate base course shall be measured in square metres. Fresh
coarse aggregates and screening materials used in the work shall be measured in stacks in
accordance with clause 4 -6.

4-1.5.3 Levelling Course

Levelling course shall be measured as volume compacted in position in cubic metres. The
volume shall be worked out through measurement of layer thickness as per clause G-13.3.

4-1.6 Rates

4-1.6.1 Scarifying and Relaying

The contract unit rate for scarifying and relaying the aggregate base course shall be paid in
full for carrying out the required operations including full compensation for the components
listed in clause 3-1.7 except that the fresh coarse aggregates and screenings to be
incorporated in the work shall be paid separately in accordance with clause 4 -6.

4-1.6.2 Levelling Course

The contract unit rate for levelling course shall be paid in full for carrying out the required
operations including full compensation for:
 making arrangements for traffic as per clause G -12 except for initial treatment to
shoulders and construction of diversions;

Technical Specifications : Quality Control for Road Works 62

  providing all materials to be incorporated in the work including any royalties, fees, rents
and taxes as applicable and all leads unless the contract specifically excludes any item of
material required for the work or provides for separate payment in accordance with
clause 4 -6;
 preparation of base including filling of pot-holes; all clearing operations; and application
of tack coat;
 all labour, precautionary measures and other incidentals required to complete the work as
per the Specifications; and
 carrying out the work in part widths of roadway, where directed.

4 -2 TACK COAT

4-2.1 Description

Tack coat is a bitumen painting applied as an intermediate bonding coat to another

bituminous course to be laid on the existing road surface. It shall be applied in single coat of
low viscosity liquid bituminous material.

4-2.2 Materials

The only material in this item of work is a binder. Binder used for tack coat shall be bitumen
of a suitable grade as directed by the Engineer. It should conform to IS : 73, 217 or 454, as
applicable, or to any other approved cutback (Cut back bitumen is prepared by adding a
quantity of kerosene or diesel oil to the bitumen. Often, it may be 5% to 10% by volume of
the bitumen) until similar Nepal’s Standards are in place.

4-2.3 Construction Operations

4-2.3.1 Preparation of Base

The surface on which the tack coat is to be applied shall be thoroughly swept and brushed to
remove the dust or any other extraneous material before the application of the binder.

4-2.3.2 Application of Binder

Binder shall be heated to the temperature appropriate to the grade of bitumen used and
approved by the Engineer and sprayed on the base at the rate specified below. The rate of
spraying in terms of straight-run bitumen shall be
(i) 5 kg per 10 square metre area for an existing bitumen treated surface.
(ii) 10 kg per 10 square metre area for an untreated water bound macadam surface.

The binder shall be applied uniformly with the aid of sprayers. The tack coat shall be applied
just ahead of the oncoming bituminous construction.

4-2.4 Quality Control Works

Control on the quality of materials and works shall be exercised by the Engineer in
accordance with clause 5-2.4.
4-2.5 Arrangements for Traffic

Technical Specifications : Quality Control for Road Works 63

 While the above operations continue, the flow of traffic shall be regulated as per clause G -
12.

4-2.6 Measurements for Payment

Tack coat shall be measured in terms of surface area of application in square metres
depending upon the specified rate of spraying.

4-2.7 Rate

The contract unit rate for tack coat shall be paid in full for carrying out the required
operations including full compensation for:
 making arrangements for traffic as per clause G -12 except for initial treatment to
shoulders and construction of diversions;
 providing all materials to be incorporated in the work including all royalties, fees, rents
and taxes where necessary and all leads;
 all labour, precautionary measures and other incidentals required to complete the work as
per the Specifications; and
 carrying out the work in part widths of roadway, where directed.

4 -3 BITUMINOUS MACADAM BASE/BINDER COURSE

4-3.1 Description

Bituminous macadam base/binder course shall be constructed in accordance with the

requirements of these Specifications and in conformity with the lines, grades and cross
sections shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. This work shall include the
construction of 50 mm/75 mm thickness of compacted crushed aggregates pre-mixed with a
bituminous binder which is to be laid as a single layer immediately after mixing on a base
prepared previously.

4-3.2 Materials

4-3.2.1 Binder

The binder shall be straight run bitumen of a suitable grade as directed by the Engineer
complying with IS : 73.

4-3.2.2 Aggregates

The aggregates shall consist of crushed stone, crushed gravel (shingle) or other stones. They
shall be clean, strong, durable, of fairly cubical shape and free of disintegrated pieces,
organic and other deleterious matter and adherent coatings. The aggregates shall preferably
be hydrophobic and of low porosity.

The aggregates shall satisfy the physical requirements set forth in Table 4 -3(a).

Table 4 -3(a) : Physical Requirements of Aggregates for Bituminous Macadam

Technical Specifications : Quality Control for Road Works 64

 S. No. Test Test Method Requirements
1 Los Angeles Abrasion IS : 2386 35% Maximum
Value* (Part IV)
2 Aggregate Impact Value* IS : 2386 30% Maximum
(Part IV)
3 Flakiness Index IS : 2386 35% Maximum
(Part I)
4 Stripping Value IS : 6241 25% Maximum

5 Water Absorption IS : 2386 2% Maximum

(Part III)
* Aggregates may satisfy requirements of either of the two tests.

The aggregates for bituminous macadam for different thickness shall conform to Grading I or
II shown in Table 4 -3(b) and Table 4 -3(c). The actual grading to be used shall be
specified in the contract.

Table 4 -3(b) : Aggregates Grading for 75 mm Compacted Thickness of

Bituminous Macadam

Sieve Designation Percentage by Weight Passing the Sieve

Grading I Grading II
63 mm 100 -
50 mm 90-100 -
40 mm 35-65 100
25 mm 20-40 70-100
20 mm - 50-80
12.5 mm 5-20 -
4.75 mm - 10-30
2.36 mm - 5-20
75 micron 0-5 0-4

Table 4 -3(c) : Aggregates Grading for 50 mm Compacted Thickness of

Bituminous Macadam

Sieve Designation Percentage by Weight Passing the Sieve

Grading I Grading II
50 mm 100 -
40 mm 90-100 -
25 mm 50-80 100
20 mm - 70-100
12.5 mm 10-30 -
10 mm - 35-60
4.75 mm - 15-35
2.36 mm - 5-20
75 micron 0-5 0-4

4-3.2.3 Proportioning of Materials

Technical Specifications : Quality Control for Road Works 65

 The binder content for pre-mixing shall be 3.5% and 4% by weight of the total mix for
aggregate Grading I and II, respectively, except otherwise directed by the Engineer. The
quantities of aggregates to be used shall be sufficient to yield the specified thickness after
compaction.

4-3.2.4 Variation in Proportioning of Materials

It shall be ensured that the materials are mixed in their respective proportions thereby
producing a uniform mix. However, a variation in binder content of ±0.3% by weight of total
mix could be permitted for individual specimen taken for quality control tests in accordance
with clause 5 -2.

4-3.3 Construction Operations

4-3.3.1 Weather and Seasonal Limitations

Bituminous macadam shall not be laid during rainy weather or when the base course is damp
or wet.

4-3.3.2 Preparation of Base

The base on which bituminous macadam is to be laid shall be prepared, shaped and
conditioned to the specified lines, grade and cross-sections in accordance with clause 4 -1 as
directed by the Engineer. The receiving surface shall be thoroughly swept and brushed to
remove all dust and undesirable materials.

4-3.3.3 Tack Coat

A tack coat as per clause 4 -2 shall be applied over the base except when the laying of
bituminous macadam is being preceded by a bituminous levelling course.

4-3.3.4 Preparation and Transport of Mix

Hot mix plant of adequate capacity shall be used for preparing the mix. Alternatively, the
preparation of mix could be performed manually as follows:
(i) Bitumen shall be heated in empty oil drum or big metal pots;
(ii) Simultaneously, the aggregates shall be spread on sheets made out of salvaged empty
bitumen drums and shall be heated by making a fire underneath;
(iii) Finally, mixing the heated bitumen with hot aggregates on a separate big metal tray.

The temperature of binder at the time of mixing shall be in the range of 150° to 165°C and
that of aggregates shall be in the range of 125° to 150°C, provided that the difference in
temperature between the binder and aggregate at no time exceeds 25°C.

Mixing shall be thorough to ensure that a homogeneous mixture is obtained in which all
particles of the aggregates are coated uniformly. The mixture shall be transported from the
mixing plant or the mixing place at site to the point of use in suitable vehicles or carriers.
The vehicles or carriers employed for transport shall be cleaned and covered while in transit
if so directed by the Engineer.

Technical Specifications : Quality Control for Road Works 66

4-3.3.5 Spreading

The mix shall be spread immediately after mixing by means of manual laying where no
mechanical means are available. It shall be carried out as per the screeds previously fixed at
intervals. After spreading, the mix shall be tamped and finished according to the lines, grade
and cross-sections shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. At the time of
laying, the temperature of the mix shall be maintained in the range of 110° to 135°C.

The longitudinal joints and edges shall be constructed true to the delineating lines parallel to
the centre line of the road. All joints shall be cut vertical to the full thickness of the
previously laid mix and the surface shall be painted with hot bitumen before placing fresh
material for the next stretch.

4-3.3.6 Rolling

After the spreading of mix, rolling shall be done by 8/10 ton power rollers or other approved
plant. Rolling should start as soon as possible after the material has been spread. Rolling
shall be done with care by avoiding any undue roughening of pavement surface.

Rolling of the longitudinal joint shall be done immediately after the paving operation. Then,
rolling shall commence at edges and progress towards the centre longitudinally. In the case
of super-elevated portions, rolling shall commence at the lower edge and progress towards
the upper edge moving parallel to the centre line of the pavement.

The initial or breakdown rolling shall be done as soon as it is possible to roll the mixture
without cracking the surface. The second or intermediate rolling shall follow the breakdown
rolling as closely as possible and be done while the paving mix is still at a temperature that
will result in maximum density. The final rolling shall be done while the material is still
workable enough for the removal of roller’s track marks.

When the roller has passed over the entire area once, any high spots or depressions which
become apparent shall be corrected by removing or adding fresh material. The rolling shall
then be continued till the entire surface has been rolled to requisite compaction. At this
point, there is no crushing of aggregates and all the roller’s track marks have been eliminated.
Each pass of the roller shall uniformly lap over not less than one third of the track made by
the preceding pass. The roller wheels shall be kept damp, if necessary, to avoid the
bituminous material from sticking to the wheels and being picked up. In no case shall fuel or
lubricating oil be used for this purpose.

Rolling operation shall be completed in every respect before the temperature of the mix falls
below 80°C.

Rollers shall not stand on newly laid material when there is a risk of any deformation. The
edges along and transverse of the bituminous macadam laid and compacted earlier shall be
cut to their full depth so as to expose the fresh surface which shall be painted with a thin
surface coat of appropriate binder before the new mix is placed against it.

4-3.4 Finishing of Surface and Quality Control Works

The finishing of surface shall conform to the requirements of clause 5 -1. Control on the
quality of materials and works shall be exercised by the Engineer in accordance with clause 5
-2.

Technical Specifications : Quality Control for Road Works 67

 The bituminous macadam shall be provided final surfacing without any delay. If there is to
be any delay, the course shall be covered by a seal coat to the requirements of clause 4 -5
before allowing any traffic over it.

4-3.5 Arrangements of Traffic

The flow of traffic during construction shall be maintained as per clause G -12.

4-3.6 Measurements for Payment

Bituminous macadam shall be measured as finished work in cubic metres.

4-3.7 Rate

The contract unit rate for bituminous macadam shall be paid in full for carrying out the
required operations including full compensation for:
 making arrangements for traffic as per clause G -12 except for initial treatment to
shoulders and construction of diversions;
 preparation of base except laying of levelling course but including filling of pot-holes;
 providing all materials to be incorporated in the work including all royalties, fees, rents
and taxes where necessary and all leads;
 all labour, precautionary measures and other incidental required to complete the work as
per the Specifications; and
 carrying out the work in part widths, where directed.

4 -4 SURFACE DRESSING

4-4.1 Description

This work shall consist of the application of one or two coats of surface dressing. Surface
dressing with single coat is generally referred as Single Bitumen Surface Treatment or as
SBST. Similarly, Double Bitumen Surface Treatment (DBST) means surface dressing with
two coats.

The base for surface dressing shall be a water bound macadam or other similarly prepared
surface. The first layer of bituminous liquid (after heating up to an appropriate temperature)
shall be sprayed on the prepared base. Before the binder is set, the specified quantities of
stone chippings shall be spread to form the wearing surface and then rolled to the
requirements of these Specifications. If required, the second layer shall also be placed in a
similar manner.

4-4.2 Materials

4-4.2.1 Binder

The binder shall be straight run bitumen of a suitable grade as directed by the Engineer and
conforming to IS : 73.

Technical Specifications : Quality Control for Road Works 68

4-4.2.2 Stone Chippings

The stone chippings shall consist of fairly cubical fragments of clean, hard, tough and
durable stones of uniform quality. These shall be obtained by crushing stone, river gravel
(shingle) or other approved materials. Rounded gravel shall be used only when specifically
permitted by the Engineer. The chippings shall be free of elongated or flaky pieces, soft or
disintegrated stone, salt, alkali, organic matter, dust and adherent coatings. They shall
conform to the quality requirements of Table 4 -3(a), except that the Flakiness Index shall
be limited to a maximum of 30.

The size of stone chippings shall be in accordance with Table 4 -4(a).

Table 4 -4(a) : Size Requirements of Stone Chippings for Surface Dressing

S. Type of Construction Nominal Size of Specifications

No. Stone Chippings
1 Single coat surface 12 mm 100% passing through 20 mm
dressing or the first coat sieve and retained on 10 mm
of two coat surface sieve.
dressing
2 10 mm 100% passing through 12.5
Second coat of two coat mm sieve and retained on 6.3
surface dressing mm sieve.

4-4.2.3 Quantities of Materials

The quantities of materials used in bituminous surface dressing shall be as specified in Table
4 -4(b).

Table 4 -4(b) : Quantities of Materials required for 10 m2 of Road Surface for

Surface Dressing

S. Type of Construction Binder Stone Chippings

No.
1 Single coat surface dressing or 18 kg 0.15 m3
the first coat of two coat surface
dressing

2 Second coat of two coat surface 11 kg 0.10 m3

dressing or renewal coat

4-4.3 Construction Operations

4-4.3.1 Weather and Seasonal Limitations

The surface dressing work shall be carried out only when the atmospheric temperature in
shade is above 16°C. No bituminous material shall normally be applied when the surface of
cover material is damp, when the weather is foggy or rainy, or during dust storms.

Technical Specifications : Quality Control for Road Works 69

4-4.3.2 Preparation of Base

The base on which surface dressing is to be laid shall be prepared, shaped and conditioned to
the specified lines, grades and cross-sections in accordance with clause 4 -1 as directed by
the Engineer. Where the existing surface is bulged, it should be rectified.

The surface shall be thoroughly swept and brushed to remove dust and any other undesirable
matter before the spraying of binder. The cleaning shall be done first with hard wire-brushes
then with softer brushes and finally by blowing with sacks or gunny bags when necessary.

4-4.3.3 Application of Binder

Binder shall be heated to a temperature range of 163°-177°C and sprayed on dry surface in a
uniform manner with the help of sprayers. Excessive deposits of binder caused by stopping
or starting of the sprayer or through leakage or any other reason shall be suitably corrected
before the stone chippings are spread.

4-4.3.4 Application of Stone Chippings

Immediately after the application of binder, stone chippings in a dry and clean state shall be
spread uniformly on the surface manually so as to cover the surface completely. If necessary,
the surface shall be swept in order to ensure a uniform spread of chippings.

4-4.3.5 Rolling

Immediately after the application of cover material, the entire surface shall be rolled with a 8-
10 ton smooth wheeled roller. Rolling shall commence at the edges and progress towards the
centre except in super-elevated portions where it shall proceed from the inner edge to the
outer. Each pass of the roller shall uniformly overlap not less than one third of the track
made in the preceding pass. While rolling is in progress, additional chippings shall be spread
by hand in whatever quantities necessary to patch up the irregularities. Rolling shall continue
until all aggregate particles are firmly embedded in the binder and present a uniform closed
surface.

4-4.3.6 Application of Second Coat of Surface Dressing

Where surface dressing in two coats is specified, the second coat shall be applied
immediately after the laying of first coat. The construction operations for the second coat
shall be the same as described in clauses 4-4.3.3, 4-4.3.4 and 4-4.3.5.

4-4.4 Opening to Traffic

Traffic shall not be allowed to run on any newly dressed surfaces until the following day. In
special circumstances, however, the Engineer may open the road to traffic immediately after
rolling, but in such cases, its speed shall be limited to 16 kmph till the following day.

4-4.5 Finishing of Surface and Quality Control Works

Technical Specifications : Quality Control for Road Works 70

 The surface finish of construction shall conform to the requirements of clause 5 -1 of the
Specifications. Control on the quality of materials and work shall be exercised by the
Engineer in accordance with clause 5 -2 of the Specifications.
4-4.6 Measurements for Payment

Each coat of surface dressing shall be measured as finished work in square metres.

4-4.7 Rates

The contract unit rate for each coat of surface dressing shall be paid in full for carrying out
the required operations including full compensation for all components listed in clause 4-3.8.

4 -5 SEAL COAT

4-5.1 Description

The work of seal coat shall consist of application of a coating of sealing material over a
bituminous surface laid to specified levels, grade and camber. It shall be of two types as
specified below:
i. Type A - liquid seal coat comprising of an application of a layer of bituminous binder
followed by a cover of stone chippings.
ii. Type B - pre-mixed seal coat comprising of a thin application of fine aggregate pre-
mixed with bituminous binder.

4-5.2 Materials

The materials for seal coat shall be binder, stone chippings and fine aggregates.

4-5.2.1 Binder

The binder shall be bitumen of a suitable grade as directed by the Engineer and conforming
to the requirements of IS : 73, 217 or 454 as applicable or any other approved cutback.

The quantity of binder to be utilised, in terms of straight run bitumen shall be

 9.8 kg per 10 square metre area for Type A, and
 6.8 kg per 10 square metre area for Type B.

4-5.2.2 Stone Chippings for Type A Seal Coat

The stone chippings shall

 consist of angular fragments of clean, hard, tough and durable rock of uniform quality
throughout;
 be free of elongated or flaky pieces, soft or disintegrated stone, or organic matter; and
 be of 6 mm size defined as 100% passing through 10 mm sieve and retained on 2.36 mm
sieve.

The quantity used for spreading shall be 0.09 cubic metre per 10 square metre area. The
chippings shall satisfy the quality requirements spelled out in Table 4 -3(a) except the upper
limit for Flakiness Index which in this case shall be 30.

4-5.2.3 Fine Aggregates for Type B Seal Coat

Technical Specifications : Quality Control for Road Works 71

 The fine aggregates shall be sand or fine grit.
The fine aggregate of sand or grit shall
 consist of clean, hard, durable, un-coated dry particles;
 be free from dust, soft or flaky material, organic matter and other deleterious substances;
and
 pass 1.7 mm sieve and be retained on 180 micron sieve.

The quantity used for premixing shall be 0.06 cubic metre per 10 square metre area.

4-5.3 Construction Operations

4-5.3.1 Preparation of Base

The seal coat shall be applied immediately after the laying of bituminous course which is
required to be sealed. Before the application of seal coat material, the surface shall be
cleaned and made free of any dust or other extraneous matter.

4-5.3.2 Construction of Type A Seal Coat

The binder shall be heated in boilers of suitable design or alternately in an open mouthed
empty oil drums to the temperature (preferably, 163°-177°C) appropriate to the grade of
bitumen approved by the Engineer.

The seal coat shall be applied in accordance with the construction operations described in
clauses 4-4.3.3, 4-4.3.4 and 4-4.3.5.

4-5.3.3 Construction of Type B Seal Coat

Mixers of approved type shall be employed for mixing the aggregates with the bituminous
binder. In rural road construction, the hand mixing tray made out of metal sheets could be
used in place of mixer plants. In this case, an adequate number of labourers equipped with
shovels, rubber boots, gloves, safety hats, etc. shall be required in order to achieve the
requisite quality of mixing.

The binder shall be heated in boilers of suitable design to the temperature appropriate to the
grade of bitumen approved by the Engineer. Also, the aggregates shall be dry and suitably
heated to a temperature directed by the Engineer before the same are placed in the mixer.
Mixing of binder with aggregates to the specified proportions shall be continued till the
aggregates are thoroughly coated with the binder.

The mix shall be transported immediately from the mixing plant/site to the place of use and
spread uniformly on the bituminous surface to be sealed.

As soon as sufficient length has been covered with the pre-mixed material, the surface shall
be rolled with 6-9 ton smooth wheeled power rollers. Rolling shall be continued till the pre-
mixed material completely seals the voids in the bituminous course and a smooth uniform
surface is obtained.

4-5.4 Opening to Traffic

Technical Specifications : Quality Control for Road Works 72

 In the case of Type B seal coat, traffic may be allowed soon after final rolling when the
premixed material has cooled down to the surrounding temperature. However, as regard to
Type A seal coat, clause 4-4.4 shall apply.

4-5.5 Finishing of Surface and Quality Control Works

The surface finish of construction shall conform to the requirements of clause 5 -1. Control
on the quality of materials and works shall be exercised by the Engineer as per clause 5 -2.

4-5.6 Arrangements for Traffic

During the period of construction, flow of traffic shall be maintained as per clause G -12.

4-5.7 Measurements for Payment

Seal coat, Type A or B shall be measured as finished work in square metres.

4-5.8 Rate

The contract unit rate for seal coat, Type A or B shall be paid in full for carrying out the
required operations including full compensation for all components listed in clause 4-3.8.

4 -6 SUPPLY OF MINERAL AGGREGATES FOR PAVEMENT COURSES

4-6.1 General

These Specifications shall apply to works where it is intended only to collect, transport and
stack the mineral aggregates and mineral filler for use in pavement courses. The actual work
of laying the courses shall, however, be governed by the relevant sections of the
Specifications. The size and quantities of the aggregates to be supplied shall be selected by
the Engineer in such a manner that the intended supply should satisfy the grading
requirements of relevant courses set forth in these Specifications.

All the materials shall be procured from the approved sources and shall conform to the
physical requirements of individual items specified in the respective sections of these
Specifications.

4-6.2 Sizes of Mineral Aggregates

The mineral aggregates shall be designated by their standard sizes in the contract and shall
conform to the requirements set forth in Table 4 -6(a).

Table 4 -6(a) : Size Requirements for Mineral Aggregates

S. Standard Size of Designation of Sieve Designation of Sieve on

N Aggregate through which the which the Aggregate
o. Aggregate shall pass shall be retained
Entirely Entirely
Coarse Aggregates
1 90 mm 100 mm 80 mm

Technical Specifications : Quality Control for Road Works 73

 2 75 mm 100 mm 63 mm
3 63 mm 80 mm 50 mm
4 40 mm 50 mm 25 mm
5 25 mm 40 mm 20 mm

S. Standard Size of Designation of Sieve Designation of Sieve on

N Aggregate through which the which the Aggregate
o. Aggregate shall pass shall be retained
Entirely Entirely
Coarse Aggregates
6 20 mm 25 mm 12.5 mm
7 12 mm 20 mm 10 mm
8 10 mm 12.5 mm 6.3 mm
9 6 mm 10 mm 2.36 mm
Fine Aggregates
10 2 mm 4.75 mm 75 micron
11 500 micron 2.36 mm 150 micron
12 75 micron 150 micron -

4-6.3 Stacking

Only the aggregates satisfying the requirements of Specifications shall be transported to the
road side and stacked. Each size of aggregate shall be stacked separately. Similarly,
materials obtained from different sources shall be stacked separately.

The aggregates shall be stacked outside the roadway on a levelled ground or platform
prepared in advance for the purpose by the Contractor at his own cost. It shall be done in
such a manner that it facilitates for correct and easy measurement. Materials shall not be
stacked in locations liable to inundation or floods.

The dimensions of the stacks and their locations shall be as approved by the Engineer.
Where the material is improperly stacked, the Engineer shall have the right to order complete
re-stacking of the materials at the cost of the Contractor.

Mineral filler shall be supplied in dry state in bags or other suitable containers approved by
the Engineer and shall be protected from weather, dampness, etc. so as to prevent any
deterioration in quality.

4-6.4 Quality Control of Materials

The Engineer shall exercise control over the quality of materials so as to ascertain their
conformity with the requirements of Specifications. For this, he/she shall carry out necessary
tests for the specified properties. Testing shall be carried out to the following frequencies
and the Engineer shall have the right to modify these according to the needs.

1. Coarse and fine aggregates : one test for each specified property per 50 m3 of material.
2. Mineral filler : one test for each specified property for every 5 ton subject to a minimum
of one test for each consignment.

Technical Specifications : Quality Control for Road Works 74

 Materials not conforming to the requirements of Specifications shall not be brought to the
work site.

4-6.5 Measurements for Payment

Coarse and fine aggregates supplied at site of works shall be measured in cubic metres. The
actual volume of the aggregates to be paid shall be computed after deducting the following
percentages from the volume obtained from stack measurements.

Table 4 -6(b) : Percentage Reduction in Volume obtained from Stack

Measurements

S. Standard Size of Aggregates Percentage Reduction in Volume

No. obtained from Stack Measurements
1 75 mm and 63 mm 12.5%
2 40 mm and 25 mm 10%
3 20 mm, 12 mm, 10 mm and 6 mm 5%
4 Fine aggregates nil

Unless otherwise directed, measurements shall not be taken until sufficient materials for use
on the road have been collected and stacked. Immediately after measurement, the stacks shall
be marked by whitewash or other means as directed by the Engineer.

Mineral filler as delivered at site of works shall be measured in tonnes.

4-6.6 Rates

The contract unit rates for different sizes of coarse aggregate, fine aggregate and mineral
filler shall be paid in full for collecting, transporting and stacking or storing at site of works
including full compensation for:
 all royalties, fees, rents and taxes where necessary;
 all leads; and
 all labour, precautionary measures and other incidentals required
to complete the work as per the Specifications.

Technical Specifications : Quality Control for Road Works 75

5

Quality Control for Road

Works

Technical Specifications : Quality Control for Road Works 76

5 -1 CONTROL OF ALIGNMENT AND SURFACE REGULARITY

5-1.1 Description

All works performed shall conform to the lines, grades, cross-sections and dimensions shown
on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer subject to the permitted tolerances described
hereinafter.

5-1.2 Horizontal Alignments

Horizontal alignments shall be reckoned with respect to the centre line of the carriageway as
shown on the construction drawings.

The edges of the carriageway as constructed shall be conformed within a tolerance of 25
mm.

The corresponding tolerance for edges of roadway and lower layers of pavement shall be 40
mm.

5-1.3 Longitudinal Profile

The levels of the sub-grade and different pavement courses as constructed shall not vary from
those calculated with reference to the longitudinal profile and cross-sections of the road
shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer, beyond the tolerances mentioned
below:

 Sub-grade 25 mm
 Sub-base 20 mm
 Base course 15 mm
 Wearing course 10 mm

However, the negative tolerance for wearing course shall not be permitted in conjunction
with the positive tolerance for base course if the thickness of the wearing course is reduced
by more than 6 mm.

5-1.4 Surface Regularity of Sub-Grade and Pavement Courses

The surface regularity of completed sub-bases, base courses and wearing surfaces in the
longitudinal and transverse directions shall be within the tolerances indicated in Table 5 -1.

The longitudinal profile shall be checked with a 3 m long straight edge along the centre line
of the road.

The transverse profile shall be checked with a set of three camber boards kept at interval of
10 m.

Technical Specifications : Materials for Structures 77

 Table 5 -1 : Permitted Tolerances of Surface Regularity for Pavement Courses

S. Type of Construction Longitudinal Profile Cross Profile

No. with 3 metre Straight Edge
Maximum Maximum Number of Maximum
Permissib Undulations which Permissible
le exceed ( ) mm Variation from
Undulatio Permitted in any 300 specified Profile
n m Length under Camber
Template
mm no. mm
(18 (12 (10 (6)
) ) )
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 Earthen sub-grade 24 30 - - - 15
2 Granular/lime/cement/ 15 - 30 - - 12
stabilised sub-base
3 Water Bound Macadam 15 - 30 - - 12
with oversize metal (40-90
mm size)
4 Water Bound Macadam 12 - - 30 - 8
with normal size metal (20-
50 mm and 40-63 mm
size), Bituminous
Penetration Macadam or
built-up spray grout
5 Surface dressing* (two 12 - - 20 - 8
coat) over WBM (20-50
mm or 40-63 mm size
metal), Bituminous
Penetration Macadam or
built-up spray grout
6 Open graded premix 10 - - - 30 6
carpet, mix-seal surfacing
7 Bituminous macadam 10 - - - 20** 6
8 Semi-dense carpet 10 - - - 20** 6
9 Asphaltic Concrete 8 - - - 10** 4
Note : * For surface dressing in all other cases, the standards of surface smoothness will be the same as
those for the surface receiving the surface dressing.
** These are for machine laid surfaces. If laid manually, tolerance up to 50% above these values in
this column may be permitted on the approval of the Engineer. However, this relaxation does not
apply to the values of maximum undulation for longitudinal and cross profiles mentioned in
columns 3 and 8 on the table.
- Requirements of surface smoothness in respect of both the longitudinal and cross profiles should be
simultaneously satisfied.

5-1.5 Rectification

Where the surface irregularities of sub-grade and the various pavement courses fall outside
the specified tolerances, the Contractor (Users’ Group, in case of sub-grade) shall be liable to
rectify these in the manner described below and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

(i) Sub-grade : Where the surface is high, it shall be trimmed and sufficiently compacted.
Where the surface is low, the deficiency shall be corrected by adding fresh material.

Technical Specifications : Materials for Structures 78

 When adding, the degree of compaction and the type of material to be used shall conform
to the requirements of clause 2 -5.

(ii) Granular sub-base : It is same as in the case of sub-grade, except the fact that the degree
of compaction and the type of material to be used shall conform to the conditions of
clause 3 -1.

(iii) Water Bound Macadam base : Where the surface is high or low, the top 75 mm shall be
scarified, reshaped with added material as necessary and re-compacted as per clause 3 -2.
The area treated at a place shall not be less than 5 m long and 2 m wide.

(iv) Bituminous constructions : Such constructions, other than for the wearing course, all
depressions shall be rectified by adding fresh material and re-compacted as per the
Specifications. If the surface is high then the full depth of the layer shall be removed;
replaced with fresh material; and re-compacted as per the Specifications.

In bituminous construction for wearing course, the full depth of layer shall be removed;
replaced with fresh material; and re-compacted irrespective of the surface being high or
low.

In all cases of removal and replacement of bituminous layer, the area treated shall not be
less than 5 m long and 2 m wide.

5 -2 QUALITY CONTROL TESTS DURING CONSTRUCTION

5-2.1 General

The materials supplied and the works carried out by the Contractor/Users’ Group shall
conform to the Specifications prescribed in the preceding clauses.

To ensure the requisite quality of construction, all materials and works shall be subjected to
the following quality control tests which shall be carried out by the Engineer or any
designated person/institution. The given testing frequencies are the absolute minimum.
However, the Engineer shall have the full authority to carry out tests as frequently as he/she
may deem necessary to satisfy him/herself on the quality of materials and works.

Test procedures for the various quality control tests are indicated in the respective sections of
the Specifications or for certain tests within this section. Where no specific testing procedure
is mentioned, the tests shall be carried out as per the prevalent accepted engineering practices
or as directed by the Engineer.

5-2.2 Tests on Earthwork for Embankment Construction

5-2.2.1 Quality Control of Borrow Material

(i) Sand Content Test shall be carried out as per IS : 2720 (Part IV) or other equivalent
International Standards, at a frequency of 1-2 tests per 8000 m3 of soil.

(ii) Plasticity Test shall be carried out as per IS : 2720 (Part V) or other equivalent
International Standards, at a frequency of 1-2 tests per 8000 m3 of soil. Each soil type
shall be tested.

Technical Specifications : Materials for Structures 79

 (iii) Density Test shall be carried out as per IS : 2720 (Part VII) or other equivalent
International Standards, at a frequency of 1-2 tests per 8000 m3 of soil. Each soil type
shall be tested.

(iv) Deleterious (Undesirable Material) Content Test shall be carried out as per IS : 2720
(Part XXVII) or other equivalent International Standards, as and when required by the
Engineer.

(v) Moisture Content Test shall be carried out as per IS : 2720 (Part II) or other equivalent
International Standards, at a frequency of one test for every 250 m3 of soil.

(vi) CBR Test on materials (soaked/unsoaked samples) which are to be incorporated in the
sub-grade shall be carried out as per IS : 2720 (Part XVI) or other equivalent
International Standards, as and when required by the Engineer.

5-2.2.2 Quality Control of Compaction

Quality control shall be exercised by taking at least one set of measurements of density for
each 1000 m2 of compacted area, or closer as required to yield the minimum number of test
results for evaluating the day’s work on statistical basis. The density shall be determined in
accordance with IS : 2720 (Part XXVIII) or other equivalent International Standards. Test
locations shall be chosen only through random sampling techniques. Quality control shall
not be based on the result of any one test but shall be based on the mean value of 5-10 tests.
The number of tests in one set of measurements could be limited to 5, if the Engineer feels
that sufficient control over borrow material and the method of compaction is being exercised
to his/her satisfaction. If considerable variations are observed between individual density
results, the minimum number of tests in one set of measurements shall be increased to 10.
The acceptance of work shall be subjected to the condition that
 the mean dry density equals or exceeds the specified density and
 the standard deviation for any set of results is below 0.08 g/cm3.

However, for earthwork in shoulders and in top 0.5 m portion of the embankment (sub-
grade), at least one set of density measurements shall be taken for every 500 m2 of the
compacted area. In such cases, the number of tests in each set of measurements shall be at
least 10.

5-2.3 Tests on Sub-Bases and Bases (excluding bituminous macadam)

The tests and their frequencies for different types of bases and sub-bases shall be as given in
Table 5 -2(a). The evaluation of density results on quality control of compaction shall be in
accordance with clause 5-2.2.2.

Table 5 -2(a) : Control Tests and their Frequency for Sub-bases and Bases
(excluding bituminous macadam)

S. Types of Test Frequency

No Constructi
. on
1 Granular (i) Gradation 1 test per 200 m3
sub-base (ii) Atterberg limits 1 test per 200 m3

Technical Specifications : Materials for Structures 80

 (iii) Moisture content prior to 1 test per 250 m2
compaction
(iv) Density of compacted layer 1 test per 500 m2
(v) Deleterious materials As required.
2 Water Bound (i) Aggregate Impact Value 1 test per 200 m3 of aggregate
Macadam (ii) Grading 1 test per 100 m3 of aggregate
(iii) Flakiness Index 1 test per 200 m3 of aggregate
(iv) Atterberg limits of binding material 1 test per 25 m3 of binding material

5-2.4 Tests on Bituminous Constructions

The tests and their frequencies for tack coat, seal coat, single bitumen surface treatment
(SBST), double bitumen surface treatment (DBST) and bituminous macadam shall be as
given in Table 5 -2(b).

Table 5 -2(b) : Control Tests and their Frequencies for Bituminous

Constructions

S. Type of Test Frequency

No. Construction
1 Tack Coat (i) Quality of binder As required.
(ii) Binder temperature for At regular close intervals.
application
(iii) Rate of spread of Two tests per day.
binder
2 Seal Coat; Single (i) Quality of binder As required.
Bitumen
Surface Treatment (ii) Aggregate Impact One test per 50 m3 of aggregate
(SBST) Value
and Double Bitumen (iii) Flakiness Index One test per 50 m3 of aggregate
Surface Treatment (iv) Stripping Value of Initially, one set of 3
(DBST) Aggregates representative specimens for
each source of supply.
Subsequently, when warranted
by changes in the quality of
aggregates.
(v) Water absorption of - do -
aggregates
(vi) Grading of aggregates One test per 25 m3 of aggregate
(vii) Temperature of binder At regular close intervals.
at application
(viii) Rate of spread of One test per 500 m3 of aggregate
materials
3 Bituminous Macadam (i) Quality of binder As required.
(ii) Aggregate Impact One test per 50-100 m3 of
Value aggregate
(iii) Flakiness Index - do -
(iv) Stripping Value and Initially, one set of 3
water absorption of representative specimens for
aggregates each source of supply.
Subsequently, when warranted
by changes in the quality of
aggregates.
(v) Grading of aggregates Two tests per day per plant both

Technical Specifications : Materials for Structures 81

 on individual constituents and
mixed aggregates from the dryer.
(vi) Binding content (vide Periodic subject to minimum of
ASTM : D-2172) two tests per day per plant.
(vii) Control of temperature At regular close intervals.
of binder and
aggregate for mixing
and of the mix at the
time of laying and
rolling
(viii) Rate of spread of Regular control through checks
mixed material on layer thickness.

Materials
for Structures

Technical Specifications : Materials for Structures 82

6 -1 GENERAL

All materials to be used in the work shall be in conformity with the requirements laid down
in this section. Any special material which is not covered in this section shall either be in
accordance with the defined Specifications given in the contract or be approved by the
Engineer.

6 -2 BRICKS

Minimum compressive strength of burnt clay bricks shall not be less than 8.4 N/mm2 for any
individual brick and 10.5 N/mm2 for an average of 5 specimens. The size of bricks shall be
according to the local practice with a tolerance of 10%.

6 -3 CAST IRON

Cast iron manufactured in India shall conform to IS : 210. Other qualities of cast iron shall
conform to the standardisation equivalent to IS : 210 until Nepal’s Standards are in place.

6 -4 CEMENT

Cement to be used shall conform to the requirements of

(i) IS : 269 for ordinary and rapid hardening Portland cement
(ii) IS : 455 for Portland blast furnace slag cement
(iii) IS : 3466 for masonry cement (for use in mortars for masonry only)
until similar Nepal’s Standards are in place.

6 -5 COARSE AGGREGATE

Coarse aggregate shall conform to the requirements of IS : 383 until similar Nepal’s
Standards are in place.

6 -6 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE

Reinforced cement concrete pipes for road structures shall be of NP3 type conforming to the
requirements of IS : 458 until similar Nepal’s Standards are in place.

6 -7 SAND

Sand to be used shall conform to the requirements of

(i) IS : 2116 for masonry work
(ii) IS : 383 for cement concrete work
until similar Nepal’s Standards are in place.

Technical Specifications : Brick Work for Structures 83

6 -8 STEEL

6-8.1 High Tensile Steel for Pre-stressing

Steel for pre-stressing shall conform to the requirements of IS : 1785 (Part I) until similar
Nepal’s Standards are in place.

6-8.2 Mild Steel Reinforcement

Mild steel reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of

(i) IS : 432 for Mild Steel Grade I or medium tensile steel bars
(ii) IS : 1139 for high yield strength deformed (hot rolled) bars
(iii) IS : 1786 for high yield strength deformed (cold twisted) bars
until similar Nepal’s Standards are in place.

6-8.3 Rivet Steel

All rivets and rivet bars shall conform to IS : 1148 or IS : 1149, as applicable.

6-8.4 Structural Steel

All structural steel shall conform to the requirements of

(i) IS : 226 for mild steel
(ii) IS : 961 for high tensile steel
(iii) IS : 2062 for fusion welding quality steel
until similar Nepal’s Standards are in place.

6 -9 WATER

Water shall be clean and free from injurious amount of deleterious materials. Normally,
potable water may be considered satisfactory for mixing and curing concrete and masonry
work. As a guide, the following concentrations represent the maximum permissible values of
deleterious materials.
(i) Not more than 2 ml of 0.1normal NaOH shall be required to neutralise 200 ml of the
sample.
(ii) Not more than 10 ml of 0.1 normal HCl shall be required to neutralise 200 ml of the
sample.
(iii) Percentage of solids shall not exceed the following:
 Organic 0.02%
 Inorganic 0.03%
 Sulphates 0.05%
 Alkali-chlorides0.10%

6 -10 TIMBER

The timber used for structural purposes shall conform to IS : 883 until similar Nepal’s
Standards are in place.

Technical Specifications : Brick Work for Structures 84

6 -11 GABION WIRE

Gabion wire used for structural purposes shall confirm to NS 163-2045 or equivalent.

6 -12 STORAGE OF MATERIALS

6-12.1 General

All materials shall be stored

 to prevent their deterioration or intrusion of foreign matter and
 to ensure the preservation of their quality and fitness for the work.

Any material which has deteriorated or has been damaged or is otherwise considered
defective by the Engineer shall not be used in the works.

6-12.2 Bricks

Bricks when unloading

 shall not be dumped at site.
 shall be stacked orderly in regular tiers.

Supply of bricks to construction works shall be so arranged that the stock at site is always
enough for two days’ work. Bricks selected for use in different situations shall be stacked
separately.

6-12.3 Cement

Cement shall be stored above the ground level in perfectly dry and water tight sheds and shall
be stacked not more than 8 bags in a column. Wherever bulk storage containers are used,
their capacity should be sufficient to cater to the requirements at site. These containers
should be cleaned at least once every 3 to 4 months. Cement more than 3 to 4 months old
shall invariably be tested to ascertain that it satisfies the acceptability requirements.

6-12.4 Aggregates

The aggregates shall be stored in such a way as to prevent admixture of foreign materials.
Different sizes of fine or coarse aggregates shall be stored in separate stock piles sufficiently
away from each other in order to prevent any intermixing.

6-12.5 Mild Steel

Mild steel rods or coils shall be stored in such a way as to avoid distortion and to prevent
deterioration by corrosion. When directed, the steel reinforcement bars shall be given a
cement wash before stacking in order to prevent forming of scale and rust.

6-12.6 High Tensile Steel for Pre-stressing

All high tensile steel for pre-stressing work shall be stored about 30 cm above the ground in a
suitably covered and closed space to protect it from dampness. It shall also be invariably
wrapped in gunny clothes, tar papers or any other suitable material. If it is to be stored for a

Technical Specifications : Brick Work for Structures 85

 short period (say 2 to 3 months) in an open area at the site, it must be properly covered.
Effective protection of the pre-stressing steel against corrosion shall be ensured. The
Engineer could, however, conduct necessary tests in order to confirm the physical
characteristics prior to its usage.

Brick Work
for Structures

Technical Specifications : Brick Work for Structures 86

7 -1 MORTARS

While preparing mortar, cement, sand and water shall be mixed in proportion as specified in
the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The ingredients of the mix shall be proportioned
as follows:
 Cement by weight taking its unit weight as 1440 kg per cubic metre;
 Sand by volume after making due allowances for bulking; and
 Water in required quantity to make the mix workable.

The mixing shall be done intimately in a mechanical mixer unless hand-mixing is specifically
permitted by the Engineer. If hand-mixing is done, the operation shall be carried out on a
clean watertight platform and while mixing
 cement and sand be first mixed dry in the required proportion to obtain a uniform colour
and
 the mortar shall be mixed for at least two minutes after the addition of water.

If the cement mortar has stiffened because of evaporation of water then it shall be re-
tempered by adding water as frequently as needed to restore the requisite consistency.
However, such re-tempering shall be permitted only for a period of thirty minutes counting
from the time of addition of water during the initial mixing.

Required tests to determine compressive strength of the mortar, consistency of the mortar and
its water retentiveness shall be carried out in accordance with IS : 2250 until similar Nepal’s
Standards are in place. The frequency of testing shall be one cube for every 2 cubic metre of
mortar prepared subject to a minimum of 3 cubes for a day’s work.

7 -2 SOAKING OF BRICKS

Bricks shall be soaked in water for a minimum of one hour before their use. Soaked bricks
shall be taken out from the soaking tank sufficiently in advance so that the skin of bricks
would be dry at the time of laying. Such soaked bricks shall be stacked on a clean place
where they will not be spoiled by dirt, earth, etc.

7 -3 LAYING OF BRICKS

All bricks shall be laid in an appropriate bond and such work shall be even and true to line,
plumb and level. All joints shall be kept accurately. The bricks used on the face shall be of
complete ones with uniform size and true rectangular face.

Bricks shall be laid with frogs up, if any, on a full bed of mortar. When laying, bricks shall
be slightly pressed so that the mortar could get into the surface pores of bricks to ensure
proper adhesion. All joints shall be properly flushed and packed with mortar so that no
hollow spaces are left.

When laying bricks in foundation, a layer of not less than 12 mm of mortar shall be spread
over the base on which the brick work will be laid even. Immediately after the placing of
mortar, the first layer of bricks shall be laid.

The brick work shall be built in uniform layers. All corners and other advanced work shall
be raked back. Brick work shall be done true to plumb or in specified batter. To avoid

Technical Specifications : Stone Masonry for Structures 87

 unequal settlement and improper jointing during construction, no part of the brick work shall
rise more than one metre above the general construction level planned for the day’s work.
Toothing may be done where future extension is contemplated but shall be used as an
alternative to raking back.

7 -4 JOINTS

The thickness of joints shall not exceed 10 mm.

7 -5 JOINTING WITH EXISTING STRUCTURES

When fresh masonry is to be placed against the existing surface of structures, the surfaces
shall be cleaned of all loose materials; roughened; and wetted as directed by the Engineer in
order to ensure an effective bond with the new work.

7 -6 CURING

Green work shall be protected from rain by suitable covering. Masonry work in cement or
composite mortar shall be kept constantly moist on all faces for a minimum period of seven
days. The top of the masonry work shall be left flooded with water at the close of each day’s
work. During hot weather, all finished or partly completed work shall be covered or/and
wetted in order to prevent any rapid drying of brick work.

7 -7 SCAFFOLDING

The scaffolding shall be sound and strong enough to stand for all loads which might come on
it. The holes which are created in masonry to provide resting space for horizontal members
shall not be left in masonry under one metre in width or immediately near the skew backs of
arches. Such holes shall be filled and made good as quickly as possible.

7 -8 CONDITION OF EQUIPMENT

All equipment used for mixing mortar and for transporting of mortar and bricks shall be
cleaned and kept free from set mortar, dirt or injurious foreign substances.

7 -9 FINISHING OF SURFACES

7-9.1 General

The surfaces can be finished by ‘Jointing’ or by ‘Pointing’ or by ‘Plastering’, as specified in

the drawings. For a surface which is subsequently to be plastered or pointed, the joints shall
be squarely raked out to a depth of 15 mm when the mortar remains green. The raked joints
shall be well brushed to remove dust and loose particles. The surface shall be thoroughly
washed with water; cleaned and wetted prior to any of the above operations. The mortar for
finishing work shall be prepared as per clause 7 -1.

Technical Specifications : Stone Masonry for Structures 88

7-9.2 Jointing

In jointing, the face joints of the mortar shall be worked out when mortar is still green. This
allows the finished surface to be flushed with the face of the brick work. The faces of brick
work shall be cleaned by removing any splashes of mortar set during the course of raising the
brick work.

7-9.3 Pointing

First of all, the mortar shall be filled and pressed into the raked out joints. The pointing shall
then be finished to a proper type given on the drawings. If the type of pointing is not
specified in the drawings, it should be ruled pointing.

For ruled pointing, the mortar shall be filled in to the joints; pressed; and finished off level
with the edges of the bricks. When the mortar remains as green, it shall then be ruled along
the centre with a half round tool of such width as may be specified by the Engineer. The
superfluous mortar shall then be cut off from the edges of the lines. Finally, the surface of
masonry shall also be cleaned of all mortar.

7-9.4 Plastering

Plastering work shall start from the top and proceed downwards. All putlog holes shall be
properly filled well in advance of the plastering as soon as the scaffolding is being removed.
Wooden screeds having the size of 75 mm wide and the thickness of plaster shall be fixed
vertically 2.5 m to 4 m apart to act as gauges and guides in applying the plaster. The mortar
shall be laid on the wall between the screeds using the plaster’s float. The layer shall be
pressed hard enough to make the raked joints filled properly with mortar. The plaster shall
then be finished off with a wooden straight edge reaching across the screeds. The straight
edge shall be worked on the screeds with a small upward and sideways motion for a length of
50 mm or 75 mm at a time. Finally, the surface shall be finished off with a plaster’s wooden
float. Metal floats shall not be permitted in this regard.

When recommencing plastering beyond the work suspended earlier, the edges of the old
plaster shall be scraped, cleaned and wetted before the plaster is applied to the adjacent areas.

No portion of the surface shall be left out initially to be patched up later on.

The plaster shall be finished to a true and plumb surface and to the proper degree of
smoothness as required by the Engineer.

The average thickness of plaster shall not be less than the specified thickness. The minimum
thickness over any portion of the surface shall not be less than the specified thickness by
more than 3 mm.

Any cracks which appear in the surface and all portions which sound hollow when tapped or
are found to be soft or otherwise defective, shall be cut out in rectangular shapes and re-done
as directed by the Engineer.

7-9.5 Curing of Finishes

Technical Specifications : Stone Masonry for Structures 89

 Curing shall be started as soon as the mortar used for finishing has hardened sufficiently.
The plaster shall not be damaged when curing by water.
The plastering shall be kept wet for a period of at least 7 days. During this period, it shall be
suitably protected from all damages.

7-9.6 Scaffolding for Finishes

The scaffolding for the work shall be provided as stages or platforms erected independently
to the structure.

7 -10 WEEP HOLES

In case of abutments, wing walls and retaining walls, weep holes as shown on the drawings or
directed by the Engineer shall be provided in the masonry to drain out the seepage from back
filling. Weep holes are provided to release the pore water pressures, built up in back filled
earth, which may cause damages to the structure.

Weep holes shall generally be of rectangular shape having dimensions of 8 cm wide x 15 cm

high or of circular shape having a diameter of 15 cm. They shall extend through the full
width of the masonry with a slope of 1:20 (0.05) towards the draining face.

The spacing of weep holes shall be generally 1 m in either direction as shown on the
drawings with the lowest one at about 15 cm above the low water level or ground level
whichever is higher. For special cases, the spacing of weep holes shall be determined by the
Engineer at site.

7 -11 ARCHITECTURAL COPING FOR WING/RETURN/PARAPET WALLS

This work shall consist of providing an architectural coping along the top of
wing/return/parapet walls. The material used in coping work shall be cement mortar of 1:4
cement-sand ratio prepared as per clause 7 -1.

The cement mortar shall be laid evenly to an average thickness of 15 mm to the full width of
the wall top and in continuation to this, a band of 15 mm thick and 15 cm deep shall be
projected out of the mortar along the top outer face of the walls.

7 -12 MEASUREMENTS FOR PAYMENT

 All brick works shall be measured in cubic metres.

 In arches, the length of arch shall be measured as the mean length between the extrados
and intrados.

 The work of plastering and pointing shall be measured in square metres of the surface
treated.

 Architectural coping shall be measured in linear metres.

Technical Specifications : Stone Masonry for Structures 90

7 -13 RATE

7-13.1 Brickwork

The contract unit rate for brick work shall be paid in full for all necessary operations
including full compensation for all labour, materials, scaffolding and other incidentals
required to complete the work as per the Specifications. The rate shall also include full
compensation for using specially moulded bricks on the face of walls with batter and
provision of weep holes.

7-13.2 Plastering

The contract unit rate for plastering shall be paid in full for all necessary operations including
full compensation for all labour, materials, scaffolding and other incidentals required to
complete the work as per the Specifications.

7-13.3 Pointing

The contract unit rate for pointing shall be paid in full for all necessary operations such as
erecting and removal of scaffolding, raking out joints, cleaning, wetting, filling with mortar,
trowelling, pointing, curing, etc. including full compensation for all labour, materials and
other incidentals required to complete the work as per the Specifications.

7-13.4 Architectural Coping

The contract unit rate for architectural coping shall be paid in full for all necessary operations
including full compensation for all labour, materials and other incidentals required to
complete the work as per the Specifications.

Technical Specifications : Stone Masonry for Structures 91

8

Stone Masonry for

Structures

Technical Specifications : Stone Masonry for Structures 92

8 -1 MATERIALS

Stone shall be of the type specified. It shall be hard, sound, free from cracks, free from decay
and weathering and shall be freshly quarried from an approved quarry. Stones with round
surface shall not be used.

The stones when immersed in water for 24 hours shall not absorb water by more than 5% of
their dry weight when tested in accordance with IS : 1124.

The length of stone shall not exceed 3 times of its height. The breadth of stone at base shall
be neither greater than three fourths of the thickness of wall nor less than 15 cm.

Other materials used in stone masonry shall conform to the requirements given in Section 6
of the Specifications.

Mortar used in stone masonry shall conform to the requirements specified in clause 7 -1.

8 -2 TYPE OF MASONRY

The type of masonry used for structures shall be random masonry (coursed or un-coursed) or
coursed rubble masonry (First or Second sort). The actual type of masonry used for different
parts of structures shall be specified in the drawings. If specified in the drawings, ashlar
masonry shall be used for facing work.

8 -3 CONSTRUCTION OPERATION

8-3.1 General Requirements

The dressing of stone shall be as specified for individual type of masonry work. It shall also
conform to the general requirements for dressing of stone covered in IS : 1129 until similar
Nepal’s Standards are in place. Other specific requirements are covered separately with
respect to various types of rubble stone work.

Stone shall be sufficiently wetted before laying in order to prevent any absorption of water
from the mortar. The bed for each layer of stones shall be cleaned, wetted and covered with a
layer of fresh mortar. All stones shall be laid full in mortar both in bed and in vertical joints
and settled carefully in place with a wooden mallet immediately after placing so that they are
solidly bedded before the mortar is set. Clean chips and spalls shall be wedged into the
mortar joints and beds wherever necessary, to avoid thick beds or joints of mortar. Whenever
foundation masonry is laid directly on the rock, the face stones of the first course shall be
dressed to fit into the rocks snugly when pressed down in the mortar bedding over the rock.
No dry or hollow space shall be left any where in the masonry. Each stone shall have all the
embedded faces completely covered with mortar.

Courses of the masonry shall ordinarily be pre-determined. They shall generally be of the
same height. Where there are variations in the height of courses, larger courses shall be
placed at the lower levels with height of courses decreasing gradually towards the top.

Vertical joints shall be staggered as far as possible.

Technical Specifications : Formwork and Surface Finish for Structures 93

 All necessary chases for joggles, dowels and cramps shall be formed in the stones
beforehand. Sufficient transverse bond shall be provided by the use of bond stones extending
from the front to the back of the masonry. In case of thick walls, bond stones shall overlap in
their arrangement. Bell shaped bond stones or headers shall not be used.

At all angular junctions, stones at each alternate course shall be well bonded into the
respective course of the adjacent wall. As far as possible, all connected masonry in the
structure shall be carried out at one uniform level throughout. When breaks are unavoidable,
the masonry shall be raked in sufficient long steps to facilitate proper jointing of new work
with the old. The stepping of raking shall not be more than 45 0 with the horizontal. Wing
walls, abutments and piers, etc. shall be carried out true to the plumb or to the specified
batter.

Face work and hearting shall be brought up evenly. The top of each course, however, shall
not be levelled up by use of flat chips.

8-3.2 Random Masonry (Coursed and Un-coursed)

8-3.2.1 Dressing

Stone shall be hammer dressed on the face, sides and beds in order to bring it in contact with
adjacent stones. The bushing on the face shall not be more than 4 cm on exposed face.

8-3.2.2 Insertion of Chips

Chips and spalls of stone may be used wherever necessary to avoid thick mortar beds and
joints. It shall be ensured that no hollow space is left anywhere in the masonry. The chips
shall not be used below hearting stones as an attempt to bring them up to the level of face
stones. Use of chips shall be limited to the filling of interstices between the adjacent stones
during the process of hearting. However, they shall not exceed 20% of the quantity of stone
masonry.

8-3.2.3 Hearting Stones

The hearting or interior filling of wall face shall consist of rubble stones not less than 15 cm
in any direction. They shall be carefully laid; hammered down with wooden mallet into
position; and solidly bedded in mortar. The hearting stones should be laid such that the
stones are nearly level with facing and backing stones.

8-3.2.4 Bond Stones

Through bond stones shall be provided in masonry up to 60 cm thickness. In case of masonry

having thickness of above 60 cm, a set of two or more bond stones which overlap by at least
15 cm shall be provided along a line from face to back. In case of highly absorbent types of
stones (porous limestone and sandstone), the bond stone shall extend only about two-third
into the wall, as through stones may give rise to penetration of dampness. Therefore, a set of
two or more bond stones which overlap by at least 15 cm shall be provided for all thickness
of such masonry. One bond stone or a set of bond stones shall be provided for every 0.50
square metres of the masonry surface.

Technical Specifications : Formwork and Surface Finish for Structures 94

8-3.2.5 Quoin Stone

Quoin stone is a specially selected stone which shall be neatly dressed to form an internal
angle in masonry work. Its size shall not be smaller than 0.03 cubic metre in volume.

8-3.2.6 Plum Stone

The plum stones are selected long stones which shall be embedded vertically in the interior of
masonry in order to form a bond between successive courses. It shall be provided at interval
of about 90 cm.

8-3.2.7 Laying

The masonry shall be laid with or without courses as specified. The quoins shall be laid as
header and stretcher, alternately. Every stone shall be fitted to the adjacent stone in order to
form neat and close joint. Face stone shall extend and bond well in the back. This shall be
arranged to break joints, as much as possible, and to avoid long vertical lines of joints.

8-3.2.8 Joints

The face joints shall not be more than 20 mm thick, but shall be sufficiently thick to prevent
stone-to-stone contact and shall be completely filled with mortar.

8-3.3 Dry Rubble Masonry for Retaining Walls

This work shall conform to clause 8-3.2 of Random Masonry (Un-coursed) except that
i. the masonry shall be dry without mortar;
ii. the spaces between large stones shall be filled with spalls as tightly as possible;
iii. the foundations shall be excavated at right angle to the face batter (not horizontally).
Similarly, beds of the stones shall also be laid at right angle to the face batter.

8-3.4 Square Rubble-Coursed Rubble Masonry (First sort)

8-3.4.1 Dressing

Face stones shall be hammer dressed on all beds and joints in order to give them rectangular
shape as much as possible. The face stone shall be square on all joints and beds. The bed
joints shall be chisel drafted for at least 8 cm back from the face and for at least 4 cm for the
side joints. No portion of the dressed surface shall show a gap of more than 6 mm depth
from the straight edge placed on it. The remaining unexposed portion of the stone shall not
project beyond the bed and side joints. The requirements regarding bushing shall be the same
as for random rubble masonry.

8-3.4.2 Hearting Stone

The hearting or interior filling of the wall shall consist of flat bedded stone carefully laid on
their proper beds in mortar. The use of chips shall be limited to the filling of interstices
between the adjacent stones during the process of hearting. However, they shall not exceed
10% of the quantity of masonry. While using chips, it shall be ensured that no hollow spaces
are left anywhere in the masonry.

Technical Specifications : Formwork and Surface Finish for Structures 95

8-3.4.3 Bond Stones

The requirements regarding through or bond stones shall be the same as for random rubble
masonry but, these shall be provided at a clear distance of 1.5-1.8 m apart in every course.

8-3.4.4 Quoin Stone

The quoins which are of the same height as the course shall be formed as header having a
length of not less than 45 cm. They shall be laid length-wise alternately along each face,
square in their beds, which shall be fairly dressed to a depth of at least 10 cm.

8-3.4.5 Face Stones

Face stone shall tail into the work for not less than their heights. Furthermore, at least one-
third of the face stones shall tail into the work for a length not less than twice their height.
These shall be laid headers and stretchers, alternately.

8-3.4.6 Laying

The stones shall be laid on horizontal courses and all vertical joints shall be truly vertical.
The quoin stones shall be laid stretchers and headers, alternately. These shall be laid square
on their beds which shall be rough chisel dressed to a depth of at least 10 cm.

8-3.4.7 Joints

The face joints shall not be more than 10 mm thick but shall be sufficiently thick to prevent
stone to stone contact. Such joints shall be completely filled with mortar.

8-3.5 Square Rubble-Coursed Rubble Masonry (Second sort)

8-3.5.1 General

All the requirements are the same as of Coursed Rubble Masonry (First sort) except that no
portion of dressed surface joints shall show a gap of more than 10 mm depth from a straight
edge placed on it. Use of chips in the process of hearting shall not exceed 15% of the
quantity of stone masonry.

8-3.5.2 Joints

The face joints shall not be more than 20 mm thick but shall be sufficiently thick to prevent
stone to stone contact. Such joints shall be completely filled with mortar.

8-3.6 Ashlar Masonry (Plain Ashlar)

8-3.6.1 Dressing

Every stone shall be cut to the required size and shape, and chisel dressed on all beds and
joints in order to be free from bushing. Dressed surface shall not show a gap of more than 3
mm depth from straight edge placed on it. The exposed faces and joints shall be fine tooled
so that a straight edge can be laid along the face of the stone in contact with every point. All
visible angles and edges shall be true and square and free from chippings. The corner stones
(quoins) shall be dressed square and the corner shall be straight and vertical.

Technical Specifications : Formwork and Surface Finish for Structures 96

8-3.6.2 Bond Stones

Through bond stones shall be provided in masonry up to 60 cm thick. In case of masonry

above 60 cm in thickness, a set of two or more stones which overlap by at least 15 cm shall
be provided in a line from face to back. In case of highly absorbent type of stones (porous
lime stone and sandstone), the bond stone shall extend about two third into the wall, as
through stones may give rise to penetration of dampness. Hence, for all thickness of such
walls, a set of two or more bond stones which overlap by at least 15 cm shall be provided.
Each bond stone or a set of bond stones shall be provided at a clear distance of 1.5-1.8 m
apart in every course.

8-3.6.3 Laying

The face stones shall be laid header and stretcher, alternately. The headers are so arranged to
be positioned approximately at the middle of stretcher above and below. Stones shall be laid
in regular courses of not less than 30 cm in height. All courses shall be of the same height,
unless otherwise specified. No stone shall be less in breadth than its height or less in length
than twice its height, unless otherwise specified.

8-3.6.4 Joints

All joints shall be full of mortar. The thickness of any joint shall not be less than 3 mm.
Face joints shall be uniform throughout and should have a uniform grove of 20 mm depth
which is made with the help of a stone plate during the progress of work.

8-3.7 Pointing

Pointing shall be carried out in cement mortar not leaner than 1:3 (cement : sand) and shall
conform to clause 7-9.3. The thickness of joints shall not exceed what is prescribed for each
type of masonry.

8-3.8 Curing

Curing shall conform to clauses 7 -6 and 7-9.5.

8-3.9 Scaffolding

For scaffolding, clause 7 -7 shall apply.

8-3.10 Weep Holes

For weep holes in stone masonry, the Specifications given in clause 7 -10 shall apply except
for the following:
i. The height of the weep holes shall be the same as the height of the course in which they
are formed.
ii. The sides and bottom of the weep holes in the interior shall be made up with stones
having fairly plain surface. The channel should then be formed by keeping stones having
not less than 15 cm thickness as a slab over the side stones. These slab stones shall have
a bearing of not less than 15 cm on each side.

8-3.11 Jointing with Existing Structures

Technical Specifications : Formwork and Surface Finish for Structures 97

 For jointing with existing structures, the Specifications given under clause 7 -5 shall apply.

8-3.12 Architectural Coping for Wing/Return/Parapet Walls

Architectural coping for wing/return/parapet walls shall conform to clause 7 -11.

8 -4 MEASUREMENTS FOR PAYMENT

 Stone masonry shall be measured in cubic metres.

 In arches, the length of arch shall be measured as the mean length between the extrados
and intrados.

 The work of pointing shall be measured in square metres of the surface treated.

 Architectural coping shall be measured in linear metres.

8 -5 RATES

The contract unit rate for stone masonry work shall include the cost of all labour, materials,
scaffolding and other incidentals required to complete the work as per the Specifications.
The rate shall also include full compensation for using specially dressed stones on the face of
walls with batter and provision of weep holes.

The contract unit rate for pointing shall be paid in full for all necessary operations such as
erecting and removal of scaffolding, raking out joints, cleaning, wetting, filling with mortar,
trowelling, pointing, curing, etc. including full compensation for all labour, materials and
other incidentals required to complete the work as per the Specifications.

The contract unit rate for architectural coping shall be paid in full for all necessary operations
including full compensation for all labour, materials and other incidentals required to
complete the work as per the Specifications.

Formwork and Surface

Finish
for Structures

Technical Specifications : Formwork and Surface Finish for Structures 98

9 -1 GENERAL

Formwork shall include all temporary or permanent forms required for forming the concrete
together with all temporary construction required for their support.

9 -2 CONSTRUCTION OPERATION

Forms for concrete shall be constructed of metal or timber, suitably lined and be of
substantial and rigid construction true to shape and dimensions shown on the drawings.
Where metal forms are used, all bolts and rivets shall be of countersunk and well ground to
provide a smooth and plane surface. Where timber is used, it shall be well seasoned and be
free from loose knots, projecting nails, splits or other defects that may mar the cement
surface of concrete. For exposed concrete faces, timber for shuttering shall be wrought on all
faces in contact with concrete.

Forms shall be mortar-tight and shall be made sufficiently rigid by the use of ties and
bracings to prevent any displacement or sagging between supports. They shall be strong
enough to withstand all pressures, ramming and vibration without any occurrence of
deflection during and after the placement of concrete. Wherever required, screw jacks or
hard wood wedges shall be provided to check any incumbent settlement in the formwork.

Suitable camber shall be provided in horizontal members of structure, specially in long spans
to counteract the effects of any deflection. The formworks shall be fixed in a manner to
ensure the formation of such camber.

Forms shall be so constructed as to be removable in sections in the desired sequence without

damaging the surface of concrete or disturbing other sections of the formwork.

Unless otherwise specified or directed, chanfers or fillets having the size of 25 mm x 25 mm

shall be provided at all angles of the formwork in order to avoid sharp corners.

9 -3 FORMED SURFACES AND FINISH

The formwork shall be lined with a material approved by the Engineer in order to provide a
smooth finish of uniform texture and appearance. This material shall leave no stain on the
concrete. The lining material shall be joined and fixed to the formwork in such a manner that
no blemishes will be left with the concrete. It shall be of the same type and obtained from
only one source throughout the construction of any structure. The Contractor shall make
good any imperfections in the resulting finish as required by the Engineer. Internal ties and
embedded metal parts will be allowed only with the specific approval of the Engineer.

9 -4 PREPARATION OF FORMWORK BEFORE CONCRETING

The inside surfaces of forms shall, except in the case of permanent formwork or where
otherwise agreed by the Engineer, be coated with an approved material to prevent adhesion of
concrete to the formwork. Release agents shall be applied strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions and shall not be allowed to come in to contact with any
reinforcement or pre-stressing tendon or anchorage. Different release agents shall not be
used in formwork for concrete which will be visible in the finished work.

Technical Specifications : Steel Reinforcement for Structures 99

 Special measures shall be taken to ensure that the formwork does not hinder the shrinkage of
concrete, because without this, cracking could occur before the formwork is removed.
Wherever applicable, arrangements must be made to ensure that the formwork does not
restrain the shortening and hogging of the beams or slabs during tensioning of the tendons.
The formwork should take due account of the calculated amount of positive or negative
camber in order to ensure the correct final shape of the structures, having regard to the
deformation of false work, scaffolding or propping and instantaneous or deferred deformation
due to various causes affecting pre-stress structures.

Where there are re-entrant angles in the concrete sections, the formwork should be removed
as soon as possible after the concrete has set in order to avoid cracking due to shrinkage of
concrete.

Formwork shall be tight enough to prevent any appreciable loss of cement during vibrations.
Suitable tolerances should be provided in the formwork. Immediately before concreting, all
forms shall be thoroughly cleaned.

Contractor shall give due notice to the Engineer before placing any concrete in the forms to
enable him to inspect and accept the false work and forms as to their strength, alignment and
general fitness. But such inspections shall not relieve the Contractor of his/her responsibility
for safety of men, machinery, materials and for results obtained.

9 -5 REMOVAL OF FORMWORK

The Engineer shall be informed in advance by the Contractor of his/her intention to remove
any formwork. While fixing the time for removal of formwork, due consideration shall be
given to the local conditions, character of the structure, weather and other conditions that
influence the setting of concrete and of the materials used in the mix.

The period shall be suitably increased in case of temperatures lower than 23 0C and for any
other conditions tending to delay the setting of concrete.

Where field operations are controlled by strength tests of concrete, the removal of load-
supporting or soffit forms may commence when concrete has attained strength equal to at
least twice the stress to which the concrete will be subjected at the time of removing props
including the effect of any further addition of loads. When field operations are not controlled
by strength tests of concrete, the vertical forms of beams, columns and walls may be removed
after 2 days. The props of beams may be removed after 21 days.

If rapid hardening cement is used, the periods specified above may be reduced to 3/7th.

All formworks shall be removed without causing any damage to the concrete. Centering shall
be gradually and uniformly lowered in such a manner so as to avoid any shocks or vibrations.
Supports shall be removed in such a manner that the concrete is allowed to take stresses due
to its own weight uniformly and gradually.

Where internal metal ties are permitted, they or their removable parts shall be extracted
without causing any damage to the concrete and the remaining holes shall be filled with
mortar. All permanently embedded metal parts should have a cover of not less than 25 mm to
the finished concrete surface.

Technical Specifications : Steel Reinforcement for Structures 100

 Where it is intended to re-use the formwork, it shall be cleaned and made good to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.

9 -6 MEASUREMENTS FOR PAYMENT

Where it is stipulated in the contract that the formwork shall be paid for separately,
measurement for formwork shall be taken in square metres of the area of concrete surface
which is in contact with formwork.

Where it is not specifically stated in the description of the item that formwork shall be paid
separately, the rate of the reinforced cement concrete or pre-stressed cement concrete items
shall be deemed to include the cost of all formwork.

9 -7 RATE

The contract unit rate for formwork where it is provided as separate item, shall include the
cost of all labour, materials, precautionary measures and other incidentals required for the
construction and removal of forms as described above and also for framing required to
support the members until the concrete is sufficiently cured, set and hardened.

Technical Specifications : Steel Reinforcement for Structures 101

10

Steel Reinforcement
for Structure

Technical Specifications : Steel Reinforcement for Structures 102

10 -1 DESCRIPTION

This work shall include furnishing and placing of reinforcement according to the shape and
dimensions given in the drawings and as specified in these Specifications.

10 -2 GENERAL

Steel shall be clean and free from loose rust and loose mill scale at the time of fixing in
position and subsequent concreting.

10 -3 BENDING OF REINFORCEMENT

The reinforcement bars shall conform to the dimensions and shapes given in the Bar Bending
Schedule shown on relevant drawings.

Bars must not be heated and shall be bent to the specified shape and dimensions or as
directed by the Engineer using a skilled bar bender who does these works manually or by
power-driven tools.

Bars shall not be bent or straightened in a manner that will damage the material. Bars which
are bent during transportation or handling shall be straightened before being used on work.
They shall not be heated to facilitate bending.

Unless otherwise specified, a U type hook at the end of each bar shall invariably be provided.
The radius of the bend shall not be less than twice the diameter of the round bar. The length
of the straight part of the bar beyond the end of the curve shall be at least four times the
diameter of the round bar. In the case of deformed bars, the diameter shall be taken as the
diameter of a circle having an equivalent effective area. The hooks shall be suitably encased
to prevent any splitting of the concrete.

10 -4 PLACING OF REINFORCEMENT

All reinforcement bars shall be accurately placed in exact position shown on the drawings.
They shall be securely held in position during the placing of concrete by binding them by
annealed binding wire of not less than 1 mm in diameter and by supporting them by stay
blocks, metal chairs, spacers, metal hangers, supporting wires or/and other approved devices
which are placed at sufficiently close intervals. Bars will neither be allowed to sag between
supports nor displaced during concreting or any other operations. All devices used for
positioning shall be of non-corrosive material. Wooden and metal supports will not be
extended to the surface of concrete except where shown on the drawings. If placing of
additional bars on the layers of freshly laid concrete is required as an attempt to adjust the bar
spacing then such placing shall not be allowed at any instances. Layers of bars shall not be
separated by stone pieces, bricks or wooden blocks, instead, these shall be separated by
spacer bars, pre-cast mortar blocks or other approved devices.

Reinforcement after being placed in position shall be maintained in a clean condition until it
is completely embedded in concrete. Special care shall be exercised to prevent any
displacement of reinforcement at the time of concreting. A cover of concrete shall be

Technical Specifications : Plain and Reinforced Cement Concrete for Structures 103
 provided as indicated on the drawings in order to protect reinforcement from corrosion. All
bars which are protruding from concrete and are to be joined to the other bars shall be
protected by a thick coat of neat cement grout if these are likely to be exposed to open air for
sometime.

In case of columns and walls, vertical bars shall be kept in true vertical position by sliding
them through the slots which are cut accurately on horizontally kept timber templates as per
the exact bar positions. Such templates shall be removed after the concreting has progressed
up to a level just below them.

Bars crossing each other shall be secured by binding wire (annealed) of not less than 1 mm in
diameter in such a manner that they do not slip over each other at the time of fixing and
concreting.

As far as possible, bars of full length shall be used. Where this is not possible, overlapping
of bars shall be done as directed by the Engineer. When practicable, overlapping bars shall
not touch each other but be kept apart by 25 mm or 1¼ times the maximum size of coarse
aggregate, whichever is greater by allowing concrete between them. Where not feasible,
overlapping bars shall be bound with annealed steel wire of not less than 1 mm in diameter
and twisted tightly. The overlaps shall be staggered for different bars and located at points
along the span where neither shear nor bending moment is maximum.

10 -5 COUPLING OF BARS

Whenever indicated on the drawings or required by the Engineer, bars shall be joined by
couplings having a cross-section which is sufficient for the transmission of requisite stresses
transferred from the bars. The ends of the bars that are joined by coupling shall be upset for
a sufficient length so that the cross-section at the base of threads is not less than the normal
cross-section of the bar. The threads shall be standard Whiteworth threads. Steel for
coupling shall conform to IS : 226 until similar Nepal’s Standards are in place.

10 -6 WELDING OF BARS

When permitted or specified on the drawings, joints of reinforcement bars shall be butt-
welded in order to transmit the full strength exerted on the bars. Welded joints shall
preferably be located at points where steel will not be subjected to more than 75% of the
maximum permissible stresses. The welds shall be so staggered that, at any one section, not
more than 20% of the rods are welded.

Only electric arc welding using a process which excludes air from the molten metal and
conforms to any or all other special provisions for the work will be accepted. Suitable means
shall be provided for holding the bars securely in position during welding. It must be ensured
that no voids are left in welding. When welding is done in several stages, previously welded
surface shall be properly cleaned prior to each stage. Ends of the bars shall be cleaned of all
loose scale, rust, grease, paint and other undesirable matter prior to welding. Only competent
welders shall be employed for this work. The Mild Steel electrodes used for welding shall
conform to IS : 814 until similar Nepal’s Standards are in place. The welded pieces of
reinforcement shall be tested. Specimens for the tests shall be taken from the actual site and
their number and frequency of tests shall be as directed by the Engineer.

Technical Specifications : Plain and Reinforced Cement Concrete for Structures 104
10 -7 MEASUREMENTS FOR PAYMENT

Reinforcement shall be measured in length, separately for different diameters, as actually

used in the work excluding overlaps. From the measured length, the weight of reinforcement
shall be calculated in tons on the basis of the type of steel. Lengths shall include hooks at
ends but exclude the wastage, overlaps, couplings, welded joints, spacer bars and annealed
steel wire for binding. Cost of these items shall be deemed to be included in the rates for
reinforcement.

10 -8 RATE

The contract unit rate for reinforcement shall include the cost of all steel, its bending,
placing, binding and fixing in position as shown on the drawings and as directed by the
Engineer.

It shall also include the cost of

 all devices for keeping reinforcement in approved position;
 jointing as per approved method; and
 all wastage, overlaps and spacer bars.

Technical Specifications : Plain and Reinforced Cement Concrete for Structures 105
11

Plain and Reinforced Cement

Concrete
for Structures

Technical Specifications : Plain and Reinforced Cement Concrete for Structures 106
11 -1 GENERAL

These Specifications cover all the requirements of cement concrete for use in various
components of rural road structures.

For all the items of concrete in any structural portion of a cross drainage structure or its
components, “controlled” concrete shall be used unless otherwise specified on the drawings
or directed by the Engineer. For other concreting work that generally comes across in rural
road structures, “ordinary” concrete mix may be used provided that such works are clearly
specified in the drawings.

11 -2 GRADES OF CONCRETE

11-2.1 Controlled Concrete

For controlled concrete, design of the mix shall be ascertained after the preliminary tests.
During the production of controlled concrete, all necessary precautions shall be taken to
ensure that the required cube strength is attained and maintained in the work. The controlled
concrete shall be in eight grades designated as M 10, M 15, M 20, M 25, M 30, M 35, M 40
and M 45 with the suffix “Controlled” added to it.

11-2.2 Ordinary Concrete

In case of ordinary concrete, the mix is not required to be designed by preliminary tests. The
proportions of cement, fine aggregates and coarse aggregates are specified by volume. The
ordinary concrete shall be in four grades designated as M 10, M 15, M 20 and M 25. It can
also be specified by volume as given in Table 11 -6(a).

In the designation of a concrete mix, letter ‘M’ refers to the mix and the number refers to the
specified 28 days’ cube compressive strength of that mix on 150 mm cubes, expressed in
N/mm2.

11 -3 STRENGTH REQUIREMENT OF CONCRETE

Where ordinary Portland cement conforming to IS : 269 or Portland blast furnace cement
conforming to IS : 455 is used, the compressive strength requirements for various grades of
concrete “controlled” as well as “ordinary” shall be as given in Table 11 -3. Where rapid
hardening Portland cement is used, the 28 days’ compressive strength requirements specified
in Table 11 -3 shall be met at 7 days.

For “controlled” concrete, the mix shall be so designed to attain in preliminary tests a
strength of at least 33% higher than that required on work tests. Preliminary tests need not be
made in the case of “ordinary” concrete.

Table 11 -3 : Compressive Strength of Concrete in Work Tests

Technical Specifications : Structural Steel Work for Structures 107

 Grade of Compressive Strength in N/mm2 on 150 mm cubes to be
Concrete achieved in Work Tests after mixing is conducted in
accordance with IS : 516
minimum at 7 days minimum at 28 days
M 10 7.0 10.0
M 15 10.0 15.0
M 20 13.5 20.0
M 25 17.0 25.0
M 30 20.0 30.0
M 35 23.5 35.0
M 40 27.0 40.0
M 45 30.0 45.0
Note : In all cases, the 28 days’ compressive strength specified in this Table shall be the only
criterion for acceptance or rejection of the concrete.

Where the strength of a concrete mix, as indicated by tests, lies in between the strength for
any two grades specified in Table 11 -3, such concrete shall be classified for all purposes as
a concrete belonging to the lower of the two grades.

11 -4 ADMIXTURES

No materials other than the essential ingredients, i.e., cement, aggregates and water, shall
generally be used in the production of concrete or mortar. But the Engineer may permit the
use of approved admixtures for imparting special characteristics to the concrete on the basis
of satisfactory evidence that its use does not in any way adversely affect the properties of
concrete, particularly its strength, volume changes, durability and has no deleterious effect on
the reinforcements.

11 -5 SIZE OF COARSE AGGREGATES

The maximum nominal size of coarse aggregates differs according to the type or item of work
as given in Table 11 -5.

Table 11 -5 : Maximum Nominal Size of Coarse Aggregates

Item of Construction Maximum Nominal Size

of Coarse Aggregate
(i) RCC well curb, RCC well steining and RCC piles 40 mm
(ii) PCC well steining 63 mm
(iii) Well cap or pile cap, solid type piers, abutments and 40 mm
wing walls and their pier caps
(iv) RCC work in cross girders, deck slabs, wearing 20 mm
courses, kerbs, lamp posts, ballast walls, approach
slabs, hollow type piers, abutments, wings walls and
their pier caps
(v) RCC bearings 20 mm
(vi) For any other item not covered by items (i) to (v). As specified on the drawings or as
directed by the Engineer in case it is
not specified on drawing.

Technical Specifications : Structural Steel Work for Structures 108

 For heavily reinforced concrete members as in the case of ribs of main beams, maximum
nominal size of aggregate shall usually be restricted to 5 mm less than the minimum lateral
clearance between the main bars or 5 mm less than the minimum cover to the reinforcement,
whichever is smaller.

11 -6 PROPORTIONING CONCRETE

11-6.1 Controlled Concrete

Concrete mix for the controlled concrete shall be designed on the basis of preliminary tests.
The proportions for ingredients chosen shall be such that concrete
 has adequate workability for conditions prevailing on the work in question; and
 can be properly compacted with the means available.

Except where it can be shown to the satisfaction of the Engineer that supply of properly
graded aggregate of uniform quality can be maintained till the completion of work, grading of
aggregate should be controlled by obtaining the coarse aggregate in different sizes and
blending them in the right proportions as required. Different sizes, however, shall be stocked
in separate stock piles. Required quantity of materials shall be stock-piled several hours,
preferably a day, before use. Grading of coarse and fine aggregates shall be checked as
frequently as possible to ensure that the suppliers are maintaining the uniform grading as
approved for samples used in the preliminary tests. The frequency of such checks for a given
job shall be determined by the Engineer.

In proportioning concrete, the quantities of both cement and aggregate shall be determined by
weight. Where the weight of cement is determined by accepting the manufacturer’s weight
per bag, a reasonable number of bags shall be weighed separately to check the net weight.
Where cement is weighed from bulk stocks at site and not by bags, it shall be weighed
separately from the aggregates. Water shall either be measured by volume in calibrated tanks
or by weight. All measuring equipment shall be maintained in the clean and serviceable
condition. Their accuracy shall be periodically checked.

It is most important to keep the specified water-cement ratio constant and at its correct value.
For this, moisture content in both coarse and fine aggregates shall be checked as frequently as
possible. The frequency of such checks for a given job shall be determined by the Engineer
according to the prevailing weather condition. The amount of mixing water shall then be
adjusted to compensate for variations in the moisture content. For the determination of
moisture content in the aggregates, IS : 2386 (Part III) shall be referred. Suitable adjustments
shall also be made in the weight of aggregates to allow for its variations resulted due to the
variations in moisture content.

The minimum quantity of cement to be used in controlled concrete shall not be less than 210
kg per cubic metre in plain concrete and not less than 300 kg per cubic metre in reinforced
concrete. Similarly, the minimum quantity of cement for pre-stressed concrete shall not be
less than 360 kg per cubic metre of concrete nor shall it be more than 540 kg per cubic metre
of concrete.

11-6.2 Ordinary Concrete

The ordinary concrete mix shall generally be specified by volume. For cement which
normally comes in bags and is used by weight, the volumes shall be worked out taking 50 kg
of cement as 0.035 cubic metre in volume. Shaking, ramming or hammering shall not be

Technical Specifications : Structural Steel Work for Structures 109

 done when measuring aggregate by volume. Proportioning of sand shall be as per its dry
volume and in case it is damp, allowance for bulking shall be made as per IS : 2386 (Part III).

Ingredients required for ordinary concrete containing one 50 kg bag of cement for different
proportions of mix shall be as given in Table 11 -6(a).

Table 11 -6(a) : Ingredients Required for Different Grades of Ordinary Concrete

Grade Mix by Total quantity of dry Proportion of fine Quantity

of Volum aggregates by volume per aggregate to coarse of water
Concret e 50 kg of cement to be aggregate per 50 kg
e taken as the sum of the of cement
individual volumes of fine (maximum)
and coarse aggregates
(maximum)
1 2 3 4 5
M 10 1:3:6 300 litres Generally 1:2 for fine 34 litres
aggregate to coarse
aggregate
M 15 1:2:4 220 litres by volume but subject to a 32 litres
M 20 1:1½:3 160 litres upper limit of 1:1½ and a 30 litres
M 25 1:1:2 100 litres lower limit of 1:3* 27 litres
* The proportions of the aggregates shall be adjusted from the upper limit to lower limit
progressively as the grading of the fine aggregates becomes finer and the maximum size
of coarse aggregates becomes larger.

Example : For an average grading of fine aggregate, the proportions shall be 1:1½, 1:2 and
1:3 for maximum size of aggregates 10 mm, 20 mm and 40 mm, respectively.

Note : A mix leaner than M 10 (1:3:6) may be used for non-structural parts of the bridge, if
specified on the drawing or provided in the contract. In such case, grading of aggregates
shall be as specified in the contract or on the drawing. Other requirements for mixing,
placing and curing shall be the same as specified in this section.

11-6.3 Quantity of Water

The quantity of water shall be just sufficient to produce a dense concrete of required
workability for the job. An accurate and strict control shall be kept on the quantity of mixing
water.

In case of reinforced concrete work, workability shall be such that the concrete surrounds and
properly grips all reinforcements. The degree of consistency which shall depend upon the
nature of work and methods of vibration of concrete shall be determined by regular slump
tests. The following slump values shall be adopted for different types of work.

Table 11 -6(b) : Slump Values for Different Types of Work

Type of Work Slump Value

where vibrators where vibrators
are used are not used
Mass concrete in RCC foundations, footings 10 mm to 25 mm 80 mm
and retaining walls
Beams, slabs and columns simply reinforced 25 mm to 40 mm 100 mm to 120 mm

Technical Specifications : Structural Steel Work for Structures 110

 Thin RCC section or section with congested 40 mm to 50 mm 125 mm to 150 mm
steel

11 -7 MIXING CONCRETE

Where available on easy access, concrete for all works shall be mixed in a mechanical mixer.
The mixer and its accessories shall be kept in good working condition and be maintained
throughout the construction. Mixing shall be continued till
 materials are uniformly distributed;
 an uniform colour of the entire mass is obtained; and
 each individual particle of the coarse aggregate shows complete coating of mortar
containing its proportionate amount of cement.
In no case shall the mixing be done for less than 2 minutes after all ingredients have been put
into the mixer.

When hand mixing is permitted by the Engineer for majority of the jobs in labour based rural
roads, it shall be done on a smooth watertight platform large enough to allow efficient turning
over of the ingredients of concrete before and after the addition of water. Mixing platform
shall be so arranged that no foreign material shall get mixed with concrete nor does the
mixing water flow out. Cement in required number of bags shall be placed in a uniform layer
on top of the measured quantity of fine aggregates which shall have been spread in a layer of
uniform thickness on the mixing platform. Dry sand and cement shall then be mixed
thoroughly by turning over to get a mixture of uniform colour. Enough water shall then be
added gradually through a rose and the mass turned over till a mortar of required consistency
is obtained. Measured quantity of coarse aggregate shall then be placed on the mixing
platform. Then it shall be wetted and the mortar shall be added. Finally, the entire mass
shall be turned and re-turned until all particles of the coarse aggregate are fully covered with
mortar and the mixture obtained is of uniform colour and required consistency. In hand
mixing, quantity of cement shall be increased by 10% above that specified in clause 11-6.2.

Mixers which have been out of use for more than 30 minutes shall be thoroughly cleaned
before loading a new batch. Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, the first batch of
concrete from the mixer shall contain only two thirds of the normal quantity of coarse
aggregate. Mixing plant shall be thoroughly cleaned before changing from one type of
cement to another.

11 -8 TRANSPORTING, PLACING AND COMPACTING OF CONCRETE

The method of transporting and placing of concrete shall be approved by the Engineer.
Concrete shall be so transported and placed that no contamination, segregation or loss of its
constituent materials takes place.

All formwork and reinforcement contained in the concrete shall be cleaned and made free
from standing water, dust, snow or ice immediately before the placing of concrete.

No concrete shall be placed in any part of the structure without the approval of the Engineer.
If concreting is not started within 24 hours of the approval, it shall have to be obtained again.
Concreting shall then proceed continuously over the area between construction joints. Fresh
concrete shall not be placed against concrete which has been in position for more than 30
minutes unless a proper construction joint is formed.

Technical Specifications : Structural Steel Work for Structures 111

 Concrete when deposited shall have a temperature not less than 4.50C and not more than
380C. It shall be compacted in its final position within 30 minutes of its discharge from the
mixer unless the concreting work is carried out with properly designed agitators, operating
continuously. When using agitators, the delay time shall be maximum of 2 hours, counting
from the addition of cement to the mix. However, the delay time shall be within 30 minutes
of its discharge from the agitator.

Except where otherwise agreed by the Engineer, concrete shall be deposited in horizontal
layers to a compacted depth of not more than 0.45 m when internal vibrators are used and not
exceeding 0.30 m in all other cases.

Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, concrete shall not be dropped into place from a
height exceeding 2 m. When trunks or chutes are used, they shall be kept clean and used in
such a way as to avoid segregation.

When concrete is conveyed by chute, the plant shall be of such size and design as to ensure
practically continuous flow. Slope of the chute shall be so adjusted that the concrete flows
without the use of an excessive quantity of water and without any segregation of its gradients.
The delivery end of the chute shall be as close as possible to the point of deposit. The chute
shall be thoroughly flushed with water before and after each working period. The water used
for this purpose shall be discharged outside the formwork.

When concreting has to be resumed on a surface which has hardened, it shall be roughened,
swept clean, thoroughly wetted and covered with a 13 mm thick layer of mortar composed of
cement and sand in the same ratio as in the concrete mix itself. The 13 mm thick layer of
mortar shall be freshly mixed and placed immediately before placing of new concrete.

Where concrete has not fully hardened, all laitance shall be removed by scrubbing the wet
surface with wire or bristle brushes. During this operation, care must be taken to avoid
dislodgement of any particles of coarse aggregate. The surface shall then be thoroughly
wetted and all free water shall be removed. Then, the surface shall be coated with neat
cement grout. The first layer of concrete to be placed on this surface shall not exceed 150
mm in thickness. It shall be well rammed against old work giving particular attention to
corners and close spots.

All concrete shall be compacted to produce a dense homogeneous mass with the assistance of
vibrators or mild steel bars. Sufficient vibrators in serviceable condition shall be kept at site
so that spare equipment is always available in case of breakdowns.

Internal vibrators shall be of not less than 10,000 rpm whereas external or form vibrators
shall be of not less than 3,000 rpm. Vibrations shall not be applied through reinforcement.
As far as possible, contact with reinforcement and all inserts shall be avoided where vibrators
of the immersion type are used.

11 -9 CONCRETING UNDER WATER

When it is necessary to deposit concrete under water, the methods, equipment, materials and
proportions of the mix to be used shall have to be approved by the Engineer before the work
starts. Such concrete shall not be considered as “Controlled Concrete”.

Concrete shall not be placed in water having a temperature of below 4.50C. The temperature
of the concrete, when deposited, shall not be less than 160C and not be more than 380C.

Technical Specifications : Structural Steel Work for Structures 112

 Concrete shall contain 10% more cement than that required for the same mix placed in the
dry place. The material shall be so proportioned as to produce a concrete having a slump of
not less 100 mm and not more than 180 mm. The slump shall be tested as per IS : 516.

Coffer dams or forms shall be sufficiently tight to ensure still water conditions, if practicable,
and in any case to reduce the velocity of water to less than 3 m per minute through the space
into which concrete is to be deposited. Coffer dams or forms in still water shall be
sufficiently tight to prevent loss of mortar through the joints in the walls. Pumping shall not
be done during concreting and 24 hours thereafter.

Concrete shall be deposited continuously until it has been brought to the required height.
While depositing, the top surface shall always be kept as evenly level as possible and
formation of seams shall be avoided. For depositing concrete in structural components of
rural road structures, the “Drop Bottom Bucket Method” which is the simplest method of
depositing concrete underwater should be adopted.

Drop Bottom Bucket Method : The top of the bucket shall be closed. The bottom doors shall
move freely downward and outward when tripped. The bucket shall be filled completely and
lowered slowly to avoid backwash. It shall not be dumped until it rests on the surface upon
which the concrete is to be deposited. When concrete is discharged, the bucket shall be
withdrawn slowly until it reaches well above the concrete.

The other method called “Tremie” which is considered to be more sophisticated for labour-
based rural road construction is not discussed in these Specifications.

To minimise the formation of laitance, great care shall be exercised not to disturb the
concrete as far as possible while it is being deposited.

11 -10 CURING OF CONCRETE

11-10.1 Protection and Water Curing

Immediately after compaction, concrete shall be protected against harmful effects of weather,
running water, shocks, vibrations, traffic, rapid temperature changes, frost and drying out
process. It shall be covered with wet sacking, hessian or other similar absorbent material
approved by the Engineer soon after the initial set and shall be kept continuously wet for a
period of not less than 14 days from the date of placement. Masonry work over the
foundation concrete may be started after 48 hours of its laying but curing of concrete shall be
continued for a minimum period of 14 days.

11-10.2 Steam Curing

For concreting in rural road structures, this particular method of curing is not recommended.

11 -11 WORKING IN EXTREME WEATHER CONDITIONS

Where concrete is to be deposited at or near freezing temperatures, necessary precaution shall

be taken to ensure that the temperature of the concrete shall not be less than 4.5 0C. Not only
that, this temperature should be maintained until it is thoroughly hardened. If necessary, the
ingredients shall be heated before mixing and the concrete shall be carefully protected after

Technical Specifications : Structural Steel Work for Structures 113

 placing. In general, heating of water alone to about 60 0C may be sufficient for this purpose.
Salt or other chemicals should not be used as a prevention from freezing. Calcium chloride
up to 1½% by weight of cement can be used to accelerate the rate of hardening. Use of
calcium chloride in excess of this percentage is considered to be harmful. No frozen material
or materials containing ice shall be used. All concrete damaged by frost shall be removed. It
is recommended that concrete exposed to freezing weather shall have entrained air and the
water content of the mix shall not exceed 30 litres per 50 kg of cement.

When depositing concrete in very hot weather, precautions shall be taken so that the
temperature of wet concrete does not exceed 380C while placing. This shall be achieved by
 stacking aggregate under the shade and keeping them moist;
 using cold water;
 reducing the time between mixing and placing to the minimum;
 cooling formwork by sprinkling water;
 starting curing before the concrete dries out; and
 organising concreting as far as possible during mornings and evenings.

11 -12 FINISHING

Immediately after the removal of forms, all exposed bars or bolts which either pass through
the reinforced cement concrete member or use for the shuttering or any other purpose shall be
cut inside the RCC member to a depth of at least 25 mm below the surface of the concrete.
The resulting holes shall be closed by cement mortar. All fins caused by form joints, cavities
produced by the removal of form ties, all other holes and depressions, honey-comb spots,
broken edges or corners and other defects shall be thoroughly cleaned; saturated with water;
and carefully pointed and rendered true with mortar of cement and fine aggregates mixed in
the proportions used in the grade of concrete that is being finished. Considerable pressure
shall be applied in filling and pointing to ensure proper filling in all voids. Surfaces which
have been pointed shall be kept moist for a period of 24 hours.

All construction and expansion joints in the completed work shall be left carefully tooled and
free from any mortar and concrete. Expansion joint filler shall be left exposed for its full
length with clean and true edges.

If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the rock pockets/honey-combs are existing in the concrete
to an extent which may affect the strength of the structure materially as well as endanger the
life of the steel reinforcement then, he may declare the concrete defective and instruct for the
removal and replacement of the portions of the structure affected.

11 -13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS

Concreting shall be carried out continuously up to the construction joints. The position and
details of the construction joints shall be as shown on approved drawings or as directed by
the Engineer. Such joints shall, however, be kept to the minimum.

For a vertical construction joint, a stopping board shall be fixed previously at the pre-
determined position and shall be properly stayed for sufficient lateral rigidity to prevent its
displacement or bulging when concrete is compacted against it. Concreting shall be
continued right up to the board. The board shall not be removed before the end of the
specified period for removal of vertical forms.

Technical Specifications : Structural Steel Work for Structures 114

 Before resuming work at any construction joint, all laitance shall be removed thoroughly if
the concrete has not yet fully hardened. While removing the laitance, care should be taken to
avoid any dislodgement of coarse aggregates. In case where the concrete has fully hardened,
the surface shall be thoroughly hacked, swept clean, wetted and covered with a layer of neat
cement grout. The neat cement grout shall be followed by a 13 mm thick layer of mortar
mixed in the same proportion as in concrete. The first batch of concrete shall be rammed
against the old work to avoid formation of any stone pockets. Particular attention shall be
paid to corners and close spots.

In pre-stressed concrete structures, construction joints shall be avoided as far as possible

specially in the area of tensile stresses. Where necessary, concreting shall be carried out
continuously up to such joints which shall preferably be transverse to the line of main
compression. In all cases, the position and detailed arrangement of all construction joints
shall be predetermined. For such works, the approval shall be taken in advance from the
Engineer.

11 -14 TESTS AND STANDARDS OF ACCEPTANCE

11-14.1 Preliminary Tests for Controlled Concrete

For controlled concrete, the preliminary tests (refer to clause 11-2.1) shall be conducted as
three sets of separate tests. In each set, tests shall be conducted on six specimens. On any
particular day, not more than one set of six specimens shall be made. Out of the six
specimens in each set, three shall be tested at seven days and the remaining three at 28 days.
The preliminary tests at 7 days are intended only to indicate the strength likely to be attained
at 28 days.

11-14.2 Work Strength Tests for Controlled and Ordinary Concrete

Work strength tests shall be made in accordance with IS : 516. Each test shall be conducted
on ten specimens, five of which shall be tested at 7 days and the remaining five at 28 days.
The samples of concrete shall be taken on each day of concreting and cubes shall be made at
the rate of one set (10 specimens) for every 5 cubic metres of concrete or a part thereof.
However, if concreting done in a day is less than 15 cubic metres, the number of cubes could
be reduced to a minimum of 6 with the special permission of the Engineer. If so, three shall
be tested at 7 days and the remaining three at 28 days.

Similar work tests shall be carried out whenever the quality and grading of materials is
changed, irrespective of the quantity of concrete poured. The number of specimens may be
suitably increased as deemed necessary by the Engineer when the procedure of tests given
above reveals a poor quality of concrete or in other special cases.

All work shall be carried out under the supervision of a qualified and a competent
Engineer/Overseer who will supervise proportioning, placing and compacting of concrete at
all stages.

All necessary labour, materials, equipment (other than testing), etc., for sampling, preparing
test cubes, curing, etc., shall be arranged by the Contractor. However, if any additional
support is required, it shall be provided by the Engineer. Testing of the materials and
concrete shall be arranged by the Engineer in an approved laboratory at the cost of the
Contractor.

Technical Specifications : Structural Steel Work for Structures 115

11-14.3 Standards of Acceptance

The average strength of the group of cubes cast in each day shall not be less than the
specified compressive cube strength of works. However, 20% of the cubes cast in each day
may have values less than the specified strength, provided that the lowest value is not below
85% of the specified strength.

11 -15 USE OF PLUMS IN ORDINARY CONCRETE

Stone plums shall not be used unless specified on the drawings. When used, the size of stone
plums may be from 150 to 300 mm. The maximum dimension of these stones or plums shall
not exceed 1/3rd of the least dimension of the members.

All plums shall be hard, durable, clean and free from soft materials or loose pieces or
deleterious substance and shall not have sharp corners.

During concreting, the first layer of concrete of the specified mix shall be laid to a thickness
of at least 2.5 times the thickness of the maximum size of plums to be used. The plums shall
then be laid while the top portion of this concrete is still within the initial setting time. But,
the concrete should then be sufficiently stiff enough to prevent complete submergence of the
plums. These plums shall remain half embedded in the concrete and the other half exposed
so as to form a key with the next layer of concrete. No plums shall be used for concrete
which is laid under water.

While placing the plums, care shall be taken to ensure that the clear distance between any
two plums is not less than either the width or thickness of either of the plums. The distance
from plums to the outer surface or to any steel reinforcement shall be equal to the greatest
width of the plum.

If plums of stratified stone are used, they shall be laid on their natural bed. Stones with
concave faces shall be laid with the concave face upwards. The thickness of the next and
successive layers of concrete shall be at least twice that of the largest plums. The total
volume of plums shall not exceed 15% of the volume of the finished concrete.

11 -16 MEASUREMENTS FOR PAYMENT

The cement concrete shall be measured in cubic metres. In reinforced concrete, the volume
occupied by reinforcement shall not be deducted. The slab shall be measured as running
continuously through and the beam as the portion below the slab.

11 -17 RATE

The contract unit rate for concrete shall include the cost of all labour, materials required for
mixing, placing in position, vibrating and compacting, finishing as per the directions of the
Engineer, curing and all other incidental expenses including precautionary measures for
producing concrete of specified strength to complete the structure or its components as
shown on the drawings and according to these Specifications. The rate shall also include the
cost of making, fixing and removing of all centres and forms required for the work unless
otherwise specified in the contract.

Technical Specifications : Structural Steel Work for Structures 116

12

Structural
Steel Work
for Structure
12 -1 DESCRIPTION

This work shall include furnishing, fabricating, transporting, erecting and painting of
structural steel, rivet steel, cast steel, forged steel, cast iron and other incidental metal
construction of the kind, size and quantity in conformity with the drawings or as desired by
the Engineer.

12 -2 GENERAL

General requirements relating to the supply of material shall conform to the specification of
IS : 387, for the purpose of which the supplier shall be the Contractor and the purchaser shall
be the Engineer.

Finished rolled material shall be free from cracks, flaws, injurious seams, laps, blisters,
ragged and imperfect edges and other defects. It shall have smooth, uniform finish and shall
be straightened in the mill before shipment. It shall also be free from loose mill scale, rust,
pits or other defects which affect its strength and durability.

The acceptance of any material on inspection at the mill, i.e., rolling mills, foundry or
fabricating plant where material for the work is manufactured shall not be a bar to its
subsequent rejection, if found defective.

Unless otherwise specified, high tensile steel rivet conforming to IS : 1149 shall be used for
members of high tensile steel conforming to IS : 961 and shall not be used for mild steel
members. The use of cast steel shall be limited to bearings and other similar parts.
Generally, all steel pins (including knuckle pins) and rollers shall be of forged steel. Cast
iron shall not be used in any portion of the bridge structure except where it is subjected to
direct compression.

12 -3 MATERIALS

All materials shall conform to Section 6 of these Specifications. Special requirements which
are not addressed in Section 6 are given below.

Technical Specifications : Structural Steel Work for Structures 117

 Mild steel for bolts and nuts shall conform to IS : 226 but shall have a minimum tensile
strength of 440 N/mm2 and a minimum percentage elongation of 14. High tensile steel for
bolts and nuts shall conform to IS : 961 but with a minimum tensile strength of 580 N/mm2.
High strength friction grip bolts shall be permitted for use only on satisfactory evidence of
performance to the requirements (not covered by these Specifications) specified by the
Engineer or included in the special provisions.

For cast steel, the yield stress shall be determined and shall not be less than 50% of the
minimum tensile strength.

Plain washers shall be of steel. Tapered or other specially shaped washers shall be of steel or
of malleable cast iron.

Parallel barrel drifts shall have a tensile strength not less than 550 N/mm2 with elongation of
not less than 20% measured on a gauge length of 4√So (So = cross sectional area).

Copper alloys, mechanite or special steels used for bearings or similar other parts shall
conform to the requirements specified by the Engineer or included in the special provisions.

Mild steel electrodes shall conform to IS : 814 and those of high tensile steel shall conform to
IS : 1442.

All paints and enamels used shall conform to the requirements specified on the drawings or
to the other special provisions laid down by the Engineer. Unless otherwise specified, paints
shall conform to the relevant IS Specifications until similar Nepal’s Standards are in place.

12 -4 FABRICATION

12-4.1 General

All works shall be in accordance with the drawings and as specified in these Specifications.
Care shall be taken to fit all parts of an assembly accurately together. Unless otherwise
specified under the contract, corresponding parts need not be interchangeable but the parts
shall be match marked as required under clause 12-4.7.

Templates, jigs and other appliances used for ensuring the accuracy of the work shall be of
mild steel. Where specially required, these shall be bushed with hard steel. All
measurements shall be made by means of steel tape or other device which is properly
calibrated. Where bridge materials have been used as templates for drilling, these shall be
inspected and passed by the Engineer before they are used in the finished structure.

All structural steel members and parts shall have straight edges and blunt surfaces. If
necessary, they shall be straightened or flattened by pressure unless they are required to be of
curvilinear forms. They shall also be free from twist. When straightening or flattening of
such members, pressure shall be applied without damaging the materials. Adjacent surfaces
or edges shall be in close contact or at uniform distance throughout.

12-4.2 Preparation of Edges and Ends

Where required, all structural steel parts shall be sheared, cropped, sawn or flame cut and
ground accurately to the required dimensions and shapes.

Technical Specifications : Structural Steel Work for Structures 118

In the case of high tensile steel, at least 6 mm of the materials from the flame cut edge shall
be removed by machining.

Longitudinal edges of all plates and cover plates in plate girders and built-up members shall
be machined except in the following cases:
a) Rolled edges of single universal plates or flats may not be machined;
b) Covers to single flange plates may be left un-machined;
c) Machine flame cutting instead of machining is acceptable for edges of single plates in
compression and for edges of single plates having thickness of 25 mm or less in tension;
d) Edges of single shaped plates over 25 mm thick which are not possible to be machined by
ordinary method may be machine flame cut with the end surface ground.
e) Edges of universal plates or flats of the same nominal width used in tiers may be left un-
machined, if so authorised by the Engineer.

Technical Specifications : Structural Steel Work for Structures 119

 All edges of splice and gusset plates having a thickness of at least 12 mm shall be machined.
Those which are of less than 12 mm thick may be sheared and ground.

The ends of plates and sections forming the main components of plate girders or built-up
members shall be machined, machine flame cut, sawn or hand flame cut and ground.

In joints and splices of compression members, in girder flanges and in tension members
where so specified on the drawings, the abutting surfaces shall be faced and brought to an
even bearing. A tolerance of 0.5 mm may be permitted locally. Where close fitting is not
specified, any clearances shall not exceed 3 mm.

Where ends of stiffners are required to be fitted, they shall be machined, machine flame cut,
sawn, sheared and ground, or hand flame cut and ground.

The ends of lacing bar shall be rounded unless otherwise specified. Other edges and ends of
mild steel parts may be sheared and any burrs at edges shall be removed.

12-4.3 Preparation of Holes

12-4.3.1 Drilling and Sub-punching

All holes for rivets shall be drilled or drilled small and reamed. However, if preferred, the
holes may be sub-punched to a diameter of 6 mm less than the finished size and then reamed
to the proper size.

When several plates or sections form a compound member, they shall, where practicable, be
firmly connected together by clamps or tack bolts. For this, the holes shall be drilled through
the group in one operation. Alternately and in the case of repetition work, the plates and
sections may be drilled separately from jigs and templates. The jigs and templates shall be
checked at least once after 25 operations. All burrs shall be removed.

In the case of repetition of spans, the erection of every span shall not be insisted upon, except
where close tolerance or turned bolts are used, provided that methods are adopted to ensure
strict interchangeability. In such cases, one span in 10 or any number less than 10 of each
type shall be erected from pieces selected at random by the Engineer. If there is any
difficulty in fitting of the pieces together then all similar spans shall be erected completely.
In the event of the spans being proved completely interchangeable, all corresponding parts
shall carry the same marks so that sorting of the materials at the site will be easier.

12-4.3.2 Block Drilling

Where the number of plates to be riveted exceeds three or the total thickness of the plates is
90 mm or more, the rivet holes, unless they have been drilled through steel bushed jigs, shall
be drilled out in such a manner that 3 mm gap is all around each hole after assembling. In
such cases, the work shall be thoroughly bolted together.

12-4.3.3 Sizes of Holes

The sizes of holes in mm are given in Table 12 -4.

Technical Specifications : Bearings 120

 Table 12 -4 : Diameter of Holes for Rivets

Nominal Diameter of Rivets Diameter of Holes

mm mm
12 13.5
14 15.5
16 17.5
18 19.5
20 21.5
22 23.5
24 25.5
27 29.0
30 32.0
33 35.0

12-4.3.4 Close Tolerance Bolts and Barrel Bolts

The diameter of the holes shall be equal to the nominal diameter of the bolt shank minus 0.15
mm to 0.0 mm.

12-4.3.5 Removal of Burrs

The work shall be taken apart after drilling and all burrs left by drilling and the sharp edges
of all rivet holes are completely removed.

12-4.4 Rivet and Riveting

The diameter of rivets shown on drawings shall be the size before heating. Each rivet shall
be of sufficient length to form a head of the standard dimensions as given in IS Handbook on
Steel Sections, Part I. It shall be free from burrs on the under side of the head.

When countersunk heads are required, the heads shall fill the countersunk. The included
angle of the head shall be as follows:
a) for plates over 14 mm thickness - 90°
b) for plates up to and including 14 mm thickness - 120°.

The tolerance on the diameter of rivet shall be in accordance with IS : 1148 and IS : 1149
until similar Nepal’s Standards are in place. Unless otherwise specified, the tolerance shall
be minus tolerance.

Rivets shall be heated uniformly to a light cherry red and shall be red hot from head to the
point when inserted. They shall be upset in its entire length so as to fill the hole as
completely as possible when hot. Rivets after being heated and before being inserted in the
hole shall be made free from scale by striking the hot rivet on a hard surface.

Wherever possible, the rivets shall be machine driven, preferably by direct acting riveters.
The driving pressure shall be maintained on the rivets for a short time after the up-setting is
completed.

Where flush surface is required, any projecting metal shall be chipped or ground off.

Technical Specifications : Bearings 121

 Before commencing riveting, all work shall be properly bolted up so that the various sections
and plates are in close contact throughout. Drifts shall be used only for drawing the work
into position and shall not be used to such an extent as to distort the holes. Drifts of a larger
size than the nominal diameter of the hole shall not be used.

When struck sharply on the head with a 100 g rivet testing hammer, driven rivets shall be free
from movement and vibrations.

All loose or burnt rivets and rivets with cracked or badly formed defective heads or with
heads which are unduly eccentric with the shanks shall be removed and replaced. In
removing rivets, the head shall first be sheared off. The rivet shall, then. be punched out
without damaging the adjacent metal. If necessary, they shall be drilled out. Recupping and
caulking shall not be permitted.

12-4.5. Bolts, Nuts and Washers

12-4.5.1 Black Bolts (black all over)

Black bolts are forged bolts in which the shanks, heads and nuts do not receive any further
treatment except cutting of screw threads. They shall be true to shape and size and shall have
the standard dimensions as shown on the drawings.

12-4.5.2 Close Tolerance Bolts

Close tolerance bolts shall be faced under the head and turned on the shank.

12-4.5.3 Turned Barrel Bolts

The diameter of the screwed portion of turned barrel bolts shall be 1.5 mm smaller than the
diameter of the barrel unless otherwise specified by the Engineer. The diameter of the bolts
as given on the drawings shall be the nominal diameter of the barrel. The length of the barrel
shall be such that it bears fully on all the parts connected. The threaded portion of each bolt
shall project through the nut by at least one thread. Faces of heads and nuts bearing on steel
work shall be machined.

12-4.5.4 Washers

In all cases where the full bearing area of the bolt is to be developed, the bolt shall be
provided with a steel washer under the nut. The washer shall be of sufficient thickness to
avoid any threaded portion of the bolt being within the thickness of the parts bolted together
and to prevent the nut when screwed up from bearing on the bolt.

For close tolerance or turned barrel bolts, steel washers whose faces give a true bearing shall
be provided under the nut. The washer shall have a hole having a diameter not less than 1.5
mm larger than the barrel and a thickness of not less than 6 mm so that the nut, when screwed
up, will not bear on the shoulder of the bolt.

Taper washers with a correct angle of taper shall be provided under all heads and nuts
bearing on bevelled surfaces.

Spring washers may be used under nuts to prevent slackening of the nuts when excessive
vibrations occur.

Technical Specifications : Bearings 122

 Where the heads or nuts bear on timber, square washers having a length of each side not less
than three times the diameter of the bolts or round washers having a diameter of 3½ times the
diameter of bolts and with a thickness not less than one quarter of diameter shall be provided.

12-4.5.5 Studs

Ordinary studs may be used for holding parts together, the holes in one of the parts being
taped to take the thread of the stud. Countersunk studs may be used for making connections
where the surfaces are required to be clear of all obstructions such as protruding heads of
bolts or rivets. Studs may also be welded on the steel work in the positions required.

12-4.5.6 Service Bolts

Service bolts shall have the same clearance as black bolts. Where it is required, there should
be no movement prior to final riveting and sufficient drift or close tolerance bolts shall be
used to locate the work.

12-4.5.7 Drifts

Barrel shall be drawn or machined to the required diameter for a length of not less than one
diameter over the combined thickness of the metal through which the drifts have to pass. The
diameter of the parallel barrel shall be equal to the nominal diameter of the hole subject to a
tolerance of + 0 mm and - 0.125 mm. Both ends of the drift shall be turned down for a length
which is equal to 1½ times the diameter of the parallel portion of the bar. It shall be tapered
to a diameter at the end which is equal to one-half the diameter of parallel portion.

12-4.6 Pins and Pin Holes

12-4.6.1 Pins

The pins shall be parallel throughout and shall have a smooth surface which is free from
flaws. They shall be of sufficient length to ensure that all parts connected thereby shall have
a full bearing on them. Where the ends are threaded, they shall be turned to a smaller
diameter at the ends for the thread and shall be provided with a pilot nut, where necessary, to
protect the thread when being drawn to place.

Pins which are having a length or a diameter of more than 175 mm shall be forged and
annealed.

12-4.6.2 Pin Holes

Pin holes shall be bored true to gauge, smooth, straight at right angles to the axis of the
member and parallel with each other, unless otherwise specified. The tolerance in the length
of tension members (from outside to outside of pin holes) and of compression members (from
inside to inside of pin holes) shall be one millimetre. In built-up members, the boring shall
be done after the members have been riveted or welded.

The specified diameter of the pin hole shall be its minimum diameter. The resulting
clearance between the pin and the hole shall not be less than 0.5 mm and not more than 1.0
mm.
12-4.7 Shop Erection and Match Marking

Technical Specifications : Bearings 123

 Before being despatched, the steel work shall be temporarily erected in the fabrication shop
for inspection by the Engineer either wholly or in such portion, in order to satisfy him/herself
regarding the alignment and fitting of all connections. For this purpose, sufficient number of
parallel drifts and service bolts shall be employed. All parts shall fit accurately and be in
accordance with the drawings and Specifications.

After the work has been passed by the Engineer and before it is dismantled, each part shall be
carefully marked with distinguishing marks and stamped with durable markings in order to
facilitate easy re-erection. Drawings showing these markings shall be supplied to the
Engineer.

Where close tolerance or turned barrel bolts are used for those cases where interchangeability
is not insisted upon, each span shall be erected and members of each span shall be marked
distinctly.

12-4.8 Welding

All welding shall be done with the prior approval of the Engineer and the workmanship shall
conform to the Specifications of IS : 823 until similar Nepal’s Standard are in place.

When material thickness is 20 mm or more, special precautions like pre-heating shall be

undertaken as laid down in IS : 823.

Welding shall be permitted to be performed, for the project either in the shop or in the field,
only by skilled welders whose work satisfies to the Engineer.

12-4.9 Tolerances

Tolerances in the dimensions of components of structural steel work shall be specified on the
drawings and shall be subjected to the approval of the Engineer.

Unless otherwise specified, the following tolerances shall be maintained.

The tolerance on all depths of girders shall be

  0.002 x depth : for depths up to 1500 mm and
  0.0015 x depth : for depth above 1500mm.

The tolerance on lengths of individual components and the total length or span of the
assembled components shall be
  3.0 mm : for lengths less than 12 m and
  0.00025 x length : for lengths greater than 12 m.

The spacing of the stiffeners of the plate girders shall be accurately maintained with a
tolerance of 4 mm.

The tolerance in distances between the consecutive gusset plates shall be  2.0 mm.

12 -5 ERECTION

Technical Specifications : Bearings 124

12-5.1 General

The provisions of this item shall apply to the erection of steel bridge structures composed of
steel which span between supports.

If the sub-structure and the super-structure are built under separate contracts, the sub-
structure will be constructed at first instance by the designated Contractor to the correct lines,
dimensions and elevations shown on the drawings or directed by the Engineer. All requisite
lines and elevations required for setting of steel members shall be in accordance with the
construction drawings. Then, the other Contractor shall erect the structural steel; remove the
temporary construction and do all the work required to complete the construction of super-
structure in accordance with the drawings and Specifications and to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.

12-5.2 Organisation and Equipment

The Contractor shall submit an erection plan which is prepared by the fabricator. This plan
shall show the method and procedure of erection that are in compatible with the details of
fabrication.

Unless otherwise specified in the contract, the Contractor shall supply and erect all necessary
false work and staging and shall supply all labour, tools, erection plant and other materials
necessary to complete the work in all respects.

The Contractor shall supply all rivets, bolts, nuts, washers, etc. required to complete erection
at site with an allowance for wastage, etc. of 12.5% of the net number of field rivets, bolts,
washers, etc. or a minimum of five number of each item.

Service bolts and nuts, ordinary platters, washers and drifts for use in the erection of work
shall be supplied at the rate of 60% (45% bolts and 15% drifts) of the number of field rivets
per span in each size (This includes wastage). A reduction in the quantities of service bolts,
etc. may, however, be specified by the Engineer if more than one span of each type is
ordered.

Before starting work, the Contractor shall obtain the necessary approval of the Engineer with
respect to the method of erection and the number and character of tools and plants to be used.

The approval of the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of his/her responsibility for the
safety of the method or equipment or from carrying out the work fully in accordance with the
drawings and Specifications.

When progressing the work, the Contractor shall have a competent engineer or an overseer as
in charge of the work who shall be adequately experienced in steel erection and acceptable to
the Engineer.

12-5.3 Handling and Storing Materials

Materials to be stored shall be placed on skids above the ground. It shall be kept clean and
properly drained. Girders and beams shall be placed upright and shored. Long members
shall be supported on skids placed near enough together to prevent any deflection. The

Technical Specifications : Bearings 125

 Contractor shall be held responsible for loss or damage to any material which has been paid
already but still remained in his/her custody.
12-5.4 False Work

The false work shall be properly designed; substantially built; and maintained for all
anticipated loads. The Contractor, if required, shall submit plans for approval to the
Engineer. Approval of the plans, however, shall not relieve the Contractor from his/her
responsibility.

12-5.5 Straightening Bent Material

The straightening of plates, angels and other shapes shall be done by methods which are not
likely to produce any fracture or damage. The metal shall not be heated unless permitted by
the Engineer. However, heating shall not be done to a temperature higher than that producing
a dark cherry red colour. Further, it must be cooled as slowly as possible. Following the
straightening of a bend or buckle, the surface shall be carefully investigated for evidence of
fracture. Sharp kinks and bends may be the cause for rejection of material.

12-5.6 Assembling Steel

The parts shall be accurately assembled with reference to the match marks and as per the
drawings. The materials shall be carefully handled so that no parts will be bent, broken or
otherwise damaged.

Hammering which will damage or distort the members shall be avoided. Bearing surface or
surfaces to be in permanent contact shall be cleaned before the members are assembled. The
truss spans shall be erected on blocks which are placed in such a way that the proper camber
is ensured. The blocking shall be left in place until the tension chord splices are fully riveted
and all other truss connections are pinned and bolted. Rivets in splices of butt joints of
compression members and rivets in railings shall not be driven until the span has been swung.

Any connections to be riveted or bolted shall be secured in close contact with service bolts or
with a sufficient number of permanent bolts before the rivets are driven or before the
connections are finally bolted. Joints shall normally be made by filling not less than 50% of
holes with service bolts and barrel drifts in the ratio of 4:1. The service bolts are to be fully
tightened up as soon as the joint is assembled. Connections to be made by close tolerance or
barrel bolts shall be completed as soon as practicable after assembling. Any connection to be
in-situ welded shall be securely held in position by approved methods to ensure accurate
alignment, camber and elevation before welding is commenced.

The field riveting, welding, bolting and pin connection shall conform to the requirements of
clause 12 -4 as appropriate.

The correction of minor misfits involving harmless amounts of reaming, cutting and chipping
will be considered as a legitimate part of erection. However, any error in the shop fabrication
or any deformation resulting from handling and transportation which prevents proper
assembling and fitting up of parts by moderate use of drifts or by a moderate amount of
reaming and slight chipping or cutting shall be reported immediately to the Engineer and
his/her approval of the method of correction shall have to be obtained. The correction shall
be made in the presence of the Engineer.

Technical Specifications : Bearings 126

12-5.7 Field Inspection

All materials, equipment and work of erection shall be subjected to the inspection of the
Engineer. Any work which is found defective shall be liable to be rejected. No material or
work shall be painted until it has been inspected and approved.

12 -6 PAINTING

12-6.1 General

Unless otherwise specified, all metal work shall be given approved shop coats as well as field
coats of painting. The item of work shall include
 the preparation of metal surfaces;
 the application of protective covering;
 drying of the paint coatings; and
 the supply of all tools, scaffolding, labour and materials necessary.

General steel work shall be protected against corrosion by a minimum of three coats of paint
or a metal coating followed by two coats of paint.

Unless otherwise specified, all painting and protective coating works shall generally be done
in accordance with IS : 1477 (Part I) until similar Nepal’s Standards are in place.

12-6.2 Surface Preparation

Steel surface to be painted either at the fabricating shop or at the site of work shall be
prepared in a thorough manner with a view to ensure complete removal of mill scale by one
of the following processes as agreed by the fabricator and the Engineer:
a. grit and sand blasting
b. pickling which should be restricted to single plates, bars and sections
c. flame cleaning
d. scraping and wire brushing.

Primary coat shall be applied as soon as practicable after cleaning. In case of flame cleaning,
primary coat shall be applied while the metal is still warm.

All slag from welds shall be removed before painting. Care shall be taken to brush the
surface clean prior to painting. Surfaces shall be maintained dry and free from dirt and oil.
Outdoor work in frosty and humid weather shall be avoided.

12-6.3 Coatings

Prime coat to be used shall conform to the specification of primers approved by the Engineer.
Metal coatings shall be regarded as prime coatings.

All coats shall be compatible with each other. When metal coatings are used, the undercoat
shall be compatible with the metal concerned. The undercoat and the finishing coat shall
preferably be from the same manufacturer. Successive coats of paint shall be of different
shades or colours and each shall be allowed to dry thoroughly before the following coat is

Technical Specifications : Bearings 127

 applied. Particular care shall be taken with the priming and painting of edges, corners, welds
and rivets.
12-6.4 Painting in the Shop

All fabricated steel shall be painted with at least one priming coat in the shop unless the
exposed surfaces are subsequently to be cleaned at site or are metal coated.

If required, all contact surfaces which could not be painted at site shall be painted and
brought together at shop while the paint is still wet. Surfaces which are not in contact but are
inaccessible after assembling at the shop shall receive the fully specified protective treatment
before assembling.

Where surfaces are to be welded, the steel shall not be painted or metal coated within a
suitable distance from any edge to be welded if the specified paint or metal coating would be
harmful to welders or is expected to impair the quality of site welds.

Exposed machined surfaces shall be adequately protected.

12-6.5 Painting at Site

Surfaces which will be inaccessible after assembling at site shall receive the full specified
protective treatment before assembling.

Surfaces which will be in contact after site assembly shall receive a coat of paint (in addition
to any shop priming) and shall be brought together while the paint is still wet.

Damaged or deteriorated painted surfaces shall first be made good with the same type of coat
as the shop coat.

Where steel has received a metal coat in the shop, this coating shall be continued at site (after
welding or assembling) in order to have a continuous paint cover over any welds, bolts and
site rivets.

Specified protective treatment shall be completed after erection.

12 -7 MEASUREMENTS FOR PAYMENT

The measurements of this item shall be in tonnes based on the net weight of metal in the
fabricated structure. The net weight shall be computed on the basis of nominal weight of
materials.

The weight of rolled or cast steel and cast iron shall be determined from the dimensions
shown on the drawings on the following basis:
 rolled or cast steel : 7.84 x 10-3 kg/cm3
 cast iron : 7.21 x 10-3 kg/cm3.

Weight of structural sections shall be their nominal weight.

The weight of castings shall be computed from the dimensions shown on the drawings with
an addition of 5% for fillets and over-run.

Technical Specifications : Bearings 128

 The weight of weld fillets shall not be included in the measurement. Similarly, the weight of
protective coatings of the structure shall also not be included in the measurement.
The weight of rivet heads shall be computed by taking the weight of 100 snap heads as given
in Table 12 -7.

Table 12 -7 : Weight of Rivet Heads

Diameter of Rivet as Manufactured Weight of 100 Snap Heads

mm kg
12 1.30
14 2.10
16 3.40
18 4.45
20 6.10
22 8.10
24 10.50
27 15.00
30 20.50
33 27.20

When especially agreed upon, allowance for snap heads may be taken as a flat percentage of
the total weight. This percentage may be taken as 3% or modified by mutual agreement.

The Contractor shall supply detailed calculation sheets for the weight of the metal in the
fabricated structure.

No additions shall be made for the weight of protective coatings or weld fillets.

Where computed weight forms the basis for payment, the weight shall be calculated for exact
cut sizes of members used in the structure. In such case, the deductions shall be made for all
cuts except for rivet holes and additions shall be made for the rivet heads as mentioned
above.

When especially agreed upon, the basis for payment may be the complete weight of the
bridge which shall be included in the special provision of the contract.

12 -8 RATE

The contract unit rate for the completed structural steel work shall include the cost of all
labour, materials required for fabrication, connections, oiling, painting, temporary erection,
inspection, tests and complete final erection as shown on the drawings and as specified in
these Specifications.

13

Technical Specifications : Bearings 129

Bearings

Technical Specifications : Bearings 130

13 -1 DESCRIPTION

This work shall consist of furnishing and fixing in position of bearings in accordance with the
details shown on the drawings to the requirements of these Specifications.

13 -2 GENERAL

Bearing plates, bars, rockers, assemblies and other expansion or fixed devices shall be
constructed in accordance with the details shown on the drawings.

When bearing assemblies or plates as of the drawings are to be placed (not embedded)
directly on concrete, the concrete bearing area shall be constructed for slightly above grade
and shall be finished by grinding.

It shall be ensured that the bearings are set truly level and in exact position as indicated on
the drawings in order to have full and even bearing on the seats. Thin mortar pads (not
exceeding 12 mm) may be made to meet with this requirement.

It shall be ensured that the bottoms of girders to be received on the bearings are plane at the
location of these bearings. Care shall be taken so that the bearings are not displaced while
placing the girders.

Wherever rockers and rollers are provided for expansion or contraction of superstructure
spans which are longer than 30 m, they shall be adjusted at the time of placement in such a
manner that the line of bearing is as central as possible on the bearing plates at normal design
temperature. It should further be ensured that the line of bearing is still on the bearing plate
even after the subsequent bridge movement computed at the design stage.

When elastomeric bearing pads, elastic bearing pads or pre-formed fabric pads are shown on
the drawings, the concrete surfaces on which pads are to be placed shall be wood float
finished to a level plane which shall not vary by more than 1.5 mm from a straight edge
placed in any direction across the area.

13 -3 RCC BEARINGS

Material for RCC bearings, namely, cement, sand, aggregates and mild steel reinforcement
shall conform to Section 6 of these Specifications.

The bearings shall be of the strength specified on the drawings and shall comply with the
Specifications for plain or reinforced cement concrete for structures given in Section 11.
Mild steel reinforcement shall conform to Section 10.

13 -4 STEEL BEARINGS

13-4.1 Materials

The material for steel bearings shall conform to the requirements of Section 6.

Technical Specifications : Expansion Joints 131

 Cast steel components thicker than 200 mm shall be subjected to radiographic, ultrasonic or
any other accepted method of testing which is used to check the quality of casting.

The grease for bearings shall conform to the requirements of IS : 1002 until similar Nepal’s
Standards are in place.

13-4.2 Construction Operations

All works shall strictly conform to the drawings and shall be in accordance with the
provisions of this section. Care shall be taken to ensure that all parts of an assembly fit
accurately together. The workmanship shall satisfy all relevant provisions laid down in
Section 12.

Knuckle pins, rolling surfaces of the rollers and bearing surface of the bearing plate shall be
machined and all bolt holes shall be drilled. The whole bearings shall be fitted and finished
as required for good quality machined work to the satisfaction of the Engineer. However, in
case of bearings which are to be grouted or bedded on a suitable yielding material, such steel
surface which is to be in permanent contact with the grout or the yielding material may be left
un-machined.

13.4.3 Tolerances

Tolerances for its individual components or of the assembled bearings shall be according to
the drawings or subjected to the approval of the Engineer. Unless otherwise specified, the
following tolerances shall be maintained.

13-4.3.1 Diameter of Rollers, Knuckle Pins and Bores

Tolerances on diameter of rollers and all convex surfaces shall conform to K7 of IS : 919
until similar Nepal’s Standards are in place.

Tolerances on diameter of all concave surfaces shall conform to D8 of IS : 919 until similar
Nepal’s Standards are in place.

13-4.3.2 Height of Bearings

Tolerance on the height of any component cast shall not exceed + 0.5 mm. No minus
tolerance will be allowed. The edges of all ribs shall be parallel throughout their length.

13-4.3.3 Base Plate

Tolerance on length and width of the base plate shall not exceed ± 5 mm. All rolling, rocking
and sliding surfaces shall be machined to a smooth finish having a maximum mean deviation
of 20 micron, as per IS : 3073 until similar Nepal’s Standards are in place.

13 -5 ELASTOMERIC BEARINGS

13-5.1 General

The term ‘bearing’ in this case refers to an elastomeric bearing.

Technical Specifications : Expansion Joints 132

 The elastomeric bearing shall consist of one or more internal layers of elastomer bonded to
internal steel laminates by the process of vulcanisation. The bearing shall cater for
translation and/or rotation of the superstructure by elastic deformation.

For the construction of rural and agricultural road bridges, the use of elastomeric bearings is
considered to be minimum. When required, they shall generally be ordered directly from the
manufacturers as per the requirements. Therefore, the details of elastomeric bearings are not
fully covered in this section.

13-5.2 Materials

13-5.2.1 Elastomer

The elastomer to be used for bearings shall be made from natural or synthetic rubber and
satisfy the physical properties given in Table 13 -5. The test specimens required for the
tests shall be selected from the centre layer of the bearings.

Table 13 -5 : Physical Properties of Elastomeric Bearings

S. Item ASTM Requirement

No. Designation
I Durometer Hardness D-2240 55 to 70 (± 5 points from the
nominated value)
II Ultimate Tensile Strain (%) D-412 450 for 55 grade
400 for 60 grade
300 for 70 grade
III Tensile Strength (N/mm2) D-412 17.5 minimum
13.5 minimum for natural
rubber of hardness greater
than 65
IV Adhesion to Metal (N/mm) D-29 (Method B) 9
V Tear Resistance (N/mm) D-624 (DIEC) 40
VI Compression set 22 hrs at 700C D-395 (Method B) 25 maximum
(%)
VII Ozone Resistance D-1149 no cracks
20% strain 100 hrs at 3800C ± 10C
(1 part per million in air by
volume)
VIII Accelerated ageing 70 hrs, 1000C D-573
Hardness increase < 10
Tensile strength reduction < 15% of original
Elongation at break reduction < 25% of original
IX Low Temperature Stiffness D-797 70 maximum
Young’s Modulus at 400C (N/mm2)

13-5.2.2 Adhesive

Adhesives used in bearing location or attachment to bridge decks shall be subjected to the
approval by the Engineer. It shall be of high viscosity resins which are cold setting and free
of solvent. Adhesives shall not be used to bond layers of cured elastomer.

13-5.2.3 Reinforcement

Technical Specifications : Expansion Joints 133

 Mild steel used for plate reinforcement shall comply with the requirements of IS : 226.
13-5.2.4 Certification

The Contractor/Supplier shall furnish to the Engineer a certification by the manufacturer

which states that the elastomer and fabric (if used) in the elastomeric bearing conforms to all
the above requirements. The certification shall be supported by a certified copy of the results
of tests performed by the manufacturer upon samples of elastomer and fabric to be used in
the bearings.

13-5.3 General Requirements

The thickness of a single layer bearing shall not exceed 20% of the least plan dimension.
The total thickness of a laminated bearing shall not exceed 40% of the least plan dimension.

The thickness of any internal layer of elastomer shall not be less than 6 mm nor greater than
12 mm. The thickness of outer plates shall be not less than 3 mm and that of inner plate not
less than 1.5 mm. Metal plates in which dowels are located shall be, in general, not less than
6 mm thick. The edges of all plates shall be lightly rounded to approximately 5 mm radii.
The metal plates referred above should not be composed of thinner plates joined together.

Laminated bearings shall have side cover of elastomer of minimum thickness of 6 mm to

protect the ends of the steel plates and to give a reduced surface strain to that occurring at the
edge of the bonded plates. However, the side cover of elastomer shall not be considered in
evaluation of deformations. The cover of elastomer at the top and bottom surfaces shall
neither be less than 3 mm nor more than half the thickness of internal layer. The outer cover
at top and bottom surfaces, having thickness less than half that of a single internal layer and
not exceeding 3 mm, may be considered as a simple protection and need not, therefore, be
considered in calculating deflections. Where the above elastomer covers are provided as
shown in the following figure, there is no objection in keeping the thickness of the top most
and bottom most plates same as that of inner plates. 6 mm SIDE COVER (minimum)

3 mm < OUTER
ELASTOMER
COVER < t/2

ELASTOMER METAL LAMINATIONS

LAYER 1.5 mm (min) thickness
thickness (t)

Figure 13 -5

Bearings shall be set back from the edge of a bearing surface by a distance not less than the
thickness of the layer of elastomer which is in contact with the bearing surface. This allows
the elastomer to spread under load.

Bearings may be located in position by means of dowels or studs or other devices.

Alternately, the bearings may be bonded to the structure with approved adhesives which shall
generally be of high viscosity resin.

Technical Specifications : Expansion Joints 134

 For spans on an inclined grade and without hinge bearings, sole plates shall be provided and
be levelled so that the masonry surfaces and the bearing shall be kept horizontal.

To facilitate maintenance, the ends of trusses and plate girders shall preferably be supported
on plates and pedestals so that there is at least 15 cm clearance between the bottom chord or
flange and the sub-structure. The plan dimensions of the bearings to be finally adopted shall
preferably be selected from series R20 of IS : 1076 until similar Nepal’s Standards are in
place.

Only one bearing shall be permitted to be placed under a girder. Further, bearings of
different sizes must not be placed next to each other to support a span.

The bearings shall be fully moulded when metal laminations are used. These laminated
elastomeric bearings shall consist of one or more elastomer slabs bonded to metal plates so as
to form a sandwich arrangement. Such fully moulded bearings shall be manufactured to the
required size.

The bond between elastomers and metal or fabric shall be such that, when a sample is tested
for separation, failure shall occur within the elastomers but not between the elastomer and the
metal.

13-5.4 Tolerances

The following tolerances are acceptable for the respective cases:

i. Length : 0 mm
ii. Width : +5 mm
iii. Thickness for single layer pad : ± 0.5 mm
iv. Total thickness ‘h’ of finished bearings
 10 < h  30 mm : ± 0.5 mm
 30 < h  50 mm : ± 0.8 mm
 50 < h  80 mm : ± 0.9 mm
 80 < h  120 mm : ± 1.1 mm.

For a finished bearing, the parallelism of the individual elastomer laminations shall not
exceed the tolerances specified at (iii) above when measured at the extremities of the
laminations.

13-5.5 Protection against Corrosion

Proper arrangement shall be made to avoid corrosion of metal plates or deterioration of

adhesive by encasing the bearings totally in elastomer or by some other methods approved by
the Engineer.

13 -6 PAPER BEARINGS FOR SLABS

Paper bearings shall be reinforced bitumen laminated kraft paper conforming to the
requirements of IS : 1398 until similar Nepal’s Standards are in place.

Technical Specifications : Expansion Joints 135

 While concreting the slab, care shall be taken to prevent the bearing material from being
displaced.

13 -7 INSPECTION AND TESTING

Where any patents are used, the manufacturer’s certificate with test proofs shall be submitted
along with the design and be approved by the Engineer before their use on work.

13 -8 MEASUREMENTS FOR PAYMENT

Bearings shall be measured in numbers. Expansion and fixed bearings shall be counted
separately and with respect to their capacities and particular Specifications.

Paper bearing shall be measured in square metres.

13 -9 RATE

The contract unit rate for each type of bearing shall include the cost of supplying and fixing
the bearings in position as specified in the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

The contract unit rate shall also include the cost of samples and their testing when desired by
the Engineer.

In case of steel bearings, the contract unit rate shall include the cost of all nuts, bolts,
supplying and filling the grease boxes with the specified grease, cost of all tests prescribed in
the Specifications and shown on the drawings.

When the office supplies the bearings, the contract unit rate for fixing them shall include
 the cost of anchor bolts,
 their fixing,
 transport of bearings from the place of supply to the site,
 handling and placing them in position, and
 supplying and filling the grease in grease boxes as per directions of the Engineer.

In case of elastomeric bearings, the contract unit rate shall also include the cost of adhesives
for fixing them.

14

Expansion Joints

Technical Specifications : Expansion Joints 136

 137
Technical Specifications : Expansion Joints
14 -1 GENERAL

Expansion joints shall be constructed according to the details shown on the drawings.

The position of all bolts cast into concrete and holes drilled in plates shall be accurately
determined from templates.

Vehicular traffic shall not be allowed or the expansion joint after its construction for such
period as may be determined by the Engineer.

14 -2 FABRICATION

14-2.1 Open Joints

Open joints shall be constructed at the locations shown on the drawings using a wood strip,
metal plate or other suitable material which is subsequently removed. When removing the
material, care shall be exercised to avoid chipping or breaking the corners of the concrete.
The edge of the concrete at the joints shall be edge finished. Reinforcement shall not extend
across an open joint.

14-2.2 Filled Joints

The filler material shall conform to clause 14-2.4.

When performing the filler shown in the drawings, the filler shall be placed in correct
position before concrete is placed against the filler. The filler material shall form part of the
joint. While concreting the slab, care shall be taken to prevent the filler material being
displaced. After the work is completed, the exposed face of the joint shall be cleaned of all
loose material sticking to it.

14-2.3 Steel Work

Steel plates, angles or other structural shapes provided in the expansion joints shall
 conform to the provisions made in Section 12;
 be accurately shaped to the section of concrete deck; and
 be hot-dip galvanised after fabrication.

Positive methods shall be employed in placing the assemblies to keep them in correct
positions during the placing of concrete. Care shall be taken to avoid impairment of the
clearance in any manner.

14-2.4 Filler Material at Expansion Joints

The material used for filling the expansion joints shall be bitumen impregnated felt,
elastomer or any other suitable material as specified on the drawings. Impregnated felt shall
conform to the requirements of IS : 1838 until similar Nepal’s Standards are in place. It shall
be approved by the Engineer prior to its application. The joint filler shall consist of large
pieces. Assembly of small pieces to make up the required size shall be avoided.

Technical Specifications : Pipe Culverts 138

14 -3 MEASUREMENTS FOR PAYMENT

The expansion joints shall be measured in linear metres.

14 -4 RATE

The contract unit rate for the expansion joints shall include the cost of all labour, materials
and other incidentals which are required to fix the joints completely in all respects as per the
drawings and the Specifications.

15

Pipe Culverts

Technical Specifications : Pipe Culverts 139

15 -1 GENERAL

This work shall consist of furnishing and installing reinforced cement concrete pipes having
the type, diameter and length required at locations shown on the drawings or as directed by
the Engineer. All such works shall be in accordance with the requirements of these
Specifications.

15 -2 MATERIALS

All materials used in the construction of pipe culverts shall conform to the requirements of
Section 6. Each consignment of cement concrete pipes shall be inspected, tested (if
necessary) and approved by the Engineer either at the place of manufacture or at the site
before their use in the works.

15 -3 EXCAVATION FOR PIPE

The foundation bed for pipe culverts shall be excavated true to the lines and grades shown on
the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The pipes shall be placed in shallow excavation
of the natural ground or in open trenches cut in existing embankments according to the levels
shown on the drawings. In case of high embankments where the height of the fill is more
than three times the external diameter of the pipe, the embankment shall first be built to a
height which is equal to the external diameter of the pipe and to a width which is not less
than five times the external diameter in each side of the pipe. Then, a trench shall be
excavated and the pipe shall be laid.

Where trenching is involved, its width on either side of the pipe shall not be
 less than 150 mm
 nor more than one-third the diameter of the pipe.
The sides of the trench shall be as vertical as they could be.

During excavation, if the material encountered is soft, spongy or other unstable soil and
unless other special construction methods are employed under special provisions, such
unsuitable material shall be removed to such depth, width and length as directed by the
Engineer. The excavation shall then be backfilled with approved granular material which
shall be properly shaped and thoroughly compacted up to the specified level.

Where bed-rock or boulder strata are encountered, excavation shall be continued at least 200
mm below the bottom level of the pipe with prior permission of the Engineer. All rock and
boulders in this area shall be removed and the space in between shall be filled with approved
earth which is free from stone and fragmented materials. Then, the fill shall be shaped to the
requirements and be thoroughly compacted to provide adequate support for the pipe.

Trenches shall be kept free from water until the pipes are installed and subsequently, the
joints have hardened.

15 -4 BEDDING FOR PIPE

The bedding surface shall provide a firm foundation of uniform density throughout the length
of the culvert.

Technical Specifications : Boring at Site 140

 The bedding surface shall conform to the specified levels and grade and shall be of one of the
following two types as specified on the drawings.

15-4.1 First Class Bedding

Under first class bedding, the pipe shall be evenly bedded on a continuous layer of well
compacted approved granular material which is shaped concentrically to fit the lower part of
the pipe exterior for at least 10% of its overall height or otherwise shown on the drawings.
The bedding material shall be well graded sand or another granular material passing 4.75 mm
sieve. The thickness of the bedding layer shall be as shown on the drawings and in no case
shall it be less than 75 mm.

15-4.2 Concrete Cradle Bedding

When indicated on the drawings or directed by the Engineer, the pipe shall be bedded in a
cradle which is constructed of concrete having a mix not leaner than M 15 and conforming to
Section 11. The shape and dimensions of the cradle shall be as indicated on the drawings.
The pipes shall be laid on concrete bedding before the setting of concrete.

15 -5 LAYING OF PIPE

No pipe shall be placed in position until the foundations have been approved by the Engineer.
Where two or more pipes are to be laid adjacent to each other, they shall be separated by a
distance equal to at least half the diameter of the pipe subject to a minimum of 450 mm.

The laying of pipes on the prepared foundation shall start from the outlet and proceed
towards the inlet and be completed to the specified lines and grades. The pipes shall be fitted
and matched so that when laid in work, they form a culvert with a smooth and uniform invert.

Any pipe found defective or damaged during laying shall be removed at the cost of the
Contractor/Users’ Group.

15 -6 JOINTING

The pipes shall be jointed either by collar joint or by flush joint.

15-6.1 Collar Joint

In a collar joint, the collars shall be of RCC having 150 to 200 mm width and the same
strength as of the pipes to be jointed. Caulking space shall be between 13 and 20 mm
according to the diameter of the pipes. Caulking material shall be slightly wet mix of cement
and sand in the ratio of 1:2 rammed with caulking irons. Before caulking, the collar shall be
so placed that its centre coincides with the joint and an even annular space is left between the
collar and the pipe.

15-6.2 Flush Joint

Flush joint may be internal flush joint or external flush joint. In either case, the ends of the
pipes shall be specially shaped to form a self centering joint with a jointing space of 13 mm
wide. The jointing space shall be filled with mortar of cement and sand having a ratio of 1:2

Technical Specifications : Boring at Site 141

 which is mixed sufficiently dry to remain in position when forced with a trowel or rammer.
Care shall be taken to fill all voids as well as to remove excess mortar.

15-6.3 Jointing Pipes under Light Hydraulic Pressures

When jointing pipe lines which are under light hydraulic pressures, the recess at the end of
the pipe shall be filled with jute braiding dipped in hot bitumen or other suitable approved
compound. Pipes shall be so jointed that the bitumen ring of one pipe shall set into the recess
of the next pipe. The ring shall be thoroughly compressed by jacking or by any other suitable
means.

15-6.4 Joints (General)

All joints shall be made with care so that their interior surface is smooth and consistent with
the interior surface of the pipes. After finishing, the joint shall be kept covered and damp for
at least four days.

15 -7 BACKFILLING

Trenches shall be backfilled immediately after the pipes have been laid and the jointing
material has been hardened. The backfill soil shall be clean and free from
 boulders,
 large roots,
 excessive amounts of sods or other organic matter, and
 lumps
and shall be approved by the Engineer.

Backfilling up to 0.3 m above the top of the pipe shall be carefully done. The soil shall be
thoroughly rammed, tamped or vibrated in layers of not more than 150 mm thickness.
Particular care shall be given in instances where the materials are to be compacted under the
haunches of the pipes.

Filling of the trench shall be carried out simultaneously on both sides of the pipe in such a
manner that unequal pressures do not occur on the pipe surface.

In case of high embankments, after filling the trench up to the top of the pipe in the above
said manner, a loose fill of a depth equal to external diameter of the pipe shall be placed over
the pipe before further layers are added and compacted.

15 -8 HEAD WALLS AND OTHER ANCILLARY WORKS

Headwalls, wing walls, aprons and other ancillary works shall be constructed in accordance
with the details shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Masonry for the walls
shall conform to the requirements given in Sections 7,8 and 11 as applicable.

The work on aprons shall conform to the requirements given in Section 17 of the
Specifications.

Technical Specifications : Boring at Site 142

15 -9 OPENING TO TRAFFIC

No traffic shall be permitted to cross the pipe line unless the earth filling above the pipe is at
least 0.6 m.

15 -10 MEASUREMENTS FOR PAYMENT

RCC pipe culverts shall be measured along their centre line between the inlet and outlet ends
in linear metres.

Selected granular material and cement concrete for pipe bedding shall be measured as laid in
cubic metres. Ancillary works like headwalls, etc. shall be measured as described in the
respective Sections of the Specifications.

15 -11 RATE

The contract unit rate for the pipe shall include the cost of pipe including loading, unloading,
hauling, handling, storing, laying in position and jointing of the pipe completely.

Ancillary works such as excavation including backfilling, concrete and masonry shall be paid
for separately as provided under the respective clauses.

16

Boring at Site

Technical Specifications : Boring at Site 143

16 -1 DESCRIPTION

The investigation shall consist of a boring programme and detailed sampling. In-situ density
tests, bearing capacity tests, in-situ vane shear tests and more advanced means of logging of
bore holes by radio-active methods shall be done for detailed investigation as specified in the
contract or in special provisions.

All in-site tests shall be supplemented by laboratory investigations. Field tests shall be
carried out as per IS : 1888, IS : 2131, IS : 2720 and IS : 4434 until similar Nepal’s Standards
are in place.

16 -2 GENERAL

The location of the boring hole shall be either given or determined by the Engineer. The
soundings by dynamic method shall be carried out in bore holes using a standard sampler as
specified in IS : 2131 until similar Nepal’s Standard are in place.

16 -3 BORINGS

Boring shall be done by any of the following methods depending upon the soil type and type
of samples required for investigation:
(i) Auger boring
(ii) Shell and auger boring
(iii) Percussion boring
(iv) Wash boring
(v) Rotary boring.

16 -4 METHODS OF SAMPLING

There are two types of samples, viz.,

(a) Disturbed sample
(b) Undisturbed sample.

The usual methods for sampling are given below:

Table 16 -4 : Methods of Sampling

Nature of Ground Type of Sample Method of Sampling

Soil Disturbed Hand samples
Auger samples (in clays)
Shell samples (in sand)

Undisturbed Hand samples

Tube samples
Rock Disturbed Wash samples from percussion or
rotary drilling

Undisturbed Cores
16 -5 PROCEDURE FOR TAKING SAMPLES

Technical Specifications : Protection Work 144

16-5.1 Disturbed Soil Samples

Disturbed samples of soils shall be obtained in the course of excavation and boring. For
procuring samples from the ground which is below the ground water level, special type of
samplers shall be used. The size of sample generally required shall be as given below:

Table 16 -5 : Size of Soil Sample Required

S. Purpose of Sample Soil Type Weight of

No. Sample
Required
(kg)
i  Soil identification Cohesive soils 1
 Natural moisture content tests
 Mechanical analysis Sands and gravels 3
 Index properties
 Chemical tests
ii  Compaction tests Cohesive soils and 12.5
sand
iii  Comprehensive examination Cohesive soils and 25 to 50
of construction materials sands
including soil stabilisation 50 to 100
Gravelly soils

While taking out disturbed soil samples, Standard Penetration Tests may also be conducted to
find out the bearing capacity of the sub-soils at specified levels/depths.

16-5.2 Undisturbed Soil Samples

Samples shall be obtained in such a manner that their moisture content and structure do not
get altered. These may be ensured by careful protection and packing as well as by the use of
a correctly designed sampler.

In soft clay, the sampling procedure may have to be supplemented by in-situ vane shear tests
as per IS : 4434.

For compression test samples, a core having a diameter of 40 mm and a length about 150 to
200 mm may be sufficient. But for other laboratory tests, a core of 75 mm diameter and 300
mm long shall be taken unless otherwise specified by the Engineer. The upper few
millimetres of both types of sample shall be rejected as the soil at the bottom of the bore hole
usually gets disturbed by the boring tools.

16-5.3 Disturbed Rock Samples

The sludge from percussion borings or from rotary borings which have failed to yield a core
shall be collected for a disturbed sample. It may be recovered by settlement in a trough
through the circulation of water.

16-5.4 Undisturbed Rock Samples

Technical Specifications : Protection Work 145

 Block samples taken from rock formation shall be dressed to a size of about 90 x 75 x 50
mm.
For core samples : Cores of rock shall be taken by means of rotary drills fitted with a coring
bit having a core retainer, if warranted.

16 -6 RECORDS OF BORINGS AND TRIAL PITS

For all borings and trial pits, necessary information as detailed below shall be given. A site
plan showing the locations of bore holes shall also be attached.
i. Agency;
ii. Location, with reference map;
iii. Pit number;
iv. Reduced level (R.L.) of ground surface or other reference point;
v. Dates, started and completed;
vi. Name of the supervisor;
vii. Scales of plans and sections;
viii. Dimensions, methods of advancing exploration such as by hand tools, blasting, boring,
etc.;
ix. General description of strata met with and the RLs at which they are met;
x. Position and attitude of contacts, faults, strong joint, slicken sides, etc.;
xi. Inflow of water, methods of controlling the water, required capacity of pumps for
dewatering;
xii. The level at which the sub-soil water is met with;
xiii. Dip and strike of bedding and of cleavage; and
xiv. Any other information and remarks.

16 -7 PROTECTION, HANDLING AND LABELLING OF SAMPLES

Care shall be taken in handling and labelling of samples so that they are received in a fit state
for examination and testing and can be correctly identified as coming from a specified trial
pit or boring.

16 -8 MEASUREMENTS FOR PAYMENT

The work of boring and trial pits shall be considered as incidental to the foundation works
and nothing extra shall be paid unless otherwise specified in the contract. If it is to be paid
separately, the boring shall be measured in running metres and the trial pits in cubic metres.

16 -9 RATE

The contract unit rate shall include the cost of all labour, materials, precautionary measures
and tools, plant and all equipment required for
 doing boring or making pits as per these Specifications,
 taking out and packing the samples, and
 sending and getting them tested in approved laboratories.

Technical Specifications : Protection Work 146

17

Protection Work

Technical Specifications : Protection Work 147

17 -1 APRON

17-1.1 Description

This work shall consist of laying boulders directly or in gabion crates on the bed of rivers for
protection against scour.

17-1.2 General

The stones used in apron shall be sound, hard, durable and fairly regular in shape. Stones
subject to marked deterioration by water or weather shall not be used.

The thickness and shape of apron shall be as indicated in the drawings.

The surface on which the apron is to be laid shall be levelled and prepared for the length and
width as shown on the drawings.

17-1.3 Laying Boulder Apron

The size of stone shall be as large as possible. In no case, shall any fragment weigh less than
40 kg. The specific gravity of stones shall be as high as possible and it shall not be less than
2.50.

To ensure regular and orderly disposition of the full intended quantity of stone in the apron,
template cross walls in dry masonry shall be built about a metre thick and to the full height of
the specified thickness of the apron at intervals of 30 m all along the length and width of the
apron. Within these walls, the stone shall then be hand-packed.

17-1.4 Laying GI Wire Crates (Gabion) and Mattresses in the Apron

The crates shall be made from 5 mm galvanised iron wire. The mesh of the crate shall not be
more than 150 mm.

Wire crates for shallow or accessible situations shall be 3 m x 1 m x 0.5 m in size. Where
there is a chance of overturning, the crate shall be divided into 1.5 m compartments by cross
netting.

For deep or inaccessible situations, wire crates can be made smaller subject to the approval of
the Engineer.

Wire crates built in-situ shall not be larger than 3 m x 1 m x 1 m nor smaller than 2 m x 1 m x
0.3 m. Sides of large crates shall be securely stayed at intervals of not more than 1.5 m to
prevent bulging.

The netting shall be made by fixing a row of spikes on a beam at a spacing equal to the mesh.
The beam must be a little longer than the width of netting required. The wire is to be cut to
lengths about three times the length of the net required. Each piece is bent at the middle and
circled around one of the spikes. Then, the weaving shall commence from one corner.

A double twist shall be given at each intersection. This twisting shall be carefully done by
means of a strong iron bar. In twisting, 5 half turns shall be given to the bar at each splice.

Technical Specifications : Protection Work 148

 The bottom and two ends of the crate or mattress shall be made at one time. The other two
sides shall be made separately and shall be secured to the bottom and to the ends by twisting
adjacent wires together. The top of the crate shall be made separately. It shall be fixed in the
same manner as the sides after the crate or mattress has been filled with stones.

Wherever possible, crates shall be placed in position before filling with boulders. The crates
shall be filled carefully by hand-packing of the boulders as tightly as possible. Mere
throwing of stones or boulders shall not be permitted.

17 -2 PITCHING ON SLOPES

17-2.1 Description

The work “pitching” shall consist of covering the slopes of guide banks, river training works
and road embankments with stones, boulders or bricks over a layer of granular material called
‘filter’.

17-2.2 General

The pitching shall be provided as indicated on the drawings.

Stones subjected to marked deterioration by water or weather shall not be accepted. The
stones shall be sound, hard, durable and fairly regular in shape. The largest possible stones
shall be supplied. In no case, shall any fragment of stone weigh less than 40 kg unless
otherwise permitted by the Engineer. The sizes of spalls shall be minimum of 25 mm and
shall be suitable to fill the voids in the pitching.

To drain out seepage water and to prevent erosion of the base material, one or more layers of
graded materials, commonly known as a filter medium, shall be provided underneath the
pitching. The material for the filter shall consist of sound gravel, stone or brick ballast and
coarse sand. For a single-layer filter, the compacted thickness shall not be less than 150 mm.
For a multi-layer filter, the compacted thickness of each layer shall not be less than 115 mm.

The gradation of the filter material shall satisfy the following requirements:

Requirements for filter material

A. (i) D15 of Filter = 5 to 40, provided that the filter does not contain
D15 of Base Material more than 5% of material finer than 0.075
mm.
Note 1 : Filter may not be required if embankment consists of CH or Ch soils having a liquid limit of
greater than 30 and a resistance to surface erosion.
Note 2 : In this case, if a layer of material is used as bedding for pitching then it shall be well graded
and its D85 size shall be at least twice the size of maximum void in pitching.
Note 3 : D15 means the size of the sieve that allows 15% by weight of the filter material to pass through
it.

(ii) D15 of Filter = 5 or less.

D85 of Base Material

(iii) The grain-size curve of the filter should be roughly parallel to that of the base
material.

Technical Specifications : Protection Work 149

 B. If more than one filter layer is required, the same requirement as given above shall be
followed. The finer filter shall be considered as the base material for selection of
gradation of the coarser filter.

C. The filter material shall be suitably compacted to a firm condition.

17-2.3 Construction Operations

Before laying the pitching, the sides of banks shall be trimmed to the required slope and
profiles. Prior to trimming, the line shall be demarcated by pegs fixed at intervals of 3 m in
order to ensure regular straight work and an uniform slope throughout. Depressions shall be
filled and thoroughly compacted.

The granular filter material shall be laid over the prepared base and suitably compacted to a
thickness of 150 mm or as specified in the drawings.

The lowest course of pitching shall be started from the toe wall. Then, the pitching operation
shall progress in similar courses upward. The toe wall shall be in dry rubble masonry (un-
coursed) conforming to clause 8-3.3 in case of rubble pitching. It shall be in brick work in
cement mortar 1:4 (cement : sand) in case of brick pitching.

The stone pitching shall commence in a trench below the toe of the slope. Stones shall be
placed by hand to the required length, thickness and depth as per the drawings. Stones shall
be set normal to the slope and placed so that the largest dimension is perpendicular to the
face of the slope, unless such dimension is greater than the specified thickness of pitching.
The largest stones shall be placed in the bottom courses and shall be used as headers for
subsequent courses.

When full depth of pitching can be formed with a single stone, the stones shall be laid
breaking joints and all interstices between adjacent stones shall be filled in with spalls of the
proper size and wedged in with hammers to ensure tight packing.

When two or more layers of stones must be laid to obtain the design thickness of pitching,
dry masonry shall be used and stones shall be well bonded.

Where bricks are to be used, the same shall be laid on the prepared base in one or more layers
as specified. When more than one layer is to be adopted, adjacent layers shall be properly
bonded by means of a sufficient number of pin headers extending from one layer to the other.
The bond used in laying shall be as directed by the Engineer.

17 -3 RUBBLE STONE/BRICK FLOORING OVER CEMENT CONCRETE BEDDING

17-3.1 Description

This work shall consist of constructing rubble stone/brick flooring in cement mortar laid over
a cement concrete bedding.

17-3.2 Construction Operations

Technical Specifications : Protection Work 150

 The base for the cement concrete bedding shall be prepared to the specified levels and slope
and compacted suitably to have an even bedding surface.
Cement concrete of the specified mix shall then be laid to the required thickness in
accordance with the provisions given in Section 11 except that the surface of the concrete
shall not be given a smooth finish. The paving work shall start only after the concrete has
been in position for at least 48 hours.

Where rubble stone is specified, the thickness of paving shall be made up with one stone
only. The stones shall be bedded on a layer of cement mortar prepared in accordance with
clause 7 -1. Spalls shall be used to fill the voids. The joints shall then be filled with cement
mortar and finished neatly. The stone shall break joints and the joint shall not exceed 20 mm
in thickness.

Where bricks are to be used, the flooring shall be built up in one or more layers as specified.
Each layer of brick shall be bedded on cement mortar and the joints shall be filled with
cement mortar. The bond used for laying shall be as directed by the Engineer. The thickness
of the joints shall not exceed 10 mm.

17 -4 DRY RUBBLE/BRICK FLOORING

This work shall consist of constructing dry rubble stone/brick flooring at cross drainage
works.

The base for flooring shall be prepared to the specified levels and slope and compacted
suitably with hand rammers or by other means to give an even bedding.

Where rubble stone is specified, the thickness of flooring shall be made with one stone only.
The stones shall be laid closely breaking joints and all joints shall be filled with spalls of the
proper size and wedged in with rammers to ensure tight packing.

Where brick is the material to be used, the same shall be laid closely on the prepared base in
one or more layers as specified. The bond used shall be as directed by the Engineer.

17 -5 MEASUREMENTS FOR PAYMENT

The protection works shall be measured as described below:

If directed by the Engineer, the materials may have to be stacked at site for measurement
before laying. No extra payment shall be made to the Contractor for such stacking.

The boulders and wire crates (gabion) in apron shall be measured in cubic metres.

The filter and stone pitching shall be measured separately in cubic metres, unless otherwise
specified.

Rubble stone flooring and cement concrete bedding shall be measured in cubic metres for
each class of material.

Brick flooring shall be measured in square metres for one or two layers as specified.

Technical Specifications : Protection Work 151

 Preparation of base for laying the flooring shall be deemed incidental to the work.

For laying apron, excavation up to an average depth of 15 cm shall be deemed to be included

in the main item and shall not be measured separately, unless otherwise specified.
Excavation for more than 15 cm depth shall be measured in cubic metres as given in clause 2
-4.

17 -6 RATE

The contract unit rate for one cubic metre of finished work of apron shall include the cost of
all labour, materials required to complete the work as per the Specifications. Excavation up
to an average depth of 15 cm shall also be deemed to be included in this rate as dressing of
the bed. Excavation beyond this depth shall be paid separately, unless otherwise specified.

The contract unit rate for one cubic metre of filter or stone pitching on slopes shall include
the cost of preparing the base; placing materials to the profile; laying and compacting the
filter; and stone pitching of dry rubble/brick revetment for embankment slopes to the
specified thickness, lines, curves, slopes and levels including the cost of all labour, materials
required to complete the work as per the Specifications.

The contract unit rate for rubble stone/brick flooring shall include the cost of all labour and
materials required to complete the work as per the Specifications and drawings.

Technical Specifications : Protection Work 152

18

Bio-engineering Work
Extracted from the Bio-engineering Information of the Department of Roads, Ministry of
Works and Transport

Technical Specifications : Protection Work 153

18 -1 PROVISION OF SEED

18-1.1 General

18-1.1.1 The Contractor/Users’ Group shall provide or collect seeds of the required species in
accordance with the requirements described hereafter, of the species and quantities
required, as and when required. He shall supply all necessary expertise, resources and
facilities to ensure that these requirements are met in full. It is essential that the seed is of a
high quality as it forms the basis to the success of any bio-engineering programme.

18-1.1.2 The Engineer will give indications as to the expected amounts of seeds required and the
time of availability. But it is the Contractor/Users' Group responsibility to ensure that
adequate quantities of seeds are obtained in a timely fashion.

18-1.1.3 The weights to be specified are for sun-dried seeds separated completely from fruiting
bodies and other unwanted parts, and ready for storage and subsequent sowing. There is
usually a large discrepancy between this weight and that of the freshly collected, untreated
fruits.

18-1.1.4 Should the Contractor/Users' Group be unable to supply the specified seeds, the advice of
the Engineer should be sought. It may be possible to substitute other species. Some
commercial seed sources in Nepal and India are known to supply old or badly treated seeds.
For this reason, seed should not be obtained commercially without the Engineer's written
authority.

18-1.2 Grass Seed Collection

18-1.2.1 The species of grass seeds to be collected will be determined by the Engineer. The
Contractor/User's Group will be responsible for determining seed sources, though these
may be specified by the Engineer's instructions. Seeds should normally be collected in or
very close to VDC of use or the project area.

18-1.2.2 If the Engineer does not specify the species, then the current approved list of bio-
engineering plants, as determined by the Geo-Environmental Unit of the Department of
Roads (DoR) or the Designs and Technology Promotion Section (DTPS) of the Department
of Local Infrastructure Development and Agricultural Roads (DoLIDAR) should be
referred to.

18-1.2.3 Seeds must be collected from as many individual plants as possible. With grasses, it is
difficult to determine the best genetic material from the appearance of form; but it is
generally sound practice to select from the largest and most vigorous plants.

18-1.2.4 The Contractor/User's Group may under no circumstances damage or remove the roots of
grass plants while collecting seeds. The Contractor/User's Group is responsible for safety
measures and for making all necessary arrangements with landowners, farmers and the
local District Forest Office, as applicable, before the collection of seeds.

18-1.2.5 Seeds may only be collected when fully ripe. Seeds collected early are not viable when
planted and will cause a failure of the planting programme. The Contractor/User's Group
will be held liable if the germination rate of seeds is seriously lower than the normally
expected percentage (As defined in publications issued by the Geo-Environmental Unit or
the DTPS of DoLIDAR).

Technical Specifications : Protection Work 154

18-1.2.6 Immediately after collection, seeds must be separated from flower heads by the method
normally used by farmers for other grasses. Once separated, the seeds must be sun-dried
before storage.

18-1.2.7 Seeds must be stored in a cool, dry, ventilated building with adequate precautions taken
against pests. Containers should be raised above the floor. They should not be kept in the
same building as cement, or any chemicals, fuels or lubricants. Grass is best stored in bags
made of hessian (jute) sheet. Seeds should be carefully inspected on a weekly basis to
ensure that there is no deterioration or mould formation, or pest attack. Seeds can only be
stored successfully if they have been properly dried in the sun beforehand.

18-1.3 Tree and Shrub Seed Collection

18-1.3.1 The species of tree and shrub seeds to be collected will be determined by the Engineer.
The Contractor/User's Group will be responsible for determining seed sources, though
these may be specified by the Engineer's instructions. Seeds should normally be collected
in or very close to the working area.

18-1.3.2 If the Engineer does not specify the species, then the current approved list of bio-
engineering plants, as determined by the Geo-Environmental Unit of the DoR or the DTPS
of DoLIDAR should be referred to.

18-1.3.3 Seeds must be collected from as many healthy individual plants as possible. In any event,
they must be collected from at least ten individual plants. The plants from which the seeds
are collected must show vigorous growth and good form. Mis-shaven and stunted plants
should not be considered.

18-1.3.4 The Contractor/User's Group must under no circumstances damage plants while collecting
seeds. The Contractor/User's Group is responsible for making all necessary arrangements
with landowners, farmers and the local District Forest Office, as applicable, before the
collection of seeds.

18-1.3.5 The collection of seeds from trees can be a dangerous business, placing the collectors at
considerable personal risk. Specialist equipment and training is available in Nepal for this
purpose. It is the Contractor’s/User's Group’s responsibility to ensure safe working
conditions for his/her employees.

18-1.3.6 Seeds may only be collected when fully ripe. Seeds collected early are not viable when
planted and will cause a failure of the planting programme. The Contractor/User's Group
will be held liable if the germination rate of seeds is seriously lower than the normally
expected percentage.

18-1.3.7 Immediately after collection, seeds must be separated from fruit by the method normally
used by farmers and foresters for this purpose; this depends on the individual species but
may be a time-consuming process for certain fruits. Once separated, the seeds must be sun-
dried before storage.

18-1-3-8 Seeds must be stored in a cool, dry, ventilated building with adequate precautions taken
against pests. Containers should be raised above the floor. They should not be kept in the
same building as cement, or any chemicals, fuels or lubricants. If kept in sealed containers,
seeds should be carefully inspected on a weekly basis to ensure that there is no

Technical Specifications : Protection Work 155

 deterioration or mould formation. Seeds can only be stored successfully if they have been
properly dried in the sun beforehand.

18 -2 PROVISION OF PLANT CUTTINGS

18-2.1 General

18-2.1.1 The species of plants to be collected for vegetative propagation will be determined by the
Engineer. The Contractor/Users' Group will be responsible for determining plant material
sources, though these may be specified by the Engineer's instructions. Plants should
normally be collected in or very close to the working area.

18-2.1.2 If the Engineer does not specify the species, then the current approved list of bio-
engineering plants, as determined by the Geo-Environmental Unit of the DoR or the DTPS
of DoLIDAR should be referred to.

18-2.2 Provision of Grass Cuttings

18-2.2.1 Cuttings of various types must be taken from grass species which are known to propagate
easily by vegetative means.

18-2.2.2 Cuttings must be made from as many healthy individual plants as possible. The plants
from which cuttings are taken must show vigorous growth and good form. Grass clumps
showing stunted growth should not be considered as sources.

18-2.2.3 Apart from the clumps which are dug up to make cuttings, the Contractor/Users' Group
must under no circumstances damage other plants. The Contractor/Users' Group is
responsible for making all necessary arrangements with landowners, farmers and the local
District Forest Office, as applicable, before the making of hardwood cuttings.

18-2.2.4 The type of cuttings to be made depends on the species and should be as shown in the
Table 18 -2 below. If the species used is not listed here, then the latest technical
information provided by the Geo-Environmental Unit or the DTPS of DoLIDAR should be
consulted. If the species is still not covered, then stem and root slip cuttings should be
used.

Table 18 -2 : Details of Plant Cuttings

Local Botanical Name Best Details

Name Propagation
Amliso Thysanolaena maxima Rhizome Stem: 100-150 mm; rhizome: 50-80 mm
cuttings
Babiyo Eulaliopsis binata Slip cuttings Stem: 100-150 mm; root: 30-60 mm
Dhonde Neyraudia reynaudiana Stem/slip Stem cuttings: 2 nodes plus 50 mm each
cuttings side; Slips: stem: 100-150 mm; root: 30-
60 mm
Kans Saccharum spontaneum Slip cuttings Stem: 100-150 mm; root: 30-60 mm
Khar Cymbopogon microtheca Slip cuttings Stem: 100-150 mm; root: 30-60 mm
Khus Vetiver zizanioides Slip cuttings Stem: 100-150 mm; root: 30-60 mm
Napier Pennisetum purpureum Stem cuttings Two nodes plus 50 mm each side

Technical Specifications : Protection Work 156

 Local Botanical Name Best Details
Name Propagation
Narkat Arundo clonax Stem/slip Stem cuttings: 2 nodes plus 50 mm each
cuttings side; Slips: stem: 100-150 mm; root: 30-
60 mm
Padang Himalayacalamus Large slip Stem: 750-1200 mm; root: 100-200 mm
bans hookerianus cuttings
Phurke Arunduella nepalensis Slip cuttings Stem: 100-150 mm; root: 30-60 mm
Sito Neyraudia arundinacea Slip cuttings Stem: 100-150 mm; root: 30-60 mm
Tite Drepanostachyum Large slip Stem: 750-1200 mm; root: 100-200 mm
nigalo intermedium cuttings

18-2.2.5 Where roots are required for the cuttings, grass clumps should carefully dug up. They
must not be pulled hard, as this can damage the material. They must be separated carefully
by hand, using a sharp khukuri or razor blade when necessary. There must be no tearing of
the plant fabric.

18-2.2.6 Stem cuttings must be made using sharp secateurs. The top cut should be made at right
angles to the stem and the bottom cut should be made at 450 to the stem: this is to show the
orientation of planting.

18-2.2.7 Once cuttings have been made, they must be wrapped in wet hessian (jute) immediately.
At all times, cuttings are to be kept moist and as cool as possible, and should be wrapped in
wet hessian between all operations such as digging out of the ground, splitting out,
trimming and planting. Under any circumstances, all cuttings must be planted the same day
that they are made.

18-2..3 Provision of Hardwood Cuttings

18-2.3.1 Hardwood cuttings must be taken from shrubs and trees of species which are known to
propagate easily by vegetative means.

18-2.3.2 Cuttings must be made from as many healthy individual plants as possible. The plants
from which the cuttings are taken must show vigorous growth and good form. Mis-shaven
and stunted plant should not be considered as sources.

18-2.3.3 Apart from the branches from which cuttings are taken, the Contractor/Users' Group must
under no circumstances damage plants while taking cuttings. The Contractor/Users' Group
is responsible for taking safety precautions and for making all necessary arrangements with
landowners, farmers and the local District Forest Office, as applicable, before the making
of hardwood cuttings.

18-2.3.4 Hardwood cuttings must be made from stems which are between 6 and 18 months old.
Materials outside this range are not normally vigorous or strong enough to survive as
cuttings. The Contractor/Users' Group may be held liable if the success rate of cuttings is
seriously lower than the normally expected percentage.

18-2.3.5 Hardwood cuttings must be made using sharp secateurs or a sharp saw. The top cut should
be made at right angles to the stem and the bottom cut should be made at 450 to the stem:

Technical Specifications : Protection Work 157

 this is to show the orientation of planting. Under no circumstances must there be any
damage to the bark of the cutting.

18-2.3.6 Hardwood cuttings are normally 300 to 500 mm in length and 20 to 40 mm in diameter.
This size should not be exceeded for the majority of species unless specified by the
Engineer.

18-2.3.7 A number of species can be propagated using large truncheon cuttings. In this category fall
chuletro (Brassaiopsis hainla), dabdabe (Garuga pinnata), kavro (Ficus lacor), phaledo
(Erythrina species) and Gliricidia sepium. Hardwood cuttings for these species should be in
the range of 1500 to 2500 mm in length and 30 to 80 mm in diameter unless otherwise
specified.

18-2.3.8 Once cuttings have been made, they must be wrapped in wet hessian jute immediately. At
all times, cuttings are to be kept moist and as cool as possible, and should be wrapped in
wet hessian between all operations such as taking from the parent plant, trimming and
planting. Under any circumstances, all cuttings must be planted the same day that they are
made.

18 -3 NURSERY CONSTRUCTION

18-3.1 General

18-3.1.1 The Contractor/Users' Group shall provide nurseries to contribute stocks of grasses, shrubs
and trees for planting operations as required by the Engineer. This shall be done according
to the specifications described hereunder, as and when required by the Engineer. The
Contractor/Users' Group shall supply all necessary expertise, resources and facilities to
ensure that these requirements are met.

18-3.1.2 The establishment and effective operation of plant nurseries is a skilled business requiring
experienced and trained staff. These specifications alone do not provide all the information
needed to set up and run nurseries. The Contractor/Users' Group should seek the advice of
specialist agencies and should refer to the large number of reference books available on the
subject.

18-3.1.3 The purpose of a nursery is to supply good quality, healthy plants of the correct type and
species, at the precise time they are required, and at a reasonable cost.

18-3.2 Nursery Establishment

18-3.2.1 The Contractor/Users' Group shall provide nursery facilities adequate to supply all of the
stock required for planting operations. Alternatively, he/she may procure planting stock
from elsewhere at the time of site planting, providing it is of a standard acceptable to the
Engineer and as described hereunder.

18-3.2.2 In selecting a site for a nursery, the Contractor/Users' Group must fulfil the following
requirements.

i) Nurseries must be as close as possible to all sites to be planted. They must be at the
same altitude as, and in an identical climatic area to, the sites to be planted.

Technical Specifications : Protection Work 158

 ii) Wherever possible, nurseries must be established on land owned by the DDCs if it is
available and bio-physically suitable. If it is not, other land of His Majesty's
Government should be used if it is available.

iii) Nurseries should have a reliable and adequate supply of water which remains
constant throughout the later part of the dry season.

iv) Nurseries should have all weather vehicular access.

v) Nurseries should have a perimeter of stock proof fencing, effective against all
domestic animals.

vi) Nurseries should have a weather and pest-proof office cum seed store and proper
storage facilities for seed. Seed must be kept cool, dry and in sealed containers, as
specified in clauses 18-1.2 and 18-1.3.

vii) All nurseries should be provided with two compost pits. These will be used on an
alternative basis to ensure a continual supply of compost.

viii) Where a nursery is established on a slope exceeding 2 0, the ground must be levelled
by terracing before beds are constructed.

ix) A constant staff of qualified and experienced people must be provided.

x) There must be adequate space in each nursery location for all operations to be
performed in the cycle of work. In particular, all plants need to be spaced out
periodically as they grow and there must be adequate bed area to accommodate them.

18-3.3 Construction of Nursery Beds

18-3.3.1 Nursery beds must be made in a different way according to their purpose. The
Contractor/Users' Group must ensure that there are adequate beds available for all the
operations to be undertaken in the nursery.

18-3.3.2 There must be paths around all beds to ensure the best possible access for operations such
as weeding and watering.

18-3.3.3 Table 18 -3 below summarises the construction details of the four main bed types, which
are described in full in clauses 18-3.3.4 to 18-3.3.7.

Table 18 -3 : Construction Details of Nursery Beds

Technical Specifications : Protection Work 159

 Bed Type Beds for grass Seed beds for tree Stand out beds for Beds for the
seeds, grass slips seedlings polypots seedling propagation of
and tree stool bamboo culm
cuttings cuttings
Bed Size 1 m wide x 0.25 m 1 m wide x 0.17 m 1 m wide x 0.15 m 1 m wide x 0.3 m
high high high high
Details of 50 mm of washed 50 mm washed 50 mm layer of Ground below the
Constructi gravel placed above gravel placed above gravel placed above bed is dug to a
on the ground; then 50 the ground; then 50 compacted ground. depth of 300 mm.
mm of 1:1 mix of mm of unsieved forest A flat stone or brick Bed is made with
sieved soil and soil; 50 mm of 1:3 surround. 100 mm of unsieved
compost; and mix of sieved forest soil (lower) and 200
topped with 150 soil and washed sand; mm of sieved soil
mm of 3:1 mix of and topped with 20 (upper). A bund 100
sieved forest topsoil mm of washed, sieved mm high is formed
and washed sand. and sterilised sand. around the edge.

18-3.3.4 Soil beds should be constructed to hold grass seeds, grasses being propagated by vegetative
means and tree stool cuttings. These can be of any practical length but must be flat and of
one metre in width. They should rise to a height of 250 mm above the surrounding ground.
They are made up as follows: 50 mm of washed gravel is placed above the ground; then 50
mm of 1:1 mix of sieved soil and compost; and the bed is topped with 150 mm of 3:1 mix
of sieved fertile, loamy forest topsoil and washed sand. All sieving should be done with a
mesh size of 2 mm or smaller. One square metre of such a bed will contain 100 grass slips
spaced at 100 mm centres within rows at 100 mm centres and will produce at least 300
slips for planting out, depending on the particular species, and the soil and climate of the
nursery.

18-3.3.5 Seed beds must be very carefully for germinating small seeds of shrubs and trees. These
can be of any practical length but must be flat and of one metre in width. They should rise
to a height of 250 mm above the surrounding ground. They are made up as follows: 50 mm
of washed gravel is placed above the ground and then 50 mm of unsieved forest soil: 50
mm of 1:3 mix of sieved forest soil and washed sand: and the bed is toped with 20 mm of
washed, sieved and sterilised sand. All sieving should be done with a mesh size of 1 mm or
smaller.

18-3.3.6 Standout beds should be constructed to hold seedlings in polythene pots. These can be of
any practical length but must be flat and of one metre width. Bed floors should be above
surrounding ground level and they should have a 50 mm layer of gravel placed above
compacted ground. They should have a surround, preferably made from flat stones or
bricks. One square metre of standout bed will contain an average of 115 filled pots of the
size specified (100 x 180 mm) when spaced out.

18-3.3.7 Beds for the propagation of bamboo culm cuttings should be made specially. These can be
of any practical length but must be flat and of one metre width. They should rise to a
height of 300 mm above the surrounding ground. They are made up as follows: the ground
below the bed is dug to a depth of 300 mm; the bed itself is then made with 100 mm of
unsieved soil on the original surface, and 200 mm of sieved soil above this. All soil sieving
should be done with a mesh size of 2 mm or smaller. Finally, a bund 100 mm high is
formed around the edge.

18-3.3.8 Shaded must be constructed over the beds and kept in position over delicate seedlings
during hours of intense sunlight, according to need. Shades should be 750 to 1000 mm

Technical Specifications : Protection Work 160

 above the soil or the top of filled pots and angled so as to be effective for as much of the
day as possible (i.e. with the lower side to the south). Bamboo strips laced together with
coir (coconut fibre) string are particularly suitable in most cases; but over tree and shrub
seed beds, thatched shades with a polythene lining must be used.

18 -4 NURSERY OPERATION AND MANAGEMENT

18-4.1 General

18-4.1.1 The Contractor/Users' Group must operate the nursery according to a high standard. The
nursery is to be staffed well tended at all times. It must be maintained in a clean, tidy and
efficient manner at all times. Plants must always be healthy and vigorous.

18-4.1.2 Due to the nature of bio-engineering works, nurseries will normally be operated and
managed by small local contractors or users’ groups with a range of agricultural skills.
Nurseries may also be operated and managed by direct employees of the DDCs of
concerned.

18-4.1.3 Plants must be kept properly weeded at all times.

18-4.1.4 Watering, as required for good plant growth, must be carried out regularly in the cool of the
evening between sunset and dusk. The Contractor/Users' Group must ensure that the soil in
all beds is kept moist but not saturated at all times. Beds must be kept moist even when
empty, so that the soil is kept in good condition.

18-4.1.5 The timing of many nursery operations is of the utmost importance. Activities such as seed
sowing and the taking of cuttings must be carried out within the critical few weeks when
they will yield the desired results. Most other operations, such as spacing out, root pruning
and watering, must also be carried out in a timely manner. The Contractor/Users' Group is
responsible to keep works to the strict schedule required and under no circumstances to
permit delays.

18-4.2 Nursery Production of Grass

18-4.2.1 Grass will be propagated in nurseries either by seeding in carefully prepared beds or by
vegetative propagation.

18-4.2.2 Where grass seeding is required in the nursery, finely sieved fertile soil mixed with clean
sand to a texture of sandy loam must be placed in beds before the seeds are sown. Seeds
will be covered with a sheet of hessian jute until they have germinated, when it will be
carefully removed. Watering of fresh seedlings will be by a fine spray and not by the rose
of a watering can.

18-4.2.3 Grasses to be propagated by vegetative methods will be of the species instructed. The
Contractor/Users' Group should obtain adequate quantities of the plant material required,
but under no circumstances is he/she to cause serious depletion of grass stocks in any steep
or erosion-prone area.

18-4.2.4 Vegetative propagation will normally be by rhizome cuttings. With this method, the grass
is treated in exactly the same way as a bamboo being propagated by the traditional
Nepalese farmer's technique. A clump is carefully dug up and brought to the nursery, being

Technical Specifications : Protection Work 161

 kept cool and damp at all times. Stems are cut above the first or second node above the
ground: this usually gives a length of 100 to 200 mm. The clump is separated carefully,
with the minimum of damage to the rhizomes and fine roots. Slips should be separated out
which keep a length of stem and about 50 mm of the rhizome. Each slip should have some
buds on the rhizome, but in some grasses these can be difficult to see. The slips should be
planted with the soil surface at the same level as it was originally, in rows at 200 mm
centres; slips should be at 200 mm centres within the rows. A sheet of hessian jute should
be placed over the tops of the cuttings. When the new shoots are about 50 mm long, it can
be removed.

18-4.2.5 Every two to three months, all grasses should be lifted from the beds, split carefully and
replanted. It is normal that, once split out, three times the previous bed area is required.
This is a standard practice to bulk up the supply of planting stock without having to
degrade the natural vegetation cover in the region of the nursery.

18-4.3. Nursery Production of Tress and Shrubs in Polypots

18-4.3.1 Tress and shrubs will be seeded either in seed beds or directly in polythene pots
("polypots"). Finely sieved fertile soil mixed with clean sand to a texture of sandy loam
must be placed in well shaded beds for seeding. Watering of fresh seedlings will be by a
fine spray, and not by the rose of a watering can.

18-4.3.2 All plants must be grown on in pots of dimensions 100 x 180 mm (4 x 7 inches) or greater
when laid flat. The pots should be of black, 200 gauge polythene. They must have
adequate drainage holes at the bottom and be filled with fertile forest topsoil mixed with
clean sand to a texture of sandy loam.

18-4.3.3 Roots protruding from the bottom of pots must be pruned with a razor blade on a regular
basis which will not exceed weekly and may need to be more frequent. Protruding roots
should never be allowed to become more than 25 mm in length.

18-4.3.4 When polypot seedlings begin to compete with each other for light, they should be re-
spaced as required. This would typically mean doubling the bed space occupied by the
plants.

18-4.3.5 To be acceptable for planting on site, trees and shrubs must be healthy, vigorous and
showing no signs of damage, wilt, irregular growth, fungal or pest attack, or nutrient
disorders. They must be at least 300 mm in height above soil surface level and of good
form. The roots must be in good condition and there should be no signs of disturbance to
the soil in the polythene pot, even after transport to site.

18-4.4. Nursery Production of Hardwood Plants by Vegetative Methods

18-4.4.1 Trees and shrubs which can be propagated by vegetative method may be specified by the
Engineer. The Contractor/Users' Group should produce these by the appropriate method,
as required.

18-4.4.2 All cutting and stools must be made as specified in the clause 18-2.3 and planted in fertile
soil beds of the typed specified in clause 18-3.3.

Technical Specifications : Protection Work 162

18-4.4.3 Cuttings must be planted 300 mm apart in holes slightly larger than their diameter. They
must be placed at such a depth that only one bud remains above the soil surface (i.e. about
30 mm of the cutting).

18-4.4.4 When plants compete with each other for light, they should be cut back as necessary.

18-4.4.5 To be acceptable for planting on site, trees and shrubs produced in this way must be
healthy, vigorous and showing no signs of damage, wilt, irregular growth, fungal or pest
attack, or nutrient disorder. They must be at lest 500 mm in height above soil surface level
and of good form.

18-4.5 Extraction of Plants from the Nursery

18-4.5.1 The Contractor/Users' Group is responsible for extracting plants from nursery beds and
preparing them ready for transport. They should be extracted from the beds only on the
morning that they are required for planting on site.

18-4.5.2 Plants must be hardened off, starting at least two weeks before they are to be taken out of
the nursery. This process requires a gradual reduction in the amount of watering and
shading. The aim is to prepare them for transfer to a much more hostile location.

18-4.5.3 The night before the plants are to be lifted, they should be thoroughly watered. This is to
make the soil softer and ease the business of extracting the roots.

18-4.5.4 Plants growing in soil beds should be carefully lifted from the soil. There must be no
pulling of stems or roots, but they must be dug out and extracted with no strain on any part
of the plant.

18-4.5.5 Plants from soil beds must be wrapped in wet hessian jute. Hardwood plants should have a
ball of soil around the roots. Grass clumps have most of the soil shaken or washed off.

18-4.5.6 Polypot seedlings should be lifted and stacked neatly in metal or wooden trays. They must
always be lifted by the pot and never by the stem or leaves.

18-4.5.7 All plants are to be kept most, in a cool, shady place, until they are loaded for transport to
site. In the vehicle, they must not be stacked high. For transport on rough roads, they must
be packed in carefully so that they do not fall over or roll around. The vehicle must be
shaded.

18-4.6 Compost and Mulch Production

18-4.6.1 The Contractor/Users' Group is to produce compost and mulch for nursery or site
operations. It is to be produced in a timely manner, in the quantities required. Compost is
normally required to sustain the long term fertility of nursery beds. Mulch may also be
used in the nursery, but is normally produced to enhance site planting works, particularly
the direct seeding of grass.

18-4.6.2 Compost and mulch should be made from annual and perennial weeds of poor rooting
characteristics, such as ban mara (Eupatorium adenopherum) and tite pate (Artemesia vulgans).
The greenery should be collected when there is most material available but before it forms
seeds. This is most often in Shrawan and Bhadra.

Technical Specifications : Protection Work 163

18-4.6.3 Collected material should be chopped finely and stored in a mound, compost bay or pit.
The maximum size for chopped compost is 50 mm; the maximum size for chopped mulch
is 150 mm.

18-4.6.4 Both compost and mulch should be kept moist but not waterlogged and in an aerated
condition. They should be completely turned once a month on a regular schedule. Compost
can have cow manure mixed in to assist the process of decomposition.

18-4.6.5 Neither compost nor mulch should be applied until they are fully rotted. By this time they
should be black and the parts of individual plants should be indistinguishable. Early
application can lead to a nutrient loss in the soil if microbes extract nitrogen to decompose
the added organic material.

18 -5 FINAL SLOPE PREPARATION FOR BIO-ENGINEERING

18-5.1 General

18-5.1.1 The Contractor/Users' Group shall prepare slopes for planting operations as required by the
Engineer. This shall be done according to the specifications described hereunder, as and
when required. The Contractor/Users’ Group shall supply all necessary expertise,
resources and facilities to ensure that these requirements are met.

18-5.1.2 In the course of all slope preparation works, it is essential that no damage is done to
existing vegetation unless the Engineer's instruction specifically requires certain plants to
be removed.

18-5.1.3 The timing of many bio-engineering operations is of the utmost importance. Activities
such as planting and seed sowing must be carried out within the critical few weeks when
they will yield the desired results. All other operations must be carried out in a timely
manner to permit this to happen. The Contractor/Users’ Group is responsible to keep
works to the strict schedule required and under no circumstances to permit delays.

18-5.2 Cut Slope Preparation for Grass Planting

18-5.2.1 The objective of final cut slope preparation is to produce a surface adequately prepared for
grass planting. Grass lines are used to provide a strong surface cover but need a well
prepared surface in which to be planted; if grass is to be an effective form of slope
protection, it must be allowed to establish properly on a slope which does not subject it to
undue stress from erosion and mass movement in its initial stages.

18-5.2.2 The Contractor/Users’ Group must ensure that the slope under instruction is trimmed to a
straight angle, according to the Engineer's specification. Cut slopes to be planted with
grass will normally be instructed a 3 vertical:2 horizontal, but this may be varied at the
Engineer's discretion. In any event, a straight profile must be obtained. Concavities must
be filled with well compacted material or, in some cases, with dry stone dentition.
Convexities must be removed and it is essential that the general profile does not have a
shape giving over-steep segments.

18-5.2.3 All loose material must be removed from the slope and tipped elsewhere in an approved
location.

Technical Specifications : Protection Work 164

18-5.3 Final Preparation of Fill Slopes for Bio-Engineering

18-5.3.1 The objective of the final preparation of fill slopes is to produce a surface adequately
prepared for shrub or tree planting or grass sowing, or a combination of these. Vegetation
is used to provide a strong surface cover but needs a well prepared surface in which to be
planted: if it is to be an effective form of slope protection, it must be allowed to establish
properly on a slope which does not subject it to undue stress in its initial stages.

18-5.3.2 The Contractor/Users’ Group must ensure that the slope under instruction is trimmed to a
straight angle, according to the specification. In any event, a straight profile must be
obtained. All masses of loose debris, especially where it has previously been tipped at the
head of the slope, must be removed. Concavities must be filled with well compacted
material or, in some cases, with dry stone dentition. Convexities must also be removed and
it is essential that the general profile does not have a shape giving over-steep segments.

18 -6 SITE PLANTING AND SOWING

18-6.1 General

18-6.1.1 The Contractor/Users’ Group shall plant or sow grasses, shrubs and tress as required by the
Engineer. This shall be done according to the specifications described hereunder, as and
when required. The Contractor/Users’ Group shall supply all necessary expertise,
resources and facilities to ensure that these requirements are met.

18-6.1.2 Due to the nature of bio-engineering works, they will normally be undertaken by small
local contractors or users’ groups with a range of agricultural skills. Any bio-engineering
site activity may also be managed by direct employees of the DDCs concerned.

18-6.1.3 It is the Contractor’s/Users’ Group's responsibility to ensure that all planting stock, whether
provided from a nursery under a separate contract or through a separate instruction, is of
high quality and is vigorous enough to grow on the site to be planted.

18-6.1.4 All seeds and other planting stock must be of species indigenous to Nepal unless otherwise
specified. All species must be covered in the current approved lists of species produced
from time to time by the Geo-Environmental Unit of the DoR or the DTPS of DoLIDAR.
They must be appropriate for the precise site conditions in which they are to be planted and
the Contractor/Users’ Group must ensure that they apply to the specific altitude and other
environmental characteristics of the site in question.

18-6.1.5 The timing of many bio-engineering operations is of the utmost importance. Activities
such as planting and seed sowing must be carried out within the critical few weeks when
they will yield the desired results. All other operations must be carried out in a timely
manner to permit this to happen. The Contractor/Users’ Group is responsible to keep
works to the strict schedule required and under no circumstances to permit delays.

18-6.2 Sowing of Grasses on Site

Technical Specifications : Protection Work 165

18-6.2.1 The sowing of grasses is intended to create a strengthened slope surface which is resistant
to erosion. The Contractor/Users’ Group is required to carry out the sowing of grass seeds
according to the Engineer's specific instructions.

18-6.2.2 It is assumed that the site will already have been prepared for seed sowing, under a separate
instruction; but it is nevertheless the responsibility of the Contractor/Users’ Group to
ensure that the condition of the site is good enough for the successful establishment of
grasses.

18-6.2.3 The Contractor/Users’ Group is required to supervise all field operations very closely. The
sowing of grass seeds is a delicate business and should be approached in the same way as
for agricultural crops. The Contractor/Users’ Group should employ experienced
agricultural labourers for this work.

18-6.2.4 Seeds will have been collected and stored under a separate instruction well before the time
of sowing. However, it is the Contractor’s/Users’ Group's responsibility to check that it
has been carefully stored and remains fully viable.

18-6.2.5 Immediately before sowing, the ground surface should be lightly scarified to ease early root
penetration. Seeds should then be laid thinly over the surface. Under no circumstances
should they be broadcast, because the lightness of perennial grass seeds and the steepness
of the slopes to be treated give a poor cover using such a technique. The Contractor/Users’
Group is responsible for ensuring that the correct quantities of seeds are used, while giving
a good, even cover.

18-6.2.6 A cover of 25 grams of grass seed per square meter of surface should be achieved unless
otherwise specified.

18-6.2.7 After sowing, a mulch of prepared and dried cut herbs should be laid over the whole seeded
area in a thin layer. If the mulch is too thick it will prevent light from getting to the seed
and will inhibit germination. Herbs suitable for this and locally available in large
quantities are:

tite pate (Artemisia vulgans);

tapre (Cassia species);
ban mara (Eupatorium adenophorum).

However, freshly cut herbs should not be used because of the danger of resprouting and
weeding.

18-6.2.8 If specified, the mulch should be secured with jute netting of mesh size 300 x 500 mm and
the netting fixed in place using suitable live pegs or hardwood cuttings (e.g. simali, Vitex
negundo) at one metre centres.

18-6.3 Direct Seed Sowing of Shrubs and Trees on Site

18-6.3.1 The direct sowing of shrubs and trees is intended to create a strengthened slope surface
which is resistant to erosion, and anchorage of unstable surface layers. The technique is
particularly effective where very stony materials preclude the use of other planting
techniques or where the site will be badly effected by disturbance during the planting of
polypot seedlings, or where the site is still unstable and does not warrant the costs involved
in planting but would benefit from relatively cheap seeding. The Contractor/Users’ Group

Technical Specifications : Protection Work 166

 is required to carry out the sowing of shrub and tree seeds according to the Engineer's
specific instructions.

18-6.3.2 It is assumed that the site will already have been prepared for seed sowing, under a separate
instruction; but it is nevertheless the responsibility of the Contractor/Users’ Group to
ensure that the condition of the site is good enough for the successful establishment of
shrubs and trees.

18-6.3.3 The Contractor/Users’ Group is required to supervise all field operations very closely. The
sowing of any seeds is a delicate business and should be approached in the same way as for
agricultural crops. The Contractor/Users’ Group should employ experienced agricultural
labourers for this work.

18-6.3.4 Seed will have been collected and stored under a separate instruction well before the time
of sowing. However, it is the Contractor/Users’ Group's responsibility to check that it has
been carefully stored and remains fully viable.

18-6.3.5 Sowing should start at the top of the slope and the labourers should work downwards. Care
must be taken not to disturb areas already seeded.

18-6.3.6 To sow the seeds, a small hole should be made in the slope. The tool used to do this
depends on the size of the seed. For some seeds, a piece of gabion wire is adequate; for
others, a piece of mild steel with a flattened end is required. The hole should be in the best
soil available but if there is little real soil, then a crevice between two stones is acceptable.
Two seeds should be placed in each hole and a covering of soil or whatever fines are
available should be placed over them. This covering should never exceed 10 mm and
should preferably be about 5 mm; it should never be less than this. Seeds should be placed
at 50 to 100 mm centres, as ground conditions dictate.

18-6.3.7 In some cases the seed can be broadcast starting at the top of the site and working down
slope as evenly as possible so that the whole site is lightly covered. This is used where the
site is still active and only warrants minimum expenditure, or where the site is naturally
rough, providing plenty of niches in which the seed can catch. Quantities of seed depend
on the type of seed involved but are generally half that of the quantities used in the nursery.
With utis (Alnus nepalensis) seed it should be at a rate of 1 gram of seed per square metre.

18-6.4 Site Planting of Grass Slips and Cuttings

18-6.4.1 The planting of grass slips and cutting is intended to create a strengthened slope surface
which is resistant to erosion. The Contractor/Users’ Group is required to carry out the
planting of grass seedlings or rooted cuttings, according to the Engineer's specific
instructions. The configuration of planting will be determined according to individual site
conditions. It will be either random, contoured or downslope.

18-6.4.2 It is assumed that the site will already have been prepared for planting, under a separate
instruction; but it is nevertheless the responsibility of the Contractor/Users’ Group to
ensure that the condition of the site is good enough for the successful establishment of
grasses, and accords with the specifications given in clauses 18-5.1, 18-5.2 or 18-5.3.

18-6.4.3 Using appropriate tools (such as tape measures and spirit levels), planting lines must be
marked out with string as required. Unless specified differently, the row spacing to be
marked out is as shown in the Table 18 -6 (a).

Technical Specifications : Protection Work 167

18-6.4.4 The Contractor/Users’ Group is required to supervise all field operations very closely. The
planting of grass slips is a delicate business and should be approached in the same way as
the transplanting of millet seedlings. The Contractor/Users’ Group should employ
experienced agricultural labourers for this work.

Table 18 -6 (a) : Spacing of Plant Lines

Planting Slope Steepness Row Spacing

Configuration
Random lines slope less than 30 degrees 1000 mm centres
slope 30 to 45 degrees 500 mm centres
slope more than 45 degrees 250 mm centres
Contour lines slope less than 30 degrees 1000 mm centres
slope 30 to 45 degrees 500 mm centres
slope more than 45 degrees 250 mm centres
Diagonal lines all slopes 500 mm centres
Down slope lines all slopes 500 mm centres

18-6.4.5 The plants supplied to the Contractor/Users’ Group should be prepared for planting by the
Contractor/Users’ Group as given below. The Contractor/Users’ Group is to transport
them from the nursery wrapped in hessian jute. At all times, plants are to be kept moist and
as cool as possible, and should be wrapped in wet hessian between all operations such as
extraction from the bed, pruning and planting. Under any circumstances, all plants
supplied must be planted the same day that they are lifted from the nursery.

18-6.4.6 Grass slips or cuttings should be carefully separated from the clumps to give the maximum
viable planting material. Any roots in excess of 25 mm should be cut off using a sharp
khukuri or razor blade. Shoots and stems should be lopped off 100 mm above ground level.

18-6.4.7 Planting should be started at the top of the slope and under no circumstances should new
plants be walked on or otherwise disturbed. Using a small bar (usually made of mild steel
and with a flattened end), a hole should be made that is just big enough for the roots. The
slip or cutting is inserted; care must be taken that the roots are not tangled or bent back to
the surface. Soil is then replaced around the roots and firmed with the fingers. The
spacing of plants within rows should be 100 mm unless otherwise specified.

18-6.4.8 If the soil is dry and there is no rain within 16 to 24 hours of planting, the site should be
watered carefully with a fine spray. The Contractor/Users’ Group will be required to water
for the first two weeks after planting in the event of inadequate rainfall.

18-6.4.9 In certain circumstances it may not be possible to provide grass plants from a nursery. In
this case the Engineer will specify the species and expected source of grass plants. It is
important to minimise disruption to neighbouring land, in the event that species are
collected from areas surrounding the road. It is the Contractor’s/Users’ Group's
responsibility to collect the stock required from a wide area and not to give rise to any soil
erosion through the excessive removal of plants in one locality.

18-6.5 Site Planting of Shrubs and Trees Raised in Polythene Pots

Technical Specifications : Protection Work 168

18-6.5.1 The planting of trees and shrubs is intended to replace or restore something of the natural
vegetation on the slope to be treated. The Contractor/Users’ Group is required to carry out
the planting of seedlings to the Engineer's specific instructions.

18-6.5.2 It is assumed that the site will already have been prepared for planting, under a separate
instruction; but it is nevertheless the responsibility of the Contractor/Users’ Group to
ensure that the condition of the site is good enough for the successful establishment of
delicate young plants.

18-6.5.3 The spacing of plants will be determined according to individual site conditions. However,
it will normally be at one meter centres unless otherwise specified.

18-6.5.4 The Contractor/Users’ Group is required to supervise all field operations very closely. The
planting of trees and shrubs is a delicate business and should be approached in the same
way as the planting of horticultural seedlings. The Contractor/Users’ Group should employ
experienced agricultural or forestry labourers for this work.

18-6.5.5 The plants supplied to the Contractor/Users’ Group will normally be from a nursery as
arranged by separate instructions, and will be ready for planting. They should be at least
300 mm in height above the soil surface and hardened off in the normal way. The
Contractor/Users’ Group is to collect the plants from the nursery and transport them to site
with all due care. The plants will normally be supplied in polythene pots, which should not
be removed until the moment of planting. Plants are to be lifted by the pots, never by the
stem or leaves. At all times they are to be kept as cool as possible. The Contractor/Users’
Group is responsible for ensuring that the soil around the roots does not dry out. Under any
circumstances all plants supplied must be planted within three days of removal from the
nursery.

18-6.5.6 Planting should be started at the top of the slope and under no circumstances should new
plants be walked on or otherwise disturbed.

18-6.5.7 A planting pit wide and deep enough for the main root to be buried in without bending it
and wide enough for all the roots and surrounding soil ball should be made at the time of
planting. Some compost if available should be mixed with the soil from the slit prior to
back filling around the roots. The polythene pot must be removed from the seedling by
cutting it away with a razor blade. The plant should then be carefully placed into the hole,
the compost and soil packed in, and all surrounding soil firmed up, taking care not to cause
any damage to the plant or its roots. The surface over and around the pit should then be
mulched using any appropriate, locally available material, such as manure, compost, dead
leaves or cut herbage. The use of freshly cut ban mara ( Eupatorium adenophorum) and tite
pate (Artemisia vulgans) should be avoided, since it can resprout from the buds after being
cut.

18-6.5.8 The Engineer may specify bigger seedlings for specific areas, such as those to be used
intensively for amenity purposes. These will normally have been growing in a nursery for
at least a year and should have well developed roots as well as aerial parts. They will be
provided either as bare root stock with a substantial root ball, or in pots of a minimum of
100 x 180 mm laid flat dimensions. When these larger seedlings are planted, the pits will
be of 300 mm diameter and 300 mm depth. In addition, well-rotted compost will be mixed
with the soil back fill in a ratio of at least one part compost to ten parts soil.

18-6.6 Site Planting of Hardwood Cuttings

Technical Specifications : Protection Work 169

18-6.6.1 Certain trees and shrubs can be planted on site by means of hardwood cuttings. Where
these are specified, the Contractor/Users’ Group is required to carry out the planting of
cuttings as required in the Engineer's instructions.

18-6.6.2 It is assumed that the site will already have been prepared for planting, under a separate
instruction; but it is nevertheless the responsibility of the Contractor/Users’ Group to
ensure that the condition of the site is good enough for the successful establishment of
delicate young plants.

18-6.6.3 The spacing of hardwood cuttings will be determined according to individual site
conditions. However, it will normally be at 500 mm centres unless otherwise specified.

18-6.6.4 The Contractor/Users’ Group is required to supervise all field operations very closely. The
planting of tree and shrub cuttings is a delicate business and should be approached in the
same way as the planting of horticultural cuttings (e.g. those of tea). The Contractor/Users’
Group should employ experienced agricultural or forestry labourers for this work.

18-6.6.5 The cuttings supplied to the Contractor/Users’ Group will normally be from a nursery as
arranged by separate instructions, and will be ready for planting. They should be at least
300 mm in length. The Contractor/Users’ Group is to collect the Cuttings from the nursery
and transport them from the nursery wrapped in hessian jute. At all times, cuttings are to
be kept moist and as cool as possible, and should be wrapped in wet hessian between all
operations such as cutting from the parent plant, trimming and planting. Under any
circumstances, all plants supplied must be planted the same day that they are lifted from the
nursery.

18-6.6.6 Planting should be started at the top of the slope and under no circumstances should new
plants be walked on or otherwise disturbed. Using a small bar (usually made of mild steel
and with a flattened end), a hole should be made that is just big enough for the cutting. The
cutting is inserted and the soil is replaced around it and firmed with the fingers. The
cutting should be inserted to a depth such that two-thirds to three-quarters of it is buried.

18-6.6.7 If the soil is dry and there is no rain within 16 to 24 hours of planting, the site should be
watered carefully with a fine spray. The Contractor/Users’ Group will be required to water
for the first two weeks after planting in the event of inadequate rainfall.

18-6.6.8 In certain circumstances it may not be possible to provide cuttings from a nursery. In this
case the Engineer will specify the species and expected sources. The Contractor/Users’
Group should then obtain the cuttings required in the manner described in clause 18-2.3.

18-6.6.9 The Engineer may specify bigger cuttings for specific areas, using large truncheon cuttings.
In this category fall chuletro (Brassaiopsis hainla), dabdabe (Garuga pinnata), kavro (Ficus
lacor), phaledo (Erythrina species) and Gliricidia sepium. Cuttings of these species should
planted at 1000 mm centres. A large crowbar should be used to make the planting hole, but
otherwise the technique is as described above for smaller cuttings. Under no circumstances
should these cuttings be hammered into the ground.

18-6.7 Brush Layering, Palisades and Fascines

Technical Specifications : Protection Work 170

18-6.7.1 Under certain conditions, the Contractor/Users’ Group will be required to construct
vegetation structures using hardwood cuttings. Where these are specified, the
Contractor/Users’ Group is required to carry out the necessary preparation and planting
works as required in the Engineer's instructions.

18-6.7.2 It is assumed that the site will already have been prepared for planting, under a separate
instruction; but it is nevertheless the responsibility of the Contractor/Users’ Group to
ensure that the condition of the site is good enough for the successful establishment of
delicate young plants.

18-6.7.3 The cuttings supplied to the Contractor/Users’ Group may be from a nursery as arranged by
separate instructions, and will be ready for planting. They should be at least 400 mm long
for brush layering, 600 mm long for palisades and 1000 mm in length for fascines. The
Contractor/Users’ Group is to collect the cuttings from the nursery and transport them from
the nursery wrapped in hessian jute. At all times, cuttings are to be kept moist and as cool
as possible, and should be wrapped in wet hessian between all operations such as cutting
from the parent plant, trimming and planting. Under any circumstances, all plants supplied
must be planted the same day that they are lifted from the nursery.

18-6.7.4 If the instruction to the Contractor/Users’ Group includes the provision of cuttings, then the
Engineer will specify the species and expected sources, and the Contractor/Users’ Group
must then obtain the cuttings required. This will be done in the manner described in clause
18-2.3 except that the size of cuttings will be of a minimum length of 400 mm for brush
layering, 600 mm for palisades and 1000 mm for fascines, and minimum diameters of 30
mm for brush layering, 40 mm for palisades and 50 mm for fascines.

18-6.7.5 Cuttings of the following species, if specified, should be a minimum of 2000 mm in length;
chuletro (Brassaiopsis hainla), dabdabe (Garuga pinnata), kavro (Ficus lacor), phaledo
(Erythrina species) and Gliricidia sepium.

18-6.7.6 The Contractor/Users’ Group is required to supervise all field operations very closely. The
planting of tree and shrub cuttings is a delicate business and should be approached in the
same way as the planting of horticultural cuttings (e.g. those of tea). The Contractor/Users’
Group should employ experienced agricultural or forestry labourers for this work.

18-6.7.7 Planting should always be started at the tope of the slope and under no circumstances
should new plants be walked on or otherwise disturbed.

18-6.7.8 Brush layering should be constructed as given below, unless specified differently:

i) Starting at the top of the area to be treated, and using appropriate measuring
equipment, exact lines should be marked out. From 1 metre below the top of the
slope, a precise contour line should be marked out every 1 metre down the slope.

ii) Starting at the top, trenches approximately 400 mm in depth should be excavated
along the lines.

iii) Cuttings should then be placed into each trench at 50 mm centres, the correct way up
and angled so that they are at right angles to the maximum slope angle. All cuttings
should be inserted to a depth such that two-thirds to three-quarters of their length is
buried.

Technical Specifications : Protection Work 171

 iv) The trench should then be partially back filled and another line of cuttings placed
along the trench at 50 mm centres and 100 mm behind the first line, and with the
individual cuttings offset to coincide with the gaps between the cuttings in the first
line. The trench is then completely back filled and gently compacted. Any loose or
excess material is cleared down the slope before the next line is planted.

v) In some cases it will be specified that cuttings should be placed in a criss-cross

fashion. Where this is to be done, one layer of cuttings is laid in the trench at 30
degree to one side of the line of maximum fall of slope. A second layer of cuttings is
laid on top of this at 30 degree to the other side of the line of maximum fall of slope.
Back filling and compaction are then completed.

18-6.7.9 Palisades should be constructed as given below, unless specified differently.

i) Starting at the top of the area to be treated, and using appropriate measuring
equipment, exact lines should be marked out. From 1 metre below the top of the
slope, a precise contour line should be marked out every 1 metre down the slope.

ii) Starting at one end and using a small bar (usually made of mild steel and with a
flattened end), a hole should be made that is just big enough for the first cutting. The
cutting is inserted and the soil is replaced around it and firmed with the fingers. The
cutting must be the correct way up and angled so that it is vertical. The cutting
should be inserted to a depth such that two-thirds to three-quarters of it is buried.

iii) This process should be repeated along the entire line, with a series of cuttings placed
at 50 mm centres.

iv) If a double line is specified, then a second line of cuttings must be placed in the same
way, 100 mm behind the first and with the individual cuttings offset to coincide with
the gaps between the cuttings in the first line.

v) The soil around the single or double line is then completely back filled into any
remaining gaps and gently compacted. Any loose or excess material is cleared down
the slope before the next line is planted.

18-6.7.10 Fascines are bundles of hardwood cuttings laid horizontally in trenches, and parallel to the
line of the trench. The bundles are thereby completely buried. Fascines should be
constructed as given below, unless specified differently.

i) Starting at the top of the area to be treated, and using appropriate measuring
equipment, exact lines should be marked out. From 1 metre below the top of the
slope, a precise contour line should be marked out every 1 metre down the slope.

ii) Starting at top, trenches approximately 200 mm in depth should be excavated along
the lines.

iii) Cuttings should then be laid along each trench, so that they lie horizontally along the
trench. There must be a minimum of four cuttings together. They must be
overlapped so that no two ends coincide. The cuttings must then be tied using jute
or coir (coconut fibre) string at 500 mm intervals to form a bundle. As the fascine is
created, it thereby forms a continuous bundle right across the slope.

Technical Specifications : Protection Work 172

 iv) The trench should then be back filled and gently compacted. The top of the fascine
should be 50 to 100 mm below the surface. Any loose or excess material is cleared
down the slope before the next line is planted.

18-6.7.11 The Engineer may specify that orientations other than along the contour of the slope are
used. In this event, the Contractor/Users’ Group must alter the laying out of lines
accordingly and meet the precise angle required.

18-6.7.12 If the soil is dry and there is no rain within 16 to 24 hours of planting, the site should be
watered carefully with a fine spray. The Contractor/Users’ Group will be required to water
for the first two weeks after planting in the event of inadequate rainfall.

18-6.8 Use of Fertiliser

18-6.8.1 Under certain circumstances, the use of chemical fertilisers may be specified in place of
farmyard manure or mulching. Unless otherwise specified, the rates given below should be
used.

18-6.8.2 Levels of fertiliser application vary according to soil type and nutritional content.
However, if nutritional data are not available, the following figures can be used as a rough
guide:

Nitrogen: 10 g/m2;
Phosphorus: 5 g/m2;
Potassium: 4 g/m2.

Table 18 -6 (b) below lists the chemical composition and percentage of the major plant
nutrient elements in the chemical fertilisers commonly available in Nepal.

Table 18 -6 (b) : Chemical Composition of Chemical Fertilisers Commonly

Available in Nepal

Commercial Name Chemical Formula Percentage

N P K
Sulphate of Ammonia (NH4)2SO4 21 0 0
Urea CO(NH4)2 46 0 0
Triple Superphosphate CaHPO4 0 21 0
Muriate of Potash KCl 0 0 49
Complexol Unknown 20 9 0
Diammonium Phosphate (NH4)2HPO4 18 20 0

18 -7 JUTE NETTING WORKS

18-7.1 General

Technical Specifications : Protection Work 173

18-7.1.1 The Contractor/Users’ Group shall provide and install jute netting as required by the
Engineer. This shall be done according to the specifications described hereunder, as and
when required. The Contractor/Users’ Group shall supply all necessary expertise, resources
and facilities to ensure that these requirements are met.

18-7.1.2 The Engineer may instruct that jute netting applications be used in conjunction with other
techniques, particularly the sowing or planting of grasses. In this event, the netting should
be applied before the plants are introduced. When planting, the labourers must take care
only to hold or stand on the pegs and not to disturb the netting except when carefully
placing grass seed underneath on the soil surface.

18-7.2 Supply of Jute Netting

18-7.2.1 The Contractor/Users’ Group will manufacture or obtain a supply of jute netting to the
Engineer's specification.

18-7.2.2 The detail specifications for standard jute netting are as follows. "Standard" jute netting is
used for placing on bare slopes and is normally planted with grasses. [Note: warp ends are
the length-ways threads and weft strands are the cross-ways threads]

i) Material : High quality, 100% natural jute fibre from the latest harvest,
properly treated and dried.

ii) Yarn : Handspun 5 to 8 mm.

iii) Strip size : minimum 1.0 x 10.0 metres;

maximum 1.5 x 11.5 metres.

iv) Warp ends : 27 ends per 1000 mm.

v) Weft strands : 20 to 24 strands per 1000 mm.

vi) Mesh size : 40 mm square mesh holes.

vii) Weight : 0.8 to 1.2 kg per square metre.

18-7.2.3 The detailed specifications for wide mesh jute netting are as follows. "Wide mesh" jute
netting is used for holding mulch on to slopes which have been sown with grass seed.
[Note: warp ends are the length-ways threads and weft stands are the cross-ways threads]

i) Material : High quality, 100% natural jute fibre from the latest harvest,
properly treated and dried.

ii) Yarn : Handspun 3 to 5 mm.

iii) Strip size : minimum 1.0 x 10.0 metres;

maximum 1.5 x 11.5 metres.
iv) Warp ends : 7 ends per 1000 mm.

v) Weft strands : 3 strands per 1000 mm.

Technical Specifications : Protection Work 174

 vi) Mesh size : 150 x 500 mm rectangular mesh.

vii) Weight : 0.2 kg per square metre.

18-7.3 Placement of Netting

18-7.3.1 The Engineer will normally instruct the placement of standard jute netting on slopes in
excess of 40 degrees. It is therefore a difficult task to place the netting in an effective
manner which fulfils the Engineer's purpose. Carelessly placed netting is often useless and
can actually be detrimental to the slope surface.

18-7.3.2 It is assumed that the site will already have been prepared for the application of jute
netting, under a separate instruction; but it is nevertheless the responsibility of the
Contractor/Users’ Group to ensure that the condition of the site is good enough for the
optimum effect to be attained. In any event, a smooth profile must be obtained. All loose
debris must be removed. Concavities must be filled with well compacted material or, in
some cases, with dry stone dentition. Convexities must also be removed and it is essential
that the general profile does not have a shape giving over-steep segments.

18-7.3.3 Starting at one end of the site to be treated, a roll of netting should be pegged 300 mm
above the slope to be covered.

18-7.3.4 The netting should be rolled slowly down the slope. Hardwood cuttings, ideally of simali
(Vitex negundo) or pegs (usually made from split bamboo culms) should be hammered
through the netting at centres of 500 to 1000 mm; they should protrude about 80 mm.
Labourers must stand on these cuttings or pegs and not hang on to the netting.

18-7.3.5 This process should be repeated until the entire slope surface is covered. The strips are
then laced together with lengths of the same jute yarn, to form a continuous net. The lacing
must form joins every 250 mm or less.

18-7.3.6 The tension of the netting must now be reduced so that it hugs the slope surface precisely.
This is done by pulling up about 200 mm at the bottom of the netting and hooking it on to
the pegs a little higher up. This process is repeated up and across the slope until the netting
rests snugly against the surface and is nowhere tight or pulled away from the surface in
minor concavities.

18-7.3.7 The netting should then be pegged at 1000 mm centres with staples of 10 mm reinforcing
bar at least 100 mm wide and 300 mm long, firmly hammered into the slope face.
Additional staples should be used to hold netting closely against the face of concave slope
segments.

18-7.3.8 Finally, the bottom of the netting is trimmed to give a tidy finish.

18-7.3.9 In the case of wide mesh jute netting, it will only be specified for use on slopes which have
already been treated with grass seed and mulch. These will usually be less than 45 0 and are
therefore easier to work on. However, the process of placing the netting is similar to that
for standard netting.
18-7.3.10 Wide mesh netting should be pegged securely at the top and rolled slowly down the slope.
Hardwood cuttings, ideally of simali (Vitex negundo) or pegs (usually made from split
bamboo culms) should be hammered through the netting at centres of 1000 mm; they
should protrude about 80 mm. Labourers must stand on these cuttings or pegs and not hang

Technical Specifications : Protection Work 175

 on to the netting. This process should be repeated until the entire slope surface is covered.
The strips are then laced together with lengths of the same jute yarn, to form a continuous
net. The lacing must form joins every 500 mm or less.

18-7.3.11 The tension of the netting must now be reduced so that it hugs the slope surface precisely
and hold the mulch firmly against the surface throughout the area covered. The netting
should then be pegged at 1000 mm centres with staples of 10 mm reinforcing bar at least
100 mm wide and 300 mm long, firmly hammered into the slope face. Additional staples
should be used to hold netting closely against the face of concave slope segments. Finally,
the bottom of the netting is trimmed to give a tidy finish.

18 -8 GABION WIRE BOLSTERS

18-8.1 General

18-8.1.1 The Contractor/Users’ Group shall provide and install wire bolsters as required by the
Engineer. This shall be done according to the specifications described hereunder, as and
when required. The Contractor/Users’ Group shall supply all necessary expertise, resources
and facilities to ensure that these requirements are met.

18-8.2 Fabrication of Bolster Panels

18-8.2.1 Bolster panels will be either 5 x 1 metres or 5 x 2 metres in size, according to the type of
bolsters to be used. They will be woven with an hexagonal mesh in the same way as
normal gabion panels. For the panel frame, 10 swg galvanised wire should be used; for the
mesh, 12 swg is adequate. Wire should preferably have a high grade zinc coating. Failing
this, a medium grade zinc coating is acceptable.

18-8.2.2 Weaving should start from one of the long sides. A total of 83 coils of wire should be
spaced evenly along the 5 metre length. This gives a mesh width of about 60 mm. Each
weave should have three twists, as for normal hexagonal mesh. If done reasonably tightly,
this gives a length of about 80 mm to each mesh link. In any event, the mesh length should
not exceed 90 mm. The mesh should be turned on to the larger frame wire at least one and
a half turns and made fully secure.

18-8.3 Placement of Contour Bolsters

18-8.3.1 A contour bolster treatment gives a series of stone-filled wire tubes of 300 mm diameter,
laid in trenches cut across the slope. The tops of all the tubes should be flush with the
surface of the slope in which they are placed. The purpose is to check scour of the slope
surface by preventing the development of rills and gullies.

18-8.3.2 The site to be treated should be given final preparation immediately before bolster
installation. All small protrusions and depressions must be obliterated by cutting, or by
infilling and compaction.
18-8.3.3 Starting at the base of the area to be treated, and using appropriate measuring equipment,
exact lines should be marked out. From 2 metres above the base of the slope, a precise
contour line should be marked out every 2 metres up the slope.

18-8.3.4 Starting at the bottom, trenches with circular base should be dug along the lines, adequate
to take the final 300 mm diameter tubes.

Technical Specifications : Protection Work 176

18-8.3.5 Bolster panels should then be laid along the trenches and shaped to fit neatly into the base
of the trenches, as well as into any curves formed as a result of the slope contours; each
panel should be securely joined to the next panel, to form a continuous bolster tube.

18-8.3.6 The panels should be packed with stones, closed over and the edges wired together. All
stones must be bigger than the mesh size. The same care should be taken as when filling a
conventional gabion basket, and stones must be carefully placed to give good structural
integrity.

18-8.3.7 The ends of the bolsters should be closed over and wired together. The trenches around all
the bolsters should then be filled and compacted with material left from the excavations.

18-8.3.8 Once all of the lines are in place, all surplus debris should be cleaned off the slope. Mild
steel bars of at least 10 mm diameter should then be driven into the slope through the lower
sides of the contour bolsters. These should be at least every 2 metres along the lines. Bars
should be 2 metres in length on slopes composed of soft materials, but at the Engineer's
discretion, on slopes comprising hard rocky materials, bars of 1 metre length will be
adequate. All bars must be driven home until the tops protrude no more than 25 mm above
the slope surface.

18-8.4 Placement of Herringbone Bolsters

18-8.4.1 A herringbone bolster network is in essence a system of wire tubes of between 300 mm to
1200 mm in diameter depending on the amount of water flowing through the site, laid in
trenches cut into the slope. A main bolster runs straight down the slope (the spine) with
others running into it at an angle of 30 to 50 degrees to the fall of the slope (the
herringbones or branches) depending on slope angle and terrain morphology. The tops of
all the tubes should be flush with the surface of the slope in which they are placed or inlaid
to allow boulder pitching to be laid over the top. The purpose is both to check scour of the
slope surface by preventing the development of rills and gullies, and to drain the surface
material in a similar way to a French drain. The diagonal components should be at 2 to 5
metre centres if measured straight down the slope.

18-8.4.2 The site to be treated should be given final preparation immediately before bolster
installation. All small protrusions and depressions must be obliterated by cutting, or by
infilling and compaction.

18-8.4.3 Starting at the base of the area to be treated, and using appropriate measuring equipment,
exact lines should be marked out: every 7.1 metres across the slope, a line should run
straight up to the top of the slope (these form the main bolster spines). From the base of
the line, and every 3 metres above this, other lines of 5 metres length should be marked at
45 degrees to the main line (these will form the herringbones).

18-8.4.4 Starting at the bottom, trenches with circular base should be dug along the lines, adequate
to take the final 300 mm diameter tubes, or 600 mm diameter tubes if larger (5 x 2 metre)
panels are specified.

18-8.4.5 If it is specified that an impermeable lining should be used, then 20 gauge black polythene
sheeting must be laid along the bottoms of the trenches and the bolsters constructed on top
of this.

Technical Specifications : Protection Work 177

18-8.4.6 Bolster panels should then be laid along the trenches and shaped to fit neatly into the base
of the trenches, as well as into any curves formed as a result of the slope contours; the
panels of the herringbones should be securely joined to the panels of the main bolster.

18-8.4.7 The panels should be gradually closed together and secured, working up from the bottom of
the slope, while stones are passed in from above to fill them. The stones should be
randomly packed so as to allow free drainage, and all stones must be bigger than the mesh
size. The same care should be taken as when filling a conventional gabion basket, and
stones must be carefully placed to give good structural integrity.

18-8.4.8 The upper ends of the herringbones should be closed over and wired together; they should
touch the ends of the next herringbones but should not be secured to each other. The
trenches around all the bolsters should then be filled and compacted with material left from
the excavations.

18-8.4.9 Once all of the lines are in place, all surplus debris should be cleaned off the slope. Mild
steel bars of at least 10 mm diameter should then be driven into the slope through the sides
of the main spine bolsters and the lower sides of the herringbone bolsters. These should be
at least every 2 metres along the lines. Bars should be 2 metres in length on slopes
composed of soft materials, but at the Engineer's discretion, on slopes comprising hard
rocky materials, bars of 1 metre length will be adequate. All bars must be driven home
until the tops protrude no more than 25 mm above the slope surface.

18 -9 SITE PROTECTION

18-9.1 General

18-9.1.1 The Contractor/Users’ Group is to protect a planted site for the period specified.
Protection is to include the prevention of damage to all manner of site works and plants by
local people and domestic or wild animals. It also includes an active role in tending the
plants and improving their growth, as specified below.

18-9.1.2 Because of the long time required for plants to become robust, the period of maintenance
by the Contractor/Users’ Group will normally be for twelve months. However, in the case
of small contracts, a period of only six months may be specified.

18-9.2 Provision and Role of Site Watchmen

18-9.2.1 The Contractor/Users’ Group is required to provide an adequate number of site watchmen
to fulfil the specified requirements. The term “watchmen” can be assumed to cover women
as well.
18-9.2.2 Watchmen must be mature and reliable characters who need little supervision for the
adequate fulfilment of their duties. They must be active and physically fit. Old people
who are losing their strength should not be employed. They must be experienced
agricultural workers familiar with caring for plants. They must be prepared to remain on
site through all hours of daylight and through all adverse weather conditions. They must
eat their meals on site and at no time leave the site untended for any reason whatsoever.

18-9.2.3 The role of the watchman is primarily to tend the plants. He must take the initiative in
weeding, mulching, replanting failed plants, pruning and protecting plants against all pests.
This is an active role requiring individuals with considerable energy and initiative. The

Technical Specifications : Protection Work 178

 watchman must work constantly to maintain and improve the site and its bio-engineering
plants.

18-9.2.4 The watchman is also required to protect plants on the site from damage by local people,
domestic and wild animals. In doing this he should use a friendly approach to the people
as far as possible. The Contractor/Users’ Group must educate the watchman fully in the
reasons for his/her job, so that he/she can explain to others the importance of safeguarding
the plants on the site. He/she should be an effective communicator with others since he/she
also fulfils and inevitable function as the ambassador between the DDCs and local road
neighbours.

18-9.3 Fabrication of Bamboo Tree Guards

18-9.3.1 The Contractor/Users’ Group shall provide bamboo tree guards as required by the
Engineer. This shall be done according to the specifications described hereunder, as and
when required. The Contractor/Users’ Group shall supply all necessary supervision,
resources and facilities to ensure that these requirements are met.

18-9.3.2 The bamboo strips used to make bamboo tree guards are to be made from mal bans
(Bambusa nutans subsp cupulata) whilst the uprights are to be made from tharu or dhanu bas
(Bambusa nutans subsp nutans or Bambusa balcooa). Bamboo tree guards shall be a minimum
of 450 mm in diameter by 1300 mm in height so that they are able to provide sufficient
protection from grazing and from the elements for the first 18 months after planting the
seedling.

18-9.3.3 The guard is made by cutting 5 bamboo posts which are a minimum of 50 mm wide by 10
mm thick and at least 1600 mm long. The posts should be cut so that they have a strong
spear-like point at the bottom that can be driven into the ground when placing out on site.
The bamboo poles used to make the uprights should be a minimum of 3 years old.

18-9.3.4 Bamboo strips, a minimum of 5 mm thick and 50 mm wide are cut from poles that are at
least 2 years old. The bamboo used must be split so that the outer wall remains intact.
Only lengths with the outer wall intact are to be used. The split bamboo should be the
length of the whole bamboo pole that it is cut from, or as long as possible. The split
bamboo must be woven in and out of the bamboo uprights and pulled tight, so that it is firm
and strong. The end of each of the strips must be woven back into the basket and tied with
binding wire to keep it in place. End pieces must not be left sticking out and unbound,
because they quickly get broken and the basket starts to unravel from this point. The split
bamboo should be woven round the poles so that when they are tightly pressed down there
are no gaps in the guard.

18-9.4 Placement of Bamboo Tree Guards

18-9.4.1 Tree guards are to be installed on site at the time of planting, no later than the second week
of July, and must be placed carefully around the planted seedlings.

18-9.4.2 The tree guards should be placed over the seedling immediately after planting. The upright
posts must be firmly driven at least 200 mm into the ground so that the guard is able to
resist bashing and rubbing from cows, buffalo, goats and people. The woven slats should

Technical Specifications : Protection Work 179

 be pushed down firmly from the bottom upwards so that they touch one another and are
free from large gaps.

18-9.4.3 Tree guards alone are not adequate protection for small plants. The Contractor/Users’
Group must provide a site watchman in addition, for the time specified, to maintain the tree
guards and ensure that local people respect them, and generally fulfil all the requirements
of clause 18-9.2.

18 -10 SITE AFTERCARE AND MAINTENANCE

18-10.1 The Contractor/Users’ Group shall maintain planted bio-engineering sites as required by
the Engineer. This shall be done according to the specifications described hereunder, as
and when required. The Contractor/Users’ Group shall supply all necessary expertise and
resources to ensure that these requirements are met.

18-10.2 The Contractor/Users’ Group shall carry out weeding as required throughout the site. All
annual weeds and other unwanted plants shall be cut just above the ground and the aerial
parts will be used to make compost or mulch. Weeds must not be pulled out by the roots
since this disturbs the ground surface.

18-10.3 Weeding should be carried out throughout the growing season. It must be undertaken with
particular diligence at the end of the monsoon, so that there is the minimum amount of
competition during the subsequent dry season.

18-10.4 The Contractor/Users’ Group shall carry out mulching as required throughout the site. All
plants required under the bio-engineering specifications will be mulched using material
prepared as specified in clause 18-4.6, or the aerial parts of weeds cut on the site or brought
from elsewhere for the purpose. The desired plants should be kept mulched at all times but
especial care must be taken in the spring, when the soil moisture deficit is at its greatest.

18-10.5 The Contractor/Users’ Group shall replace failed, damaged, diseased and very weak plants,
using fresh, healthy plants of the same species, at the correct time of year for planting.
This replanting operation will normally be carried out during the monsoon in the year
following the first planting works. Vegetation structures will be enriched by the planting
of additional cuttings or seedlings, as instructed by the Engineer. Failed seeding areas will
be re-seeded at the appropriate time of year.

18-10.6 In replanting and enrichment works, the Engineer may specify the use of different species.
This will be done where failures of poor performance of plants may be attributed to poor
stock or an incorrect initial choice of species.

18-10.7 All bio-engineering sites must be maintained so that there are at least the following two
storeys of vegetation. In certain locations, however, there may be a number of additional
vegetation storeys.

i) A dense ground cover of healthy grass plants, in the configuration specified at the
time of planting.

ii) An open canopy of shrubs or trees with a deeper rooting network.

Technical Specifications : Protection Work 180

18-10.8 In general it is necessary to keep the upper canopy thinned in order to maintain lower
ground cover. Most grasses require high light intensities and become degraded if subjected
to excessive shade from the over storey. It is therefore the Contractor’s/Users’ Group's
responsibility to thin the canopy as necessary to permit adequate levels of light to penetrate
for the optimum growth of the grass under storey.

18-10.9 All thinning and pruning operations are to be undertaken in accordance with the guidelines
issued by the Geo-Environmental Unit of the DoR or the DTPS of DoLIDAR. Since these
are skilled silvicultural operations, the Contractor/Users’ Group must take appropriate
professional advice and employ suitably skilled personnel.

18-10.10 All products from thinning and pruning operations are to be disposed of in accordance with
the regulations of His Majesty's Government. The Contractor/Users’ Group should follow
the instructions of the Engineer in this regard.

18-10.11 Other maintenance operations are to be undertaken by the Contractor/Users’ Group

according to the instructions of the Engineer.

Technical Specifications : Protection Work 181